DL05/06 Option Modules USER MANUAL

DL05/06 Option Modules USER MANUAL
DL05/06 Option Modules
USER MANUAL
Manual Number: D0-OPTIONS-M
WARNING
Thank you for purchasing automation equipment from Automationdirect.com™, doing business as
AutomationDirect. We want your new automation equipment to operate safely. Anyone who installs or
uses this equipment should read this publication (and any other relevant publications) before installing or
operating the equipment.
To minimize the risk of potential safety problems, you should follow all applicable local and national codes
that regulate the installation and operation of your equipment. These codes vary from area to area and
usually change with time. It is your responsibility to determine which codes should be followed, and to
verify that the equipment, installation, and operation is in compliance with the latest revision of these
codes.
At a minimum, you should follow all applicable sections of the National Fire Code, National Electrical
Code, and the codes of the National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA). There may be local
regulatory or government offices that can also help determine which codes and standards are necessary for
safe installation and operation.
Equipment damage or serious injury to personnel can result from the failure to follow all applicable codes
and standards. We do not guarantee the products described in this publication are suitable for your
particular application, nor do we assume any responsibility for your product design, installation, or
operation.
Our products are not fault-tolerant and are not designed, manufactured or intended for use or resale as online control equipment in hazardous environments requiring fail-safe performance, such as in the
operation of nuclear facilities, aircraft navigation or communication systems, air traffic control, direct life
support machines, or weapons systems, in which the failure of the product could lead directly to death,
personal injury, or severe physical or environmental damage ("High Risk Activities"). AutomationDirect
specifically disclaims any expressed or implied warranty of fitness for High Risk Activities.
For additional warranty and safety information, see the Terms and Conditions section of our catalog. If
you have any questions concerning the installation or operation of this equipment, or if you need
additional information, please call us at 770-844-4200.
This publication is based on information that was available at the time it was printed. At
AutomationDirect we constantly strive to improve our products and services, so we reserve the right to
make changes to the products and/or publications at any time without notice and without any obligation.
This publication may also discuss features that may not be available in certain revisions of the product.
Trademarks
This publication may contain references to products produced and/or offered by other companies. The
product and company names may be trademarked and are the sole property of their respective owners.
AutomationDirect disclaims any proprietary interest in the marks and names of others.
Copyright 2007, Automationdirect.com™ Incorporated
All Rights Reserved
No part of this manual shall be copied, reproduced, or transmitted in any way without the prior, written
consent of Automationdirect.com™ Incorporated. AutomationDirect retains the exclusive rights to all
information included in this document.
AVERTISSEMENT
Nous vous remercions d'avoir acheté l'équipement d'automatisation de Automationdirect.com™, en faisant des
affaires comme AutomationDirect. Nous tenons à ce que votre nouvel équipement d'automatisation fonctionne en
toute sécurité. Toute personne qui installe ou utilise cet équipement doit lire la présente publication (et toutes les
autres publications pertinentes) avant de l'installer ou de l'utiliser.
Afin de réduire au minimum le risque d'éventuels problèmes de sécurité, vous devez respecter tous les codes locaux et
nationaux applicables régissant l'installation et le fonctionnement de votre équipement. Ces codes diffèrent d'une
région à l'autre et, habituellement, évoluent au fil du temps. Il vous incombe de déterminer les codes à respecter et
de vous assurer que l'équipement, l'installation et le fonctionnement sont conformes aux exigences de la version la
plus récente de ces codes.
Vous devez, à tout le moins, respecter toutes les sections applicables du Code national de prévention des incendies,
du Code national de l'électricité et des codes de la National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA). Des
organismes de réglementation ou des services gouvernementaux locaux peuvent également vous aider à déterminer
les codes ainsi que les normes à respecter pour assurer une installation et un fonctionnement sûrs.
L'omission de respecter la totalité des codes et des normes applicables peut entraîner des dommages à l'équipement
ou causer de graves blessures au personnel. Nous ne garantissons pas que les produits décrits dans cette publication
conviennent à votre application particulière et nous n'assumons aucune responsabilité à l'égard de la conception, de
l'installation ou du fonctionnement de votre produit.
Nos produits ne sont pas insensibles aux défaillances et ne sont ni conçus ni fabriqués pour l'utilisation ou la revente
en tant qu'équipement de commande en ligne dans des environnements dangereux nécessitant une sécurité absolue,
par exemple, l'exploitation d'installations nucléaires, les systèmes de navigation aérienne ou de communication, le
contrôle de la circulation aérienne, les équipements de survie ou les systèmes d'armes, pour lesquels la défaillance du
produit peut provoquer la mort, des blessures corporelles ou de graves dommages matériels ou environnementaux
(«activités à risque élevé»). La société AutomationDirect nie toute garantie expresse ou implicite d'aptitude à l'emploi
en ce qui a trait aux activités à risque élevé.
Pour des renseignements additionnels touchant la garantie et la sécurité, veuillez consulter la section Modalités et
conditions de notre documentation. Si vous avez des questions au sujet de l'installation ou du fonctionnement de cet
équipement, ou encore si vous avez besoin de renseignements supplémentaires, n'hésitez pas à nous téléphoner au
770-844-4200.
Cette publication s'appuie sur l'information qui était disponible au moment de l'impression. À la société
AutomationDirect, nous nous efforçons constamment d'améliorer nos produits et services. C'est pourquoi nous nous
réservons le droit d'apporter des modifications aux produits ou aux publications en tout temps, sans préavis ni
quelque obligation que ce soit. La présente publication peut aussi porter sur des caractéristiques susceptibles de ne
pas être offertes dans certaines versions révisées du produit.
Marques de commerce
La présente publication peut contenir des références à des produits fabriqués ou offerts par d'autres entreprises. Les
désignations des produits et des entreprises peuvent être des marques de commerce et appartiennent exclusivement à
leurs propriétaires respectifs. AutomationDirect nie tout intérêt dans les autres marques et désignations.
Copyright 2007, Automationdirect.com™ Incorporated
Tous droits réservés
Nulle partie de ce manuel ne doit être copiée, reproduite ou transmise de quelque façon que ce soit sans le
consentement préalable écrit de la société Automationdirect.com™ Incorporated. AutomationDirect conserve les
droits exclusifs à l'égard de tous les renseignements contenus dans le présent document.
DL05/06 OPTION MODULES
USER MANUAL
Please include the Manual Number and the Manual Issue, both shown below,
when communicating with Technical Support regarding this publication.
Manual Number:
D0-OPTIONS-M
Issue:
7th Edition
Issue Date:
05/07
Publication History
Issue
Date
Description of Changes
Original
09/01
original issue
Rev. A
12/01
made changes to analog specifications
2nd edition
01/02
added new chapter and minor changes to chapters
3rd edition
05/02
added wiring guidelines and new discrete module
4th edition
4th edition
Rev. A
5th edition
07/02
added DL06 micro PLC information
02/03
minor changes and corrections
05/03
added new chapter
6th edition
6th edition
Rev. A
6th edition
Rev. B
6th edition
Rev. C
7th edition
08/03
added one new chapter and reference new discrete module
01/04
added one new chapter
03/04
added two new discrete modules, moved D0-01MC Memory Cartridge/Real Time
Clock module to DL05 user manual
05/05
added F0-08SIM module; minor corrections
05/07
added six new chapters for high resolution analog modules
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter 1: Getting Started
Introduction 1–2
The Purpose of this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1–2
Supplemental Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1–2
Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1–2
Conventions Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1–2
Key Topics for Each Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1–2
Selecting the Proper Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1–3
DL05 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1–3
DL06 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1–3
Module Choices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1–3
Installing the Option Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1–5
Remove the Slot Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1–5
Insert the Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1–5
Power Budgeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1–6
Power supplied . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1–6
Power required by base unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1–6
Power required by option cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1–6
Chapter 2: Discrete I/O Guidelines
Safety Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2–2
Plan for Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2–2
Three Levels of Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2–3
Emergency Stops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2–3
Emergency Power Disconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2–4
Orderly System Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2–4
Class 1, Division 2 Approval (Applies ONLY to modules used with a DL06 PLC.) . . .2–4
Table of Contents
System Wiring Strategies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2–5
PLC Isolation Boundaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2–5
Sinking/Sourcing Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2–7
I/O “Common” Terminal Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2–8
Connecting DC I/O to Solid State Field Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2–9
Solid State Input Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2–9
Solid State Output Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2–9
Relay Output Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2–11
Prolonging Relay Contact Life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2–11
Surge Suppression For Inductive Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2–12
Prolonging Relay Contact Life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2–13
DC Input Wiring Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2–14
DC Output Wiring Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2–14
Firmware and Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2–14
I/O Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2–15
Module I/O Points and Addressing for the DL05 and DL06 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2–15
Discrete and Analog Modules Installed I/O Addressing Example: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2–16
Discrete and Analog Modules Installed I/O Addressing Example: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2–16
All Discrete Modules Installed I/O Addressing Example: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2–16
Discrete I/O General Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2–17
Glossary of Specification Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2–18
F0-08SIM8-Point Simulator Input Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2–19
D0-10ND310-Point DC Input Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2–20
D0-10ND3F10-Point DC Fast Input Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2–21
D0-16ND316-Point DC Input Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2–22
F0-08NA-18-Point AC Input Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2–23
D0-10TD110-Point DC Output Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2–24
D0-16TD116-Point DC Output Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2–25
D0-10TD210-Point DC Output Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2–26
D0-16TD216-Point DC Output Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2–27
D0-07CDR4-Point DC Input and 3-Point Relay Output Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2–28
D0-08TR8-Point Relay Output Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2–29
D0-08CDD14-Point DC Input and 4-Point DC Output Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2–30
F0-04TRS4-Point Relay Output Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2–31
ii
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
Table of Contents
Chapter 3: F0-04AD-1
4-Ch. Analog Current Input . . . . . . . . . . . . .3–1
Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3–2
Setting the Module Jumper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3–4
Connecting and Disconnecting the Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3–4
Wiring Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3–4
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3–5
Current Loop Transmitter Impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3–5
Module Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3–6
Channel Scanning Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3–6
Analog Module Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3–6
Special V-memory Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3–7
Formatting the Module Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3–7
DL05 Data Formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3–7
Structure of V7700 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3–7
Structure of V7701 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3–7
DL06 Data Formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3–8
Setup Data Type and Number of Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3–8
Storage Pointer Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3–8
Using the Pointer in Your Control Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3–9
DL05 Pointer Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3–9
DL06 Pointer Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3–10
Detecting Input Signal Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3–11
Analog Signal Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3–11
Scale Conversions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3–11
Scaling the Input Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3–11
The Conversion Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3–12
Analog and Digital Value Conversions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3–12
Special Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3–13
DL05 Special Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3–13
DL06 SpecialRelays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3–13
Module Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3–15
Analog Data Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3–15
Resolution Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3–15
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
iii
Table of Contents
Analog Input Ladder Logic Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3–16
PID Loops / Filtering: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3–16
Smoothing the Input Signal (DL06 only): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3–16
Using Binary Data Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3–16
Using BCD Data Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3–17
Chapter 4: F0-08ADH-1 8-Ch.Analog Current Input . . . . . . . . . . . . .4–1
Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4–2
Connecting and Disconnecting the Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4–4
Wiring Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4–4
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4–5
Current Loop Transmitter Impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4–5
Module Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4–6
Channel Scanning Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4–6
Analog Module Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4–6
Special V-memory Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4–7
Formatting the Analog Module Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4–7
DL05 Data Formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4–7
Setup Data Type and Number of Active Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4–7
Storage Pointer Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4–7
DL06 Data Formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4–8
Setup Data Type and Number of Active Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4–8
Storage Pointer Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4–8
Using the Pointer in Your Control Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4–9
DL05 Pointer Method Using Conventional Ladder Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4–9
DL05 Pointer Method Using the IBox Instruction Available in DirectSOFT5 . . . . . . .4–9
DL06 Pointer Method Using Conventional Ladder Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4–10
DL06 Pointer Method Using the IBox Instruction Available in DirectSOFT5 . . . . . .4–11
Scale Conversions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4–11
Scaling the Input Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4–11
The Conversion Program in Standard Ladder Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4–12
Analog and Digital Value Conversions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4–13
iv
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
Table of Contents
Module Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4–14
Analog Data Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4–14
Resolution Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4–14
Analog Input Ladder Logic Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4–15
PID Loops / Filtering: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4–15
Smoothing the Input Signal (DL06 only): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4–15
Binary Data Format Filter Using Ladder Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4–15
BCD Data Format Filter Using Ladder Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4–16
Example Code to Scale a 4–20mA Signal to 0–1000 BCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4–17
Example Code to Scale a 4–20mA Signal to 0–1000 Binary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4–18
Chapter 5: F0-04AD-2
4-Ch. Analog Voltage Input . . . . . . . . . . . . .5–1
Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5–2
Setting the Module Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5–4
Connecting and Disconnecting the Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5–5
Wiring Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5–5
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5–5
Module Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5–6
Input Channel Update Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5–6
Analog Module Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5–6
Special V-memory Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5–7
Formatting the Module Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5–7
DL05 Data Formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5–7
Structure of V7700 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5–7
Structure of V7701 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5–7
DL06 Data Formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5–8
Setup Data Type and Number of Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5–8
Storage Pointer Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5–8
Using the Pointer in Your Control Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5–9
DL05 Pointer Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5–9
DL06 Pointer Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5–10
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
v
Table of Contents
Scale Conversions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5–11
Scaling the Input Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5–11
The Conversion Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5–12
Analog and Digital Value Conversions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5–13
Module Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5–14
Analog Data Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5–14
Resolution Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5–14
Analog Input Ladder Logic Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5–15
PID Loops / Filtering: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5–15
Smoothing the Input Signal (DL06 only): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5–15
Using Binary Data Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5–15
Using BCD Data Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5–16
Chapter 6: F0-08ADH-2 8-Ch.Analog Voltage Input . . . . . . . . . . . . .6–1
Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6–2
Locating the jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6–4
Setting the appropriate jumper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6–4
Setting the Module Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6–4
Connecting and Disconnecting the Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6–5
Wiring Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6–5
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6–6
Module Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6–7
Channel Scanning Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6–7
Analog Module Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6–7
Special V-memory Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6–8
Formatting the Analog Module Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6–8
DL05 Data Formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6–8
Setup Data Type and Number of Active Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6–8
Storage Pointer Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6–8
DL06 Data Formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6–9
Setup Data Type and Number of Active Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6–9
Storage Pointer Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6–9
vi
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
Table of Contents
Using the Pointer in Your Control Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6–10
DL05 Pointer Method Using Conventional Ladder Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6–10
DL05 Pointer Method Using the IBox Instruction Available in DirectSOFT5 . . . . . .6–10
DL06 Pointer Method Using Conventional Ladder Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6–11
DL06 Pointer Method Using the IBox Instruction Available in DirectSOFT5 . . . . . .6–12
Scale Conversions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6–12
Scaling the Input Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6–12
The Conversion Program in Standard Ladder Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6–13
Analog and Digital Value Conversions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6–14
Module Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6–15
Analog Data Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6–15
Resolution Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6–15
Analog Input Ladder Logic Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6–16
PID Loops / Filtering: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6–16
Smoothing the Input Signal (DL06 only): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6–16
Binary Data Format Filter Using Ladder Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6–16
Using BCD Data Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6–17
Chapter 7: F0-04DAH-1 4-Ch.Analog Current Output . . . . . . . . . . .7–1
Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7–2
Connecting and Disconnecting the Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7–4
Wiring Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7–4
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7–5
Module Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7–6
Channel Scanning Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7–6
Special V-memory Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7–7
Formatting the Analog Module Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7–7
DL05 Data Formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7–7
Data Type and Number of Active Channels Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7–7
Storage Pointer Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7–7
DL06 Data Formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7–8
Data Type and Number of Active Channels Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7–8
Storage Pointer Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7–8
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
vii
Table of Contents
Using the Pointer in Your Control Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7–9
DL05 Pointer Method Using Conventional Ladder Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7–9
DL05 Pointer Method Using the IBox Instruction Available in DirectSOFT5 . . . . . . .7–9
DL06 Pointer Method Using Conventional Ladder Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7–10
DL06 Pointer Method Using the IBox Instruction Available in DirectSOFT5 . . . . . .7–11
Output Scale Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7–11
Calculating the Digital Output Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7–11
The Conversion Program in Standard Ladder Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7–12
Analog and Digital Value Conversions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7–13
Module Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7–14
Analog Data Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7–14
Resolution Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7–14
Chapter 8: F0-08DAH-1 8-Ch.Analog Current Output . . . . . . . . . . .8–1
Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8–2
Connecting and Disconnecting the Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8–4
Wiring Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8–4
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8–5
Module Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8–6
Channel Scanning Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8–6
Special System V-memory Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8–7
Formatting the Analog Module Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8–7
DL05 Data Formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8–7
Data Type and Number of Active Channels Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8–7
Storage Pointer Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8–7
DL06 Data Formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8–8
Data Type and Number of Active Channels Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8–8
Storage Pointer Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8–8
Using the Pointer in Your Control Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8–9
DL05 Pointer Method Using Conventional Ladder Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8–9
DL05 Pointer Method Using the IBox Instruction Available in DirectSOFT5 . . . . . . .8–9
DL06 Pointer Method Using Conventional Ladder Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8–10
DL06 Pointer Method Using the IBox Instruction Available in DirectSOFT5 . . . . . .8–11
viii
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
Table of Contents
Output Scale Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8–11
Calculating the Digital Output Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8–11
The Conversion Program in Standard Ladder Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8–12
Analog and Digital Value Conversions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8–13
Module Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8–14
Analog Data Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8–14
Resolution Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8–14
Chapter 9: F0-04DAH-2 4-Ch.Analog Voltage Output . . . . . . . . . . .9–1
Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9–2
Connecting and Disconnecting the Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9–4
Wiring Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9–4
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9–5
Module Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9–6
Channel Scanning Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9–6
Special V-memory Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9–7
Formatting the Analog Module Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9–7
DL05 Data Formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9–7
Data Type and Number of Active Channels Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9–7
Storage Pointer Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9–7
DL06 Data Formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9–8
Data Type and Number of Active Channels Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9–8
Storage Pointer Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9–8
Using the Pointer in Your Control Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9–9
DL05 Pointer Method Using Conventional Ladder Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9–9
DL05 Pointer Method Using the IBox Instruction Available in DirectSOFT5 . . . . . . .9–9
DL06 Pointer Method Using Conventional Ladder Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9–10
DL06 Pointer Method Using the IBox Instruction Available in DirectSOFT5 . . . . . .9–11
Output Scale Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9–11
Calculating the Digital Output Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9–11
The Conversion Program in Standard Ladder Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9–12
Analog and Digital Value Conversions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9–13
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
ix
Table of Contents
Module Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9–14
Analog Data Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9–14
Resolution Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9–14
Chapter 10: F0-08DAH-2 8-Ch.Analog Voltage Output . . . . . . . . .10–1
Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10–2
Connecting and Disconnecting the Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10–4
Wiring Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10–4
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10–5
Module Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10–6
Channel Scanning Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10–6
Special V-memory Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10–7
Formatting the Analog Module Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10–7
DL05 Data Formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10–7
Data Type and Number of Active Channels Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10–7
Storage Pointer Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10–7
DL06 Data Formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10–8
Data Type and Number of Active Channels Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10–8
Storage Pointer Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10–8
Using the Pointer in Your Control Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10–9
DL05 Pointer Method Using Conventional Ladder Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10–9
DL05 Pointer Method Using the IBox Instruction Available in DirectSOFT5 . . . . . .10–9
DL06 Pointer Method Using Conventional Ladder Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10–10
DL06 Pointer Method Using the IBox Instruction Available in DirectSOFT5 . . . . .10–11
Output Scale Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10–11
Calculating the Digital Output Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10–11
The Conversion Program in Standard Ladder Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10–12
Analog and Digital Value Conversions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10–13
Module Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10–14
Analog Data Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10–14
Resolution Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10–14
x
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
Table of Contents
Chapter 11: F0-4AD2DA-1 4-Ch. In/2-Ch. Out
Analog Current Combination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11–1
Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11–2
Setting the Module Jumper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11–4
Connecting and Disconnecting the Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11–5
Wiring Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11–5
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11–6
Module Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11–7
Input/Output Channel Update Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11–7
Analog Module Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11–7
Special V-memory Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11–8
Formatting theModule Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11–8
DL05 Data Formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11–8
Structure of V7700 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11–8
Structure of V7701 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11–8
Structure of V7702 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11–9
DL06 Data Formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11–10
Setup Data Type and Number of Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11–10
Input Storage Pointer Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11–10
Output Storage Pointer Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11–10
Using the Pointer in Your Control Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11–11
DL05 Pointer Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11–11
DL06 Pointer Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11–12
Scale Conversions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11–13
Scaling the Input Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11–13
The Conversion Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11–14
Output Conversion Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11–14
Analog and Digital Value Conversions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11–15
Module Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11–16
Analog Data Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11–16
Resolution Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11–16
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
xi
Table of Contents
Analog Input Ladder Logic Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11–17
PID Loops / Filtering: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11–17
Smoothing the Input Signal (DL06 only): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11–17
Using Binary Data Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11–17
Using BCD Data Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11–18
Chapter 12: F0-2AD2DA-2 2-Ch. In/2-Ch. Out
Analog Voltage Combination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12–1
Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12–2
Setting the Module Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12–4
Connecting and Disconnecting the Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12–5
Wiring Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12–5
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12–5
Module Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12–6
Input/Output Channel Scanning Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12–6
Analog Module Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12–6
Special V-memory Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12–7
Formatting the Module Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12–7
DL05 Data Formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12–7
Structure of V7700 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12–7
Structure of V7701 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12–7
Structure of V7702 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12–8
DL06 Data Formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12–9
Setup Data Type and Number of Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12–9
Input Storage Pointer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12–9
Output Storage Pointer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12–9
Using the Pointer in Your Control Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12–10
DL05 Pointer Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12–10
DL06 Pointer Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12–11
Scale Conversions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12–12
Scaling the Input Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12–12
The Conversion Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12–13
Output Conversion Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12–13
Analog and Digital Value Conversions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12–14
xii
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
Table of Contents
Module Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12–15
Analog Data Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12–15
Analog Input Ladder Logic Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12–16
PID Loops / Filtering: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12–16
Smoothing the Input Signal (DL06 only): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12–16
Using Binary Data Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12–16
Using BCD Data Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12–17
Chapter 13: F0-4AD2DA-2 4-Ch. In/2-Ch. Out
Analog Voltage Combination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13–1
Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13–2
Setting the Module Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13–4
Connecting and Disconnecting the Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13–5
Wiring Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13–5
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13–5
Module Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13–6
Input/Output Channel Update Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13–6
Analog Module Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13–6
Special V-memory Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13–7
Formatting the Module Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13–7
DL05 Data Formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13–7
Structure of V7700 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13–7
Structure of V7701 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13–7
Structure of V7702 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13–8
DL06 Data Formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13–9
Setup Data Type and Number of Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13–9
Input Storage Pointer Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13–9
Output Storage Pointer Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13–9
Using the Pointer in Your Control Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13–10
DL05 Pointer Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13–10
DL06 Pointer Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13–11
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
xiii
Table of Contents
Scale Conversions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13–12
Scaling the Input Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13–12
The Conversion Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13–13
Output Conversion Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13–13
Analog and Digital Value Conversions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13–14
Module Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13–15
Analog Data Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13–15
Resolution Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13–15
Analog Input Ladder Logic Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13–16
PID Loops / Filtering: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13–16
Smoothing the Input Signal (DL06 only): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13–16
Using Binary Data Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13–16
Using BCD Data Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13–17
Chapter 14: F0-04RTD 4-ChannelRTD Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14–1
Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14–2
Module Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14–3
Input Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14–3
Connecting and Disconnecting the Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14–4
Wiring Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14–4
RTD - Resistance Temperature Detector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14–4
Ambient Variations in Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14–5
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14–5
Module Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14–6
Channel Scanning Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14–6
Analog Module Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14–6
Special V-memory Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14–7
Module Configuration Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14–7
A: Number of Channels Enabled/Data Format Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14–7
B: Input Pointer Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14–8
C: RTD Type Selection Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14–8
D: Units Code Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14–9
E: RTD Burnout Data Value Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14–10
F: Diagnostics Error Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14–10
xiv
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
Table of Contents
Configuring the Module in Your Control Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14–11
DL05 Example 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14–11
DL05 Example 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14–12
DL06 Example 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14–13
DL06 Example 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14–14
Negative Temperature Readings with Magnitude Plus Sign . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14–15
Magnitude Plus Sign (Binary) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14–15
Magnitude Plus Sign (BCD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14–16
Negative Temperatures 2’s Complement (Binary/Pointer Method) . . . . . . . . . . .14–17
Analog Input Ladder Logic Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14–18
PID Loops / Filtering: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14–18
Smoothing the Input Signal (DL06 only): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14–18
Using Binary Data Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14–18
Using BCD Data Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14–19
RTD Burnout Detection Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14–20
Special Relays Corresponding to RTD Burnouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14–20
Chapter 15: F0-04THM 4-Channel Thermocouple Input . . . . . . . . .15–1
Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15–2
Connecting and Disconnecting the Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15–4
Wiring Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15–4
Thermocouple Input Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15–4
Thermocouples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15–5
Ambient Variations in Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15–5
Voltage Input Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15–6
Module Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15–7
Channel Scanning Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15–7
Analog Module Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15–7
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
xv
Table of Contents
Special V-memory Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15–8
Module Configuration Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15–8
A: Number of Channels Enabled/Data Format Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15–8
B: Input Pointer Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15–9
C: Input Type Selection Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15–9
D: Units Code Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15–10
E: Thermocouple Burnout Detection Enable Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15–11
F: Thermocouple Burnout Data Value Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15–11
G: Diagnostics Error Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15–11
Configuring the Module in Your Control Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15–12
DL05 Example 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15–12
DL05 Example 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15–13
DL06 Example 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15–14
DL06 Example 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15–15
Negative Temperature Readings with Magnitude Plus Sign . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15–16
Magnitude Plus Sign (Binary) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15–16
Magnitude Plus Sign (BCD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15–17
Module Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15–18
Module Resolution 16-Bit (Unipolar Voltage Input) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15–18
Module Resolution 15-Bit Plus Sign (Bipolar Voltage Input) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15–18
Analog Input Ladder Logic Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15–19
PID Loops / Filtering: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15–19
Smoothing the Input Signal (DL06 only): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15–19
Using Binary Data Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15–19
Using BCD Data Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15–20
Thermocouple Burnout Detection Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15–21
Special Relays Corresponding to Thermocouple Burnouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15–21
xvi
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
GETTING STARTED
CHAPTER
1
In This Chapter...
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1–2
Conventions Used
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1–2
Selecting the Proper Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1–3
Installing the Option Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1–4
Power Budgeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1–5
Chapter 1: Getting Started
Introduction
1
The Purpose of this Manual
This manual will discribe the option modules that are available for the DL05 and DL06 micro
2
PLC families. It will show you how to select and install an option module for your PLC.
Supplemental Manuals
3
You will either need a copy of the DL05 User Manual (D0–USER–M) or the DL06 User
Manual (D0–06USER–M) at hand when incorporating any one of the option modules in
4
your PLC.
Technical Support
5
We strive to make our manuals the best in the industry. We rely on your feedback to let us know
if we are reaching our goal. If you cannot find the solution to your particular application, or, if
6
for any reason you need technical assistance, please call us at:
770–844–4200
7
Our technical support group will work with you to answer your questions. They are available
Monday through Friday from 9:00 A.M. to 6:00 P.M. Eastern Time. We also encourage you to
visit our web site where you can find technical and non-technical information about our
8
products and our company.
http://www.automationdirect.com
9
If you have a comment, question or suggestion about any of our products, services, or manuals,
please fill out and return the ‘Suggestions’ card that was included with this manual.
10
Conventions Used
11
When you see the “notepad” icon in the left-hand margin, the paragraph to its immediate right will be a
special note. The word NOTE: in boldface will mark the beginning of the text.
12
When you see the “exclamation mark” icon in the left-hand margin, the paragraph to its immediate right
13
will be a warning. This information could prevent injury, loss of property, or even death (in extreme
cases). The word WARNING: in boldface will mark the beginning of the text.
14
Key Topics for Each Chapter
The beginning of each chapter will list the key topics
A
that can be found in that chapter.
C
B
1
C
D
Getting Started
HAPTER
In This Chapter...
General Information .................................................................1-2
Specifications ...........................................................................1-4
1–2
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
Chapter 1: Getting Started
Selecting the Proper Module
DL05
The DL05 Micro PLC only has one option slot to
install an option module. The proper selection of a
module is dependent on the control application.
R
PW
N
RU
U
CP
TX1
1
RX
2
TX2
2
RX
DL06
The DL06 Micro PLC has four option slots. The option
modules can also be added according to the control
application.
Module Choices
There are over thirty option modules available. The specifications and wiring diagrams for the
discrete I/O modules can be found in the next chapter. A full description of the analog modules
can be found in their respective chapters in this manual. The memory cartridge module,
D0-01MC, can be found in the DL05 Micro PLC User Manual. The communications and
specialty modules are described in their respective user manuals, see user manual p/n reference
below. The following table lists the modules available.
Discrete Modules
Part Number
Description
F0-08SIM
D0-10ND3
D0-10ND3F
D0-16ND3
F0-08NA-1
D0-10TD1
D0-16TD1
D0-10TD2
D0-16TD2
D0-07CDR
D0-08TR
D0-08CDD1
F0-04TRS
8 point Simulator Input
10 point DC Input
10 point fast DC Input
16 point DC Input
8 point AC Input
10 point DC Output (sinking)
16 point DC Output (sinking)
10 point DC Output (sourcing)
16 point DC Output (sourcing)
4 point DC Input, 3 point Relay Output
8 point Relay Output
4 point DC Input, 4 point DC Output (sinking)
4 point High Current Relay Output
Analog and Specialty module choices can be found on the next page.
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
1–3
Chapter 1: Getting Started
Module Choices, continued.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
1–4
Analog Modules
Part Number
Description
F0-04AD-1
F0-08ADH-1
F0-04AD-2
F0-08ADH-2
F0-04DAH-1
F0-08DAH-1
F0-04DAH-2
F0-08DAH-2
F0-4AD2DA-1
F0-2AD2DA-2
F0-4AD2DA-2
F0-04RTD
F0-04THM
4-Channel Analog Input, Current
8-Channel High-Resolution Analog Input, Current
4-Channel Analog Input, Voltage
8-Channel High-Resolution Analog Input, Voltage
4-Channel High-Resolution Analog Output, Current
8-Channel High-Resolution Analog Output, Current
4-Channel High-Resolution Analog Output, Voltage
8-Channel High-Resolution Analog Output, Voltage
4-Channel Input/2-Channel Output Analog Combination, Current
2-Channel Input/2-Channel Output Analog Combination, Voltage
4-Channel Input/2-Channel Output Analog Combination, Voltage
4-Channel RTD Input
4-Channel Thermocouple Input
Specialty Modules
Part Number
Description
D0-01MC
D0-DCM
D0-DEVNETS
H0-ECOM(100)
H0-PSCM
H0-CTRIO
F0-CP128
Memory Cartridge/Real Time Clock (DL05 only) (see User Manual p/n D0-USER-M)
Data Communications Module
DeviceNet Slave (User Manual p/n D0-DEVNETS-M)
10Base-T (10/100Base-T) Ethernet Network (User Manaul p/n HX-ECOM-M)
Profibus Slave Communications (User Manual p/n HX-PSCM-M)
High Speed Counter Interface (User Manual p/n HX-CTRIO-M)
Triple Port Basic CoProcessor (User Manual p/n F0-CP-M)
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
Chapter 1: Getting Started
Installing the Option Modules
Before installing the option module in the DL05 option slot or the DL06 option slots set the
necessary jumpers and/or dip switches on the module. Refer to the chapter(s) that pertains to
the module(s) being installed.
Remove the Slot Cover
The first step in installing the option module is to remove the protective option slot cover.
Remove the cover by squeezing the pinch tabs and lifting the cover off.
Pinch Tabs
Option Module
Slot Covers
G
LG
Y0 Y2
C1 Y5 Y7 Y10 Y12 C3 Y15 Y17
0V
AC(L) AC(N) 24V C0
Y1
Y3 Y4
Y6 C2
Y11 Y13 Y14 Y16 N.C.
OUTPUT: 6–240V
2.0A PWR: 100–240V 50–60Hz40VA
50 – 60Hz 2.0A, 6 – 27V
Y
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
10
11
12 13
14
15 16
17
20
PWR
RUN
CPU
D0–06DR
21 22
TX1
RX1
TX2
23
X
INPUT: 12 – 24V
RX2
3 – 15mA
C0
X1
X0
X2
X3
X4
X6
C2 X11 X13 X14 X16 C4 X21 X23 N.C.
C1
X5
X7 X10 X12 C3 X15 X17 X20 X22 N.C.
TERM
PORT1
PORT2
RUN STOP
Insert the Module
Now, insert the module into the open slot. Locate the module so the printed information is
oriented in the same direction as the markings on the PLC. Be careful to align the female
connector on the printed circuit board of the module with the male connector on the PLC
mother board. Press the module into the slot until the front of the module is flush with the front
of the PLC. Install the remaining modules in the DL06. Once the modules are in place the PLC
is ready to be programmed.
WARNING: Power to the PLCs must be disconnected before inserting or removing a module. Failure to
disconnect power could result in serious damage to a module, the PLC or both.
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
1–5
Chapter 1: Getting Started
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Power Budgeting
1–6
The DL06 has four option card slots. To determine whether the combination of cards you select
will have sufficient power, you will need to perform a power budget calculation.
Power supplied
Power is supplied from two sources, the internal base unit power supply and, if required, an
external supply (customer furnished). The D0-06xx (AC powered) PLCs supply a limited
amount of 24VDC power. The 24VDC output can be used to power external devices. For
power budgeting, start by considering the power supplied by the base unit. All DL06 PLCs
supply the same amount of 5VDC power. Only the AC units offer 24VDC auxiliary power. Be
aware of the trade-off between 5VDC power and 24VDC power. The amount of 5VDC power
available depends on the amount of 24VDC power being used, and the amount of 24VDC
power available depends on the amount of 5VDC power consumed. Determine the amount of
internally supplied power from the table on the following page.
Power required by base unit
Because of the different I/O configurations available in the DL06 family, the power consumed
by the base unit itself varies from model to model. Subtract the amount of power required by
the base unit from the amount of power supplied by the base unit. Be sure to subtract 5VDC
and 24VDC amounts.
Power required by option cards
Next, subtract the amount of power required by the option cards you are planning to use.
Again, remember to subtract both 5VDC and 24VDC. If your power budget analysis shows
surplus power available, you should have a workable configuration.
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
Chapter 1: Getting Started
DL06 Power Supplied by Base Units
Part Number
D0-06xx
D0-06xx-D
5 VDC (mA)
24 VDC (mA)
<1500mA
<2000mA
1500mA
300mA
200mA
none
DL05/06 Power Consumed
by Option Cards
Part Number
D0-07CDR
D0-08CDD1
D0-08TR
D0-10ND3
D0-10ND3F
D0-10TD1
D0-10TD2
D0-16ND3
D0-16TD1
D0-16TD2
F0-04TRS
F0-08NA-1
F0-04AD-1
F0-04AD-2
F0-2AD2DA-2
F0-4AD2DA-1
F0-4AD2DA-2
F0-04RTD
F0-04THM
F0-08SIM
F0-08ADH-1
F0-08ADH-2
F0-04DAH-1
F0-08DAH-1
F0-04DAH-2
F0-08DAH-2
D0-01MC
D0-DCM
D0-DEVNETS
H0-PSCM
H0-ECOM
H0-ECOM100
H0-CTRIO
F0-CP128
5 VDC (mA)
130mA
100mA
280mA
35mA
35mA
150mA
150mA
35mA
200mA
200mA
250mA
5mA
50mA
75mA
50mA
100mA
100mA
70mA
30mA
1mA
25mA
25mA
25mA
25mA
25mA
25mA
24 VDC (mA)
none
none
none
none
none
none
none
none
none
none
none
none
none
none
30mA
40mA
none
none
none
none
25mA
25mA
150mA
220mA
25mA
25mA
used only in DL05
250mA
none
45mA
530mA
250mA
300mA
250mA
none
none
none
none
none
150mA
none
DL06 Base Unit Power Required
Part Number
D0-06AA
D0-06AR
D0-06DA
D0-06DD1
D0-06DD2
D0-06DR
D0-06DD1-D
D0-06DD2-D
D0-06DR-D
5 VDC (mA)
24 VDC (mA)
800mA
900mA
800mA
600mA
600mA
950mA
600mA
600mA
950mA
none
none
none
280mA*
none
none
280mA*
none
none
* Auxiliary 24VDC used to power V+ terminal of
D0-06DD1/-D sinking outputs.
DL06 Power Consumed by Other Devices
Part Number
D0-06LCD
D2-HPP
DV1000
5 VDC (mA)
24 VDC (mA)
50mA
200mA
150mA
none
none
none
Power Budgeting Example
Power Source
D0-06DD1
(select row
A or row B)
A
1500mA
300mA
B
2000mA
200mA
Current Required
D0-06DD1
D0-16ND3
D0-10TD1
D0-08TR
F0-4AD2DA-2
D0-06LCD
Total Used
Remaining
5VDC
24VDC
power (mA) power (mA)
A
B
5VDC
24VDC
power (mA) power (mA)
600mA
35mA
150mA
280mA
100mA
50mA
1215mA
285mA
785mA
280mA*
0
0
0
0
0
280mA
20mA
note 1
Note 1: If the PLC’s auxiliary 24VDC power
source is used to power the sinking
outputs, use power choice A, above.
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
1–7
DISCRETE I/O GUIDELINES
CHAPTER
2
In This Chapter...
Safety Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2–2
System Wiring Strategies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2–5
I/O Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2–15
Discrete I/O General Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2–17
Glossary of Specification Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2–18
F0-08SIM - 8-Point Simulator Input Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2–19
D0-10ND3 - 10-Point DC Input Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2–20
D0-10ND3F - 10-Point DC Fast Input Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2–21
D0-16ND3 - 16-Point DC Input Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2–22
F0-08NA-1 - 8-Point AC Input Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2–23
D0-10TD1 - 10-Point DC Output Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2–24
D0-16TD1 - 16-Point DC Output Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2–25
D0-10TD2 - 10-Point DC Output Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2–26
D0-16TD2 - 16-Point DC Output Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2–27
D0-07CDR - 4-Point DC Input and 3-Point Relay Output Module . . . . . . . . . . . .2–28
D0-08TR - 8-Point Relay Output Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2–29
D0-08CDD1 - 4-Point DC Input and 4-Point DC Output Module . . . . . . . . . . . . .2–30
F0-04TRS - 4-Point Relay Output Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2–31
Chapter 2: Discrete I/O Guidelines
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Safety Guidelines
2–2
NOTE: Products with CE marks perform their required functions safely and adhere to relevant standards as
specified by CE directives provided they are used according to their intended purpose and that the
instructions in this manual are adhered to. The protection provided by the equipment may be impaired if this
equipment is used in a manner not specified in this manual. A listing of our international affiliates is available
on our Web site: http://www.automationdirect.com
WARNING: Providing a safe operating environment for personnel and equipment is your responsibility
and should be your primary goal during system planning and installation. Automation systems can fail
and may result in situations that can cause serious injury to personnel or damage to equipment. Do not
rely on the automation system alone to provide a safe operating environment. You should use external
electromechanical devices, such as relays or limit switches, that are independent of the PLC application
to provide protection for any part of the system that may cause personal injury or damage. Every
automation application is different, so there may be special requirements for your particular application.
Make sure you follow all national, state, and local government requirements for the proper installation
and use of your equipment.
Plan for Safety
The best way to provide a safe operating environment is to make personnel and equipment
safety part of the planning process. You should examine every aspect of the system to
determine which areas are critical to operator or machine safety. If you are not familiar with
PLC system installation practices, or your company does not have established installation
guidelines, you should obtain additional information from the following sources.
• NEMA — The National Electrical Manufacturers Association, located in Washington, D.C. publishes
many different documents that discuss standards for industrial control systems. You can order these
publications directly from NEMA. Some of these include:
ICS 1, General Standards for Industrial Control and Systems
ICS 3, Industrial Systems
ICS 6, Enclosures for Industrial Control Systems
• NEC — The National Electrical Code provides regulations concerning the installation and use of
various types of electrical equipment. Copies of the NEC Handbook can often be obtained from your
local electrical equipment distributor or your local library.
• Local and State Agencies — many local governments and state governments have additional
requirements above and beyond those described in the NEC Handbook. Check with your local
Electrical Inspector or Fire Marshall office for information.
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
Chapter 2: Discrete I/O Guidelines
Three Levels of Protection
The publications mentioned provide many ideas and requirements for system safety. At a
minimum, you should follow these regulations. Also, you should use the following
techniques, which provide three levels of system control.
• Emergency stop switch for disconnecting system power
• Mechanical disconnect for output module power
• Orderly system shutdown sequence in the PLC control program
Emergency Stops
It is recommended that emergency stop circuits be incorporated into the system for every
machine controlled by a PLC. For maximum safety in a PLC system, these circuits must not
be wired into the controller, but should be hardwired external to the PLC. The emergency
stop switches should be easily accessed by the operator and are generally wired into a master
control relay (MCR) or a safety control relay (SCR) that will remove power from the PLC
I/O system in an emergency.
MCRs and SCRs provide a convenient means for removing power from the I/O system
during an emergency situation. By de-energizing an MCR (or SCR) coil, power to the input
(optional) and output devices is removed. This event occurs when any emergency stop switch
opens. However, the PLC continues to receive power and operate even though all its inputs
and outputs are disabled.
The MCR circuit could be extended by placing a PLC fault relay (closed during normal PLC
operation) in series with any other emergency stop conditions. This would cause the MCR
circuit to drop the PLC I/O power in case of a PLC failure (memory error, I/O
communications error, etc.).
Use E-Stop and Master Relay
Power On
E STOP
Master
Control
Relay
Guard
Link
MCR
L1 to Output Commons
Guard Line Switch
Saw
Arbor
Emergency
Stop
0V
G
LG
Y0
Y2
C1
Y5
Y7 Y10 Y12
C3 Y15 Y17
AC(L) AC(N) 24V C0
Y1
Y3
Y4
Y6
C2
Y11 Y13 Y14 Y16 N.C.
OUTPUT: 6-240V
Y
X
0
1
2
50 - 60Hz
3
INPUT: 12 - 24V
4
5
2.0A, 6 - 27V
6
7
10
2.0A
11
12
PWR: 100-240V
13
14
15
16
PWR
RUN
CPU
TX1
RX1
TX2
RX2
50-60Hz 40VA
17
20
D0-06DR
21 22
23
3 - 15mA
LOGIC
06
K oyo
C0
X1
X0
X3
X2
X4
C1
X6
X5
X7
C2 X11 X13 X14 X16 C4 X21 X23 N.C.
X10 X12 C3
X15 X17 X20 X22 N.C.
TERM
PORT1
PORT2
RUN STOP
MCR
L1 to Input Commons
(optional)
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
2–3
Chapter 2: Discrete I/O Guidelines
Emergency Power Disconnect
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
2–4
A properly rated emergency power disconnect should be used to power the PLC controlled
system as a means of removing the power from the entire control system. It may be necessary
to install a capacitor across the disconnect to protect against a condition known as “outrush”.
This condition occurs when the output Triacs are turned off by powering off the disconnect,
thus causing the energy stored in the inductive loads to seek the shortest distance to ground,
which is often through the Triacs.
After an emergency shutdown or any other type of power interruption, there may be
requirements that must be met before the PLC control program can be restarted. For
example, there may be specific register values that must be established (or maintained from
the state prior to the shutdown) before operations can resume. In this case, you may want to
use retentive memory locations, or include constants in the control program to insure a
known starting point.
Orderly System Shutdown
Ideally, the first level of fault detection is the PLC control
program, which can identify machine problems. Certain
shutdown sequences should be performed. The types of
problems are usually things such as jammed parts, etc.
that do not pose a risk of personal injury or equipment
damage.
WARNING: The control program must not be the only form of
protection for any problems that may result in a risk of personal
injury or equipment damage.
Jam
Detect
Turn off
Saw
RST
RST
Retract
Class 1, Division 2 Approval (Applies ONLY to modules used with a DL06 PLC.)
This equipment is suitable for use in Class 1, Division 2, groups A, B, C and D or nonhazardous locations only.
WARNING: Explosion Hazard! Substitution of components may impair suitability for Class 1, Division 2.
Do not disconnect equipment unless power has been switched off or area is known to be nonhazardous.
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
Chapter 2: Discrete I/O Guidelines
System Wiring Strategies
The DirectLOGIC Micro PLCs are very flexible and will work in many different wiring
configurations. By studying this section before actual installation, you can probably find the
best wiring strategy for your application . This will help to lower system cost, wiring errors, and
avoid safety problems.
PLC Isolation Boundaries
PLC circuitry is divided into three main regions separated by isolation boundaries, shown in
the drawing below. Electrical isolation provides safety, so that a fault in one area does not
damage another. A powerline filter will provide isolation between the power source and the
power supply. A transformer in the power supply provides magnetic isolation between the
primary and secondary sides. Opto-couplers provide optical isolation in Input and Output
circuits. This isolates logic circuitry from the field side, where factory machinery connects.
Note that the discrete inputs are isolated from the discrete outputs, because each is isolated
from the logic side. Isolation boundaries protect the operator interface (and the operator)
from power input faults or field wiring faults. When wiring a PLC, it is extremely important
to avoid making external connections that connect logic side circuits to any other.
Primary Side
Secondary, or
Logic side
PLC
Power
input
Filter
Isolation
Boundary
Main
Power
Supply
Field Side
Input
Circuit
Discrete inputs
Output
Circuit
Discrete outputs
CPU
Programming Device or
Operator Interface
Isolation
Boundary
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
2–5
Chapter 2: Discrete I/O Guidelines
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
2–6
The following figures show the internal layout of the DL05 and DL06 PLCs, as viewed from
the front panels.
To Programming Device
or Operator Interface
DL05
PLC
CPU
Main
Power
Supply
Optional
I/O Circuits
Input Circuit
Power
Input
2 Comm.
Ports
Output Circuit
8 Discrete Commons 6 Discrete Outputs
Inputs
Filter
Commons
Power
Input
Filter
16 Discrete Outputs
Commons
Output Circuit
Optional
I/O Circuits
Main
Power
Supply
CPU
2 Comm.
Ports
DL06
PLC
Input Circuit
20 Discrete
Inputs
Commons
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
To Programming Device, Operator Interface
or networking
Chapter 2: Discrete I/O Guidelines
Sinking/Sourcing Concepts
Before going further in our study of wiring strategies, we must have a solid understanding of
“sinking” and “sourcing” concepts. Use of these terms occurs frequently in input or output circuit
discussions. It is the goal of this section to make these concepts easy to understand, further
ensuring your success in installation. First we give the following short definitions, followed by
practical applications.
Sinking = Path to supply ground (–)
Sourcing = Path to supply source (+)
First you will notice that these are only associated with DC circuits and not AC, because of the
reference to (+) and (–) polarities. Therefore, sinking and sourcing terminology only applies to DC
input and output circuits. Input and output points that are either sinking or sourcing can
conduct current in only one direction. This means it is possible to connect the external supply
and field device to the I/O point with current trying to flow in the wrong direction, and the
circuit will not operate. However, we can successfully connect the supply and field device every
time by understanding “sourcing” and “sinking”.
For example, the figure to the right depicts a
“sinking” input. To properly connect the external
PLC
Input
supply, we just have to connect it so the the input
(sinking)
provides a path to ground (–). So, we start at the
PLC input terminal, follow through the input
+
Input
sensing circuit, exit at the common terminal, and
Sensing
–
connect the supply (–) to the common terminal.
By adding the switch, between the supply (+) and
Common
the input, we have completed the circuit.
Current flows in the direction of the arrow when
the switch is closed.
By applying the circuit principle above to the four possible combinations of input/output
sinking/sourcing types, we have the four circuits as shown below. DirectLOGIC Micro PLCs
provide all except the sourcing output I/O circuit types.
Sinking Input
Sinking Output
PLC
Input
PLC
Output
Load
+
–
+
Input
Sensing
Common
Sourcing Input
–
Common
Sourcing Output
Common
+
–
Output
Switch
Input
PLC
Input
Sensing
PLC
Common
+
Output
Switch
Output
–
Load
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
2–7
Chapter 2: Discrete I/O Guidelines
I/O “Common” Terminal Concepts
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
2–8
In order for a PLC I/O circuit to operate, current
must enter at one terminal and exit at another. This
means at least two terminals are associated with
every I/O point. In the figure to the right, the Input
or Output terminal is the main path for the current.
One additional terminal must provide the return
path to the power supply.
PLC
Field
Device
Main Path
(I/O point)
I/O
Circuit
+
–
If we had unlimited space and budget for I/O
terminals, then every I/O point could have two
dedicated terminals just as the figure above shows.
However, providing this level of flexibility is not
practical or even necessary for most applications. So,
most Input or Output point groups on PLCs share
the return path among two or more I/O points. The
figure to the right shows a group (or bank) of 4 input
points which share a common return path. In this
way, the four inputs require only five terminals
instead of eight.
Return Path
PLC
Input Sensing
Input 1
Input 2
Input 3
Input 4
+
–
Common
NOTE: In the circuit above, the current in the common path is equal to the sum of the energized channels.
This is especially important in output circuits, where larger gauge wire is sometimes needed for the
common.
Some of the input and output modules often share a common return path. The best indication
of I/O common grouping is on the wiring label. The combination I/O module to the right is
an exception. The inputs and the outputs have
separate commons.
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
Chapter 2: Discrete I/O Guidelines
Connecting DC I/O to Solid State Field Devices
In the previous section on Sourcing/Sinking concepts, we explained that DC I/O circuits
sometimes will only allow current to flow one way. This is also true for many of the field devices
which have solid-state (transistor) interfaces. In other words, field devices can also be sourcing
or sinking. When connecting two devices in a series DC circuit, one must be wired as sourcing and
the other as sinking.
Solid State Input Sensors
The PLC DC inputs are flexible in that they detect current flow in either direction, so they can
be wired as either sourcing or sinking. In the following circuit, a field device has an opencollector NPN transistor output. It sinks current from the PLC input point, which sources
current. The source can be a FA-24PS, +24 VDC, power supply or another supply (+12 VDC
or +24VDC) of your choice, as long as the input specifications are met.
Field Device
PLC DC Input
Input
(sourcing)
Output
(sinking)
Supply
Ground
–
+
Common
In the next circuit, a field device has an open-emitter PNP transistor output. It sources current
to the PLC input point, which sinks the current back to ground. Since the field device is
sourcing current, no additional power supply is required.
Field Device
+V
PLC DC Input
Input
(sinking)
Output (sourcing)
Common
Ground
Solid State Output Loads
Sometimes an application requires connecting a PLC output point to a solid state input on a
device. This type of connection is usually made to carry a low-level signal, not to send DC
power to an actuator.
Some of the optional DC output modules are sinking-only. This means that each DC output
provides a path to ground when it is energized. The six outputs of the DL05 have the same
electrical common, even though there are two common terminal screws. Not so with the DL06
which has four isolated commons. Finally, recall that the DC output circuit requires power
(20–28 VDC) from an external power source.
In the following circuit, the PLC output point sinks current to the output common when
energized. It is connected to a sourcing input of a field device input.
PLC DC Output
+DC pwr
Field Device
Power
+V
Output
(sinking)
Input
+
(sourcing)
20-28 VDC
Common
–
Ground
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
2–9
Chapter 2: Discrete I/O Guidelines
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
2–10
In the next example we connect a PLC DC output point to the sinking input of a field device.
This is a bit tricky, because both the PLC output and field device input are sinking type. Since
the circuit must have one sourcing and one sinking device, we add sourcing capability to the
PLC output by using a pull-up resistor. In the circuit below, we connect Rpull-up from the
output to the DC output circuit power input.
PLC DC Output
Power
+DC pwr
Field Device
R pull-up
(sourcing)
(sinking)
Output
+
Input
(sinking)
–
Ground
R input
Supply
Common
NOTE: DO NOT attempt to drive a heavy load (>25 mA) with this pull-up method.
NOTE 2: Using the pull-up resistor to implement a sourcing output has the effect of inverting the output
point logic. In other words, the field device input is energized when the PLC output is OFF, from a ladder
logic point-of-view. Your ladder program must comprehend this and generate an inverted output. Or, you
may choose to cancel the effect of the inversion elsewhere, such as in the field device.
It is important to choose the correct value of Rpull-up. In order to do so, we need to know the
nominal input current to the field device (I input) when the input is energized. If this value is
not known, it can be calculated as shown (a typical value is 15 mA). Then use I input and the
voltage of the external supply to compute Rpull-up. Then calculate the power Ppull-up (in
watts), in order to size Rpull-up properly.
I
input
=
R pull-up =
V
input (turn–on)
R input
V supply – 0.7
I
– R input
P
pull-up
input
=
V supply
2
R pullup
Of course, the easiest way to drive a sinking input field device as shown below is to use a DC
sourcing output module. The Darlington NPN stage will have about 1.5 V ON-state
saturation, but this is not a problem with low-current solid-state loads.
Direct LOCIC DC Sourcing Output
+DC pwr
Common
Field Device
Output (sourcing)
+
Input
(sinking)
–
Ground
Supply
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
R input
Chapter 2: Discrete I/O Guidelines
Relay Output Guidelines
Relay outputs are available for the DirectLOGIC PLCs. Relays are best for the following
applications:
• Loads that require higher currents than the solid-state outputs can deliver
• Cost-sensitive applications
• Some output channels need isolation from other outputs (such as when some loads require different
voltages than other loads)
Some applications in which NOT to use relays:
• Loads that require currents under 10 mA
• Loads which must be switched at high speed or heavy duty cycle
Relay outputs in the DirectLOGIC PLCs and
modules are available in two contact
arrangements, shown to the right. The Form A
type, or SPST (single pole, single throw) type is
normally open and is the simplest to use. The
Form C type, or SPDT (single pole, double
throw) type has a center contact which moves
and a stationary contact on either side. This
provides a normally closed contact and a
normally open contact.
Some relay output module’s relays share
common terminals, which connect to the wiper
contact in each relay of the bank. Other relay
modules have relays which are completely
isolated from each other. In all cases, the module
drives the relay coil when the corresponding
output point is on.
Relay with Form A contacts
Relay with Form C contacts
Prolonging Relay Contact Life
Relay contacts wear according to the amount of relay switching, amount of spark created at the
time of open or closure, and presence of airborne contaminants. However, there are some steps
you can take to help prolong the life of relay contacts:
• Switch the relay on or off only when the application requires it.
• If you have the option, switch the load on or off at a time when it will draw the least current.
• Take measures to suppress inductive voltage spikes from inductive DC loads such as contactors and
solenoids (circuit given below).
PLC Relay Output
Inductive Field Device
Input
Output
R
C
Common
Supply
+
–
Common
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
2–11
Chapter 2: Discrete I/O Guidelines
Surge Suppression For Inductive Loads
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
2–12
Inductive load devices (devices with a coil) generate transient voltages when de-energized with
a relay contact. When a relay contact is closed it “bounces”, which energizes and de-energizes
the coil until the “bouncing” stops. The transient voltages generated are much larger in
amplitude than the supply voltage, especially with a DC supply voltage.
When switching a DC-supplied inductive load the full supply voltage is always present when
the relay contact opens (or “bounces”). When switching an AC-supplied inductive load there is
one chance in 60 (60 Hz) or 50 (50 Hz) that the relay contact will open (or “bounce”) when
the AC sine wave is zero crossing. If the voltage is not zero when the relay contact opens there
is energy stored in the inductor that is released when the voltage to the inductor is suddenly
removed. This release of energy is the cause of the transient voltages.
When inductive load devices (motors, motor starters, interposing relays, solenoids, valves, etc.)
are controlled with relay contacts, it is recommended that a surge suppression device be
connected directly across the coil of the field device. If the inductive device has plug-type
connectors, the suppression device can be installed on the terminal block of the relay output.
Transient Voltage Suppressors (TVS or transorb) provide the best surge and transient
suppression of AC and DC powered coils, providing the fastest response with the smallest
overshoot.
Metal Oxide Varistors (MOV) provide the next best surge and transient suppression of AC and
DC powered coils.
For example, the waveform in the figure below shows the energy released when opening a
contact switching a 24 VDC solenoid. Notice the large voltage spike.
+24 VDC
0 VDC
+24 VDC
Module Relay Contact
–324 VDC
This figure shows the same circuit with a transorb (TVS) across the coil. Notice that the voltage
spike is significantly reduced.
+24 VDC
+24 VDC
–42 VDC
Module Relay Contact
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
0 VDC
Chapter 2: Discrete I/O Guidelines
Use the following table to help select a TVS or MOV suppressor for your application based on
the inductive load voltage.
Surge Suppressors
Vendor / Catalog
Type
Inductive Load Voltage
Part Number
AutomationDirect
Transient Voltage Suppressors,
LiteOn Diodes; from Digi-Key
Catalog: Phone: 1-800-344-4539
TVS
TVS
TVS
TVS
Diode
110/120 VAC
24 VDC
220/240 VAC
12/24 VDC
12/24 VDC
ZL-TD8-120
ZL-TD8-24
P6KE350CA
P6K30CAGICT–ND
1N4004CT–ND
Digi-key
www.digikey.com
MOV
MOV
110/120 VAC
220/240 VAC
Contact Digi-Key, Corp.
Prolonging Relay Contact Life
Relay contacts wear according to the amount of relay switching, amount of spark created at the
time of open or closure, and presence of airborne contaminants. There are some steps you can
take to help prolong the life of relay contacts, such as switching the relay on or off only when it
is necessary, and if possible, switching the load on or off at a time when it will draw the least
current. Also, take measures to suppress inductive voltage spikes from inductive DC loads such
as contactors and solenoids.
For inductive loads in DC circuits we recommend using a suppression diode as shown in the
following diagram (DO NOT use this circuit with an AC power supply). When the load is
energized the diode is reverse-biased (high impedance). When the load is turned off, energy
stored in its coil is released in the form of a negative-going voltage spike. At this moment the
diode is forward-biased (low impedance) and shunts the energy to ground. This protects the
relay contacts from the high voltage arc that would occur just as the contacts are opening.
Place the diode as close to the inductive field device as possible. Use a diode with a peak inverse
voltage rating (PIV) at least 100 PIV, 3A forward current or larger. Use a fast-recovery type (such
as Schottky type). DO NOT use a small-signal diode such as 1N914, 1N941, etc. Be sure the
diode is in the circuit correctly before operation. If installed backwards, it short-circuits the
supply when the relay energizes.
PLC Relay Output
Inductive Field Device
Input
Output
Supply
Common
+
–
Common
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
2–13
Chapter 2: Discrete I/O Guidelines
DC Input Wiring Methods
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
2–14
DirectLOGIC Micro PLCs with DC inputs are
particularly flexible because they can be either sinking or
sourcing. The dual diodes (shown to the right) allow
current to flow in either direction. The inputs accept
10.8–26.4 VDC. The target applications are +12 VDC
and +24 VDC. You can actually wire half of the inputs as
DC sinking and the other half as DC sourcing. Inputs
grouped by a common must be all sinking or all sourcing.
Input
PLC DC Input
Common
DC Output Wiring Methods
The PLC DC output circuits are high-performance transistor switches with low on-resistance
and fast switching times. Please note the following characteristics which are unique to the DC
output type:
• The DL05 has only one electrical common for all six outputs. All six outputs belong to one bank.
• The DL05 output switches are current-sinking only. However, you can still use different DC voltages
from one load to another.
• The DL06 has isolated commons for each group of four outputs. There are two DL06 models with
output switches that are current-sinking only, and one that has sourcing output switches.
• The output circuit inside the PLC requires external power. The supply (–) must be connected to a
common terminal, and the supply (+) connects the the right-most terminal on the upper connector.
Firmware and Software
The discrete option modules will only function properly in a DL05 with firmware version
V4.10 (or later). If you have a DL05 with an earlier firmware version, the latest version can be
downloaded from our website, www.automationdirect.com. If you are unable to download the
latest firmware version along with the upgrade support tool software, call our technical support
group to arrange to have your PLC upgraded.
The DL05 PLCs need to have DirectSOFT32 Version 3.0c (or later) in order for the analog
feature to perform properly. The DL06 must use DirectSOFT32 Version 4.0 in order to use the
option modules.
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
Chapter 2: Discrete I/O Guidelines
I/O Addressing
Module I/O Points and Addressing for the DL05 and DL06
Each discrete option module has a set number of I/O points. (This does not hold true for the
analog modules). The following table shows the number of I/O points per module when used
in the DL05 PLC or the first slot of a DL06 PLC that has a discrete module installed. Discrete
I/O addressing for a DL06 is automatic from slot 1 to slot 4 by default.
Physical I/O
Points
DC Input Modules
F0-08SIM
D0-10ND3
D0-10ND3F
D0-16ND3
8 Input
10 Input
10 Input (fast)
16 Input
Physical I/O
Points
AC Input Modules
F0-08NA-1
8 Input
Physical I/O
Points
DC Output Modules
D0-10TD1
D0-16TD1
D0-10TD2
D0-16TD2
10 Output
16 Output
10 Output
16 Output
Relay Output Modules
D0-08TR
F0-04TRS
8 Output
4 Output
Combination Modules
D0-07CDR
D0-08CDD1
Physical I/O
Points
Physical I/O
Points
Total I/O Points
Consumed
8 Input
16 Input (6 unused)
16 Input (6 unused)
16 Input
Total I/O Points
Consumed
8 Input*
Total I/O Points
Consumed
16 Output (6 unused)
16 Output
16 Output (6 unused)
16 Output
Total I/O Points
Consumed
8 Output*
8 Output (4 unused)*
Total I/O Points
Consumed
(4 unused)*,
4 Input, 3 Output 88 Input
Output (5 unused)*
(4 unused)*,
4 Input, 4 Output 88 Input
Output (4 unused)*
Slot 1 I/O Address
X100 - X107
X100 - X107 and X110 - X111
X100 - X107 and X110 - X111
X100 - X107 and X110 - X117
Slot 1 I/O Address
X100 - X107
Slot 1 I/O Address
Y100 - Y107 and Y110 - Y111
Y100 - Y107 and Y110 - Y117
Y100 - Y107 and Y110 - Y111
Y100 - Y107 and Y110 - Y117
Slot 1 I/O Address
Y100 - Y107
Y100 - Y103
Slot 1 I/O Address
X100 - X103 and Y100 - Y102
X100 - X103 and Y100 - Y103
* The information shown above is for Automatic I/O Configuration, which can assign addresses in groups as
small as 8 I/O points. If manual I/O Configuration is used, the smallest allowable address group size is 16 I/O
points. Therefore, each manually configured I/O module will consume at least 16 X (input) and/or 16 Y
(output) addresses.
The diagrams on the next page show examples of the DL06 I/O addressing with various option
modules installed.
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
2–15
Chapter 2: Discrete I/O Guidelines
All Discrete Modules Installed I/O Addressing Example:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
2–16
LG
Y0
Y2
C1
Y5
Y7
Y10
Y12
C3
Y15 Y17
G
0V
Y1
Y3
Y4
Y6
C2
Y11 Y13
Y14 Y16
AC(L) AC(N) 24V C0
N.C.
OUTPUT: 6–240V
Y
X
0
1
2
50 – 60Hz
3
INPUT: 12 – 24V
4
5
2.0A, 6 – 27V
6
7
10
2.0A
11
12
PWR: 100–240V
13
14
15
16
50–60Hz 40VA
17
20
D0–06DR
21
22
Slot 1
16pt Input
(discrete)
Slot 2
4pt Input
4pt Output
(discrete)
Slot 3
10pt Output
(discrete)
Slot 4
8pt Output
(discrete)
PWR
RUN
CPU
TX1
RX1
23
X120
3 – 15mA
TX2
RX2
X100
X123
Y110
Y130
X117
Y100
Y121
Y137
Y103
C0
X1
X0
X3
X2
X4
C1
X6
X5
X7
C2
X11 X13 X14
X16
C4
X21 X23 N.C.
X10 X12 C3
X15 X17 X20 X22 N.C.
TERM
PORT1
PORT2
RUN STOP
Discrete and Analog Modules Installed I/O Addressing Example:
0V
G
LG
Y0
Y2
C1
Y5
Y7
Y10
Y12
C3
Y15 Y17
AC(L) AC(N) 24V C0
N.C.
Y1
Y3
Y4
Y6
C2
Y11 Y13
Y14 Y16
50 – 60Hz
OUTPUT: 6–240V
2.0A, 6 – 27V
2.0A
PWR: 100–240V
50–60Hz 40VA
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Slot 2
16pt Input
(discrete)
Slot 3
2pt Analog
Output
Slot 4
16pt Output
(discrete)
D0–06DR
Y
0
Slot 1
4pt Analog
Input
17
20
21
22
X1
X0
CPU
RX1
TX2
RX2
3 – 15mA
C0
RUN
TX1
23
X
INPUT: 12 – 24V
PWR
X3
X2
X4
C1
X6
X5
X7
X100
Y100
X117
Y117
C2
X11 X13 X14
X16
C4
X21 X23 N.C.
X10 X12 C3
X15 X17 X20 X22 N.C.
TERM
PORT1
PORT2
RUN STOP
Discrete and Analog Modules Installed I/O Addressing Example:
LG
Y0
Y2
C1
Y5
Y7
Y10
Y12
C3
Y15 Y17
G
0V
Y1
Y3
Y4
Y6
C2
Y11 Y13
Y14 Y16
AC(L) AC(N) 24V C0
N.C.
OUTPUT: 6–240V
50 – 60Hz
2.0A
2.0A, 6 – 27V
PWR: 100–240V
50–60Hz 40VA
D0–06DR
Y
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
20
21
22
Slot 2
4pt Input
4pt Output
(discrete)
Slot 3
4pt Input
4pt Output
(discrete)
Slot 4
16pt Input
(discrete)
X100
X110
X103
X113
X120
Y100
Y110
X137
Y103
Y113
X1
X0
X3
X2
X4
C1
X6
X5
X7
RUN
CPU
RX1
TX2
RX2
3 – 15mA
C0
PWR
TX1
23
X
INPUT: 12 – 24V
Slot 1
4pt Analog
Input
C2
X11 X13 X14
X16
C4
X21 X23 N.C.
X10 X12 C3
X15 X17 X20 X22 N.C.
TERM
PORT1
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
PORT2
RUN STOP
Chapter 2: Discrete I/O Guidelines
Discrete I/O General Specifications
The following is a list of general specifications for the discrete I/O option modules that are
available for both the DL05 and DL06 PLCs. Also shown is information on the various
removable connectors that are used for field wiring on the dicrete I/O option modules along
with reference to the ZIPLink connection system products that are available for the 16-point
I/O modules.
General Specifications
Operating Temperature
Storage Temperature
Humidity
Environmental Air
Vibration
0 to 55 °C (32 to 131 °F)
-20 to 70 °C (-4 to 158 °F)
5 to 95% (non-condencing)
No Corrosive gasses permitted
MIL STD 810C 514.2
Shock
Hi-pot
Insulation Resistance
Noise Immunity
MIL STD 810C 516.2
1500 VAC, 1 min.
More than 10M ohms at 500VDC
NEMA ICS3-304
Discrete I/O Connector Specifications
I/O Module
Connector
Wire Size
Screw Torque
Screwdriver
Size
D0-10ND3
AutomationDirect replacement terminal kit
p/n D0-ACC-4 or use Dinkle: EC350, 13-pin. *
22 - 16 AWG
0.39 Nm
DN-SS1
(recommended)
D0-10ND3F
AutomationDirect replacement terminal kit
p/n D0-ACC-4 or use Dinkle: EC350, 13-pin. *
22 - 16 AWG
0.39 Nm
DN-SS1
(recommended)
D0-16ND3
ZIPLink ZL-CBL056 cable & ZL-CM056 conn. mod.
or ZL-CBL056L cable & ZL-CM16L24 LED conn.
(see ZIPLink specifications in AutomationDirect
mod. or build your own using a 24-pin Molex
catalog under “Connection” tab.)
Micro Fit 3.0 receptacle, p/n 43025, or compatible.
F0-08NA-1
AutomationDirect replacement terminal kit
p/n D0-ACC-4 or use Dinkle: EC350, 10-pin. *
22 - 16 AWG
0.39 Nm
DN-SS1
(recommended)
D0-10TD1
22 - 16 AWG
0.39 Nm
DN-SS1
(recommended)
D0-07CDR
AutomationDirect replacement terminal kit
p/n D0-ACC-4 or use Dinkle: EC350, 13-pin. *
ZIPLink ZL-CBL056 cable & ZL-CM056 conn. mod.
or ZL-CBL056FR cable & ZL-CM16RL24B relay
mod. or ZL-CM16TF2 fuse mod.or build your own
using a 24-pin Molex Micro Fit 3.0 receptacle, p/n
43025, or compatible.
AutomationDirect replacement terminal kit
p/n D0-ACC-4 or use Dinkle: EC350, 13-pin. *
ZIPLink ZL-CBL056 cable & ZL-CM056 conn. mod.
or ZL-CBL056FR cable & ZL-CM16RL24B relay
mod. or ZL-CM16TF2 fuse mod.or build your own
using a 24-pin Molex Micro Fit 3.0 receptacle, p/n
43025, or compatible.
AutomationDirect replacement terminal kit
p/n D0-ACC-4 or use Dinkle: EC350, 10-pin. *
D0-08TR
D0-16TD1
D0-10TD2
D0-16TD2
(see ZIPLink specifications in AutomationDirect
catalog under “Connection” tab.)
22 - 16 AWG
0.39 Nm
DN-SS1
(recommended)
(see ZIPLink specifications in AutomationDirect
catalog under “Connection” tab.)
22 - 16 AWG
0.39 Nm
DN-SS1
(recommended)
AutomationDirect replacement terminal kit
p/n D0-ACC-4 or use Dinkle: EC350, 10-pin. *
22 - 16 AWG
0.39 Nm
DN-SS1
(recommended)
D0-08CDD1
AutomationDirect replacement terminal kit
p/n D0-ACC-4 or use Dinkle: EC350, 13-pin. *
22 - 16 AWG
0.39 Nm
DN-SS1
(recommended)
F0-04TRS
AutomationDirect replacement terminal kit
p/n D0-ACC-4 or use Dinkle: EC350, 13-pin. *
22 - 16 AWG
0.39 Nm
DN-SS1
(recommended)
* I/O modules are supplied with connector; replacement terminal kit includes (2) 13-position & (2) 10-position terminal blocks.
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
2–17
Chapter 2: Discrete I/O Guidelines
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Glossary of Specification Terms
2–18
Discrete Input
One of the input connections to the PLC which converts an electrical signal from a field device
to a binary status (OFF or ON), which is read by the internal CPU each PLC scan.
Discrete Output
One of the output connections from the PLC which converts an internal ladder program result
(0 or 1) to turn ON or OFF an output switching device. This enables the program to turn ON
and OFF large field loads.
I/O Common
A connection in the input or output terminals which is shared by multiple I/O circuits. It
usually is in the return path to the power supply of the I/O circuit.
Input Voltage Range
The operating voltage range of the input circuit.
Maximum Voltage
Maximum voltage allowed for the input circuit.
ON Voltage Level
The minimum voltage level at which the input point will turn ON.
OFF Voltage Level
The maximum voltage level at which the input point will turn OFF
Input Impedance
Input impedance can be used to calculate input current for a particular operating voltage.
Input Current
Typical operating current for an active (ON) input.
Minimum ON Current
The minimum current for the input circuit to operate reliably in the ON state.
Maximum OFF Current
The maximum current for the input circuit to operate reliably in the OFF state.
OFF to ON Response
The time the module requires to process an OFF to ON state transition.
ON to OFF Response
The time the module requires to process an ON to OFF state transition.
Status Indicators
The LEDs that indicate the ON/OFF status of an input or output point. All LEDs on the
Micro PLCs are electrically located on the logic side of the input or output circuit.
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
Chapter 2: Discrete I/O Guidelines
F0-08SIM
8-Point Simulator Input Module
Input Specifications
Number of Inputs
8
Status Indicators
None
Power Budget Requirements
1 mA @ 5 VDC (supplied by
base)
45.36 g (1.6 oz.)
Weight
F0-08SIM addressing example
X110
X113
OFF
ON
0
X100
Y100
X120
Y110
X107
Y103
X127
Y117
1
OFF
ON
2
3
2
C1
Y3
27V
Y5
Y7
0
Y10
Y12
C3
Y15 Y17
N.C.
C2
Y11 Y13
Y14 Y16
Y4
Y6
2.0A
PWR: 100–240V
1
50–60Hz 40VA
D0–06DR
OFF
ON
Slot 2
4pt Input
4pt Output
(discrete)
0
1
Slot 4
8pt Output
(discrete)
PWR
RUN
CPU
2
TX1
3
3
TX2
4
4
4
5
5
5
6
6
0
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
20
21
22
RX2
7
7
F0-08SIM
F0-08SIM
X7
RX1
23
6
7
2
C2
X11 X13 X14
X16
C4
X21 X23 N.C.
X10 X12 C3
X15 X17 X20 X22 N.C.
TERM
F0-08SIM
PORT1
PORT2
RUN STOP
NOTE: The DL05 CPU’s discrete feature for the F0-08SIM module requires DirectSOFT32 Version 3.0c (or
later) and firmware version 4.90 (or later). The DL06 requires DirectSOFT32 version V4.0, build 16 (or
later) and firmware version 1.80 (or later). See our website for more information:
www.automationdirect.com.
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
2–19
Chapter 2: Discrete I/O Guidelines
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
D0-10ND3
10-Point DC Input Module
Input Specifications
Number of Inputs
Input Voltage Range
Operating Voltage Range
Peak Voltage
Input Current
Maximum Input Current
Input Impedance
On Voltage Level
Off Voltage Level
Minimum ON Current
Minimum OFF Current
Off to On Response
On to Off Response
Status Indicators
Commons
Fuse
Power Budget Requirements
Dimensions (mm)
Weight
2–20
10 (sink/source)
10.8-26.4 VDC
12-24 VDC
30.0 VDC
Typical:4.0 mA @ 12 VDC
8.5 mA @ 24 VDC
11 mA @ 26.4 VDC
2.8 K @ 12-24 VDC
> 10.0 VDC
< 2.0 VDC
3.5 mA
0.5 mA
2-8 ms, Typ. 4 ms
2-8 ms, Typ. 4 ms
Module activity:
one green LED
2 (5 pts/common) Isolated
No fuse
35 mA @ 5 VDC (supplied by
base), (all pts ON)
19.8(W) x 76.8(H) x 53.9(D)
32 g (1.13 oz.)
Source
12-24 VDC
Sink
Source
12-24 VDC
Sink
NOTE: The DL05 CPU’s discrete feature for this module requires DirectSOFT32 Version 3.0c (or later)
and firmware version 4.10 (or later). The DL06 requires DirectSOFT32 version V4.0, build 16 (or later)
and firmware version 1.00 (or later). See our website for more information:
www.automationdirect.com.
Derating chart
Equivalent input circuit
Internal module circuitry
V+
INPUT
to LED
Sink
COM
Source
12-24 VDC
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
Chapter 2: Discrete I/O Guidelines
D0-10ND3F
10-Point DC Fast Input Module
Input Specifications
Number of Inputs
Input Voltage Range
Operating Voltage Range
Peak Voltage
Input Current
Maximum Input Current
Input Impedance
On Voltage Level
Off Voltage Level
Minimum ON Current
Minimum OFF Current
Off to On Response
On to Off Response
Status Indicators
Commons
Fuse
Power Budget Requirements
Dimensions (mm)
Weight
10 (sink/source)
10.8-26.4 VDC
12-24 VDC
30.0 VDC
Typical:4.0 mA @ 12 VDC
8.5 mA @ 24 VDC
11 mA @ 26.4 VDC
2.8 K @ 12-24 VDC
> 10.0 VDC
< 2.0 VDC
3.5 mA
0.5 mA
2 ms, Typ. 1 ms
2 ms, Typ. 1 ms
Module activity:
one green LED
2 (5 pts/common) Isolated
No fuse
35 mA @ 5 VDC (supplied by
base), (all pts ON)
19.8(W) x 76.8(H) x 53.9(D)
32 g (1.13 oz.)
Source
12-24 VDC
Sink
Source
12-24 VDC
Sink
D0-10NDF
NOTE: The DL05 CPU’s discrete feature for this module requires DirectSOFT32 Version 3.0c (or later)
and firmware version 4.70 (or later). The DL06 requires DirectSOFT32 version V4.0, build 16 (or later)
and firmware version 1.50 (or later). See our website for more information:
www.automationdirect.com.
Derating chart
Equivalent input circuit
Internal module circuitry
V+
INPUT
to LED
Sink
COM
Source
12-24 VDC
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
2–21
Chapter 2: Discrete I/O Guidelines
Equivalent input circuit
Internal module circuitry
Input Specifications
to LED
COM
Sink
Source
-
-
+
Source
24 VDC
Sink +
-
-
+
Source
24 VDC
Sink +
-
-
-
-
NOTE: The DL05 CPU’s discrete feature for this module
requires DirectSOFT32 Version 3.0c (or later) and
firmware version 4.10 (or later). The DL06 requires
DirectSOFT32 version V4.0, build 16 (or later) and
firmware version 1.00 (or later). See our website for more
information: www.automationdirect.com.
Derating chart
24VDC
Use ZipLink ZL-CBL056 cable and ZL-CM056 connector
module, or ZL-CBL056L cable and ZL-CM16L24 LED
connector module. You can also build your own cables
using 24-pin Molex Micro Fit 3.0 receptacle, part
number 43025, or compatible.
2–22
Wiring for ZL-CM056
24 VDC
+
Source
24 VDC
Sink +
16 (sink/source)
20-28 VDC
24 VDC
30.0 VDC
Typical:
Input Current
4.0 mA @ 24 VDC
Maximum Input Current
6 mA @ 28 VDC
4.7 K @ 24 VDC
Input Impedance
On Voltage Level
> 19.0 VDC
Off Voltage Level
< 7.0 VDC
Minimum ON Current
3.5 mA
Minimum OFF Current
1.5 mA
Off to on Response
2-8 ms, Typ. 4 ms
On to off Response
2-8 ms, Typ. 4 ms
Module activity:
Status Indicators
one green LED
4 (4 pts/common)
Commons
Isolated
Fuse
No fuse
35 mA @ 5 VDC
Power Budget Requirements (supplied by base),
(all pts ON)
19.8(W) x 76.8(H)
Dimensions (mm)
x 53.9(D)
Weight
20 g (0.71 oz.)
V+
INPUT
Number of Inputs
Input Voltage Range
Operating Voltage Range
Peak Voltage
+
Source
24 VDC
Sink +
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
D0-16ND3
16-Point DC Input Module
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
Chapter 2: Discrete I/O Guidelines
F0-08NA-1
8-Point AC Input Module
Input Specifications
Number of Inputs
Input Voltage Range
AC Frequency
Input Current
Input Impedance
On Voltage Level
Off Voltage Level
Minimum On Current
Maximum Off Current
Off to On Response
On to Off Response
Status Indicators
Commons
Fuse
Power Budget Requirements
Dimensions (mm)
Weight
8
80-132 VAC (90-150 VDC)
47-63 Hz
4.0 mA @ 132 VAC
33 K
80 VAC minimum
20 VAC maximum
2.4 mA
1.6 mA
< 20 ms
< 10 ms
None
2 (4 pts/common) Isolated
No fuse
5 mA @ 5 VDC (supplied by
base), (all pts ON)
19.8(W) x 76.8(H) x 53.9(D)
31.2 g (1.1 oz.)
IN
80-132VAC
90-150VDC
80-132V
90-150V
50-60Hz
F0-08NA-1
NOTE: The DL05 CPU’s discrete feature for this module requires DirectSOFT32 Version 3.0c (or later)
and firmware version 4.70 (or later). The DL06 requires DirectSOFT32 version V4.0, build 16 (or later)
and firmware version 1.50 (or later). See our website for more information:
www.automationdirect.com.
Equivalent input circuit
Derating chart
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
2–23
Chapter 2: Discrete I/O Guidelines
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
D0-10TD1
10-Point DC Output Module
Output Specifications
Number of Outputs
Operating Voltage Range
Output Voltage Range
Peak Voltage
10 (sinking)
6-27 VDC
5-30 VDC
50.0 VDC
0.3 A/point
Maximum Output Current
1.5 A/common
Minimum Output Current
0.5 mA
ON Voltage Drop
0.5.VDC @ 0.3 A
Maximum Leakage Current
15 µA @ 30.0 VDC
Maximum Inrush Current
1 A for 10 ms
OFF to ON Response
< 10 µs
ON to OFF Response
< 60 µs
Module activity:
Status Indicators
one green LED
2 (5 points/common)
Commons
Non-isolated
Fuse
No fuse
Max. 150 mA @
Power Budget Requirements 5 VDC (supplied by
base), (all pts. ON)
VDC max.
External DC Power Required 20-28
200 mA (all pts. ON)
Dimensions (mm)
19.8(W) x 76.8(H) x 53.9(D)
Weight
34 g (1.20 oz.)
2–24
Load - Dual
Power Source
Wiring
Load - Single
Power Source
Wiring
Note: negative side of power
sources must be tied together
to both C0 & C1 terminals.
NOTE: The DL05 CPU’s discrete feature for this module requires DirectSOFT32 Version 3.0c (or later) and
firmware version 4.10 (or later). The DL06 requires DirectSOFT32 version V4.0, build 16 (or later) and
firmware version 1.00 (or later). See our website for more information: www.automationdirect.com.
Equivalent output circuit
Internal module circuitry
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
Derating chart
Chapter 2: Discrete I/O Guidelines
D0-16TD1
16-Point DC Output Module
Output Specifications
Number of Outputs
Operating Voltage Range
Output Voltage Range
Peak Voltage
16 (sinking)
6-27 VDC
5-30 VDC
50.0 VDC
0.1 A/point
Maximum Output Current
0.8 A/common
Minimum Output Current
0.5 mA
ON Voltage Drop
0.5.VDC @ 0.1 A
Maximum Leakage Current 15 µA @ 30.0 VDC
Maximum Inrush Current
1 A for 10 ms
OFF to ON Response
< 0.5 ms
ON to OFF Response
< 0.5 ms
Module activity:
Status Indicators
one green LED
2 (8 points/common)
Commons
Non-isolated
Fuse
No fuse
Max. 200 mA @
Power Budget Requirements 5 VDC (supplied by
base), (all pts. ON)
VDC max
External DC Power Required 20-28
70 mA (all pts. ON)
Dimensions (mm)
19.8(W) x 76.8(H) x 53.9(D)
Weight
22 g (0.78 oz.)
Equivalent input circuit
Internal module circuitry
Derating chart
NOTE: The DL05 CPU’s discrete feature for this module requires DirectSOFT32 Version 3.0c (or later) and
firmware version 4.10 (or later). The DL06 requires DirectSOFT32 version V4.0, build 16 (or later) and
firmware version 1.00 (or later). See our website for more information: www.automationdirect.com.
Wiring for ZL-CM056
Load - Single
Power Source
Wiring
Load - Dual
Power Source
Wiring
Note: negative side of power
sources must be tied together
to both C0 & C1 commons.
Use ZipLink ZL-CBL056 cable and ZL-CM056 connector
module, or ZL-CBL056FR cable and ZL-CM16RL24B
relay module or ZL-CM16TF2 fuse module. You can
also build your own cables using 24-pin Molex Micro
Fit 3.0 receptacle, part number 43025, or compatible.
C1 10 11
C1 14 15
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
12 13
16 17
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
2–25
Chapter 2: Discrete I/O Guidelines
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
D0-10TD2
10-Point DC Output Module
Output Specifications
Number of Outputs
Operating Voltage Range
Output Voltage Range
Peak Voltage
10 (sourcing)
12-24 VDC
10.8-26.4 VDC
50.0 VDC
0.3 A/point
Maximum Output Current
1.5 A/common
Minimum Output Current
0.5 mA
ON Voltage Drop
1.0.VDC @0.3 A
Maximum Leakage Current 1.5 µA @ 30.0 VDC
Maximum Inrush Current
1 A for 10 ms
OFF to ON Response
< 10 µs
ON to OFF Response
< 60 µs
Module activity:
Status Indicators
one green LED
2 (5 points/+V Terminal)
+V Terminals & Common
Isolated, 1 Common
Fuse
No fuse
Max. 150 mA @
Power Budget Requirements 5 VDC (supplied by
base), (all pts. ON)
Dimensions (mm)
19.8(W) x 76.8(H) x 53.9(D)
Weight
38 g (1.34 oz.)
2–26
Load - Dual
Power Source
Wiring
Load - Single
Power Source
Wiring
NOTE: The DL05 CPU’s discrete feature for this module requires DirectSOFT32 Version 3.0c (or later) and
firmware version 4.10 (or later). The DL06 requires DirectSOFT32 version V4.0, build 16 (or later) and
firmware version 1.00 (or later). See our website for more information: www.automationdirect.com.
Derating chart
Equivalent output circuit
12-24VDC
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
Internal module circuitry
Chapter 2: Discrete I/O Guidelines
D0-16TD2
16-Point DC Output Module
Equivalent output circuit
Output Specifications
Number of Outputs
Operating Voltage Range
Output Voltage Range
Peak Voltage
Maximum Output Current
Minimum Output Current
ON Voltage Drop
Maximum Leakage Current
Maximum Inrush Current
OFF to ON Response
ON to OFF Response
16 (sourcing)
12-24 VDC
10.8-26.4 VDC
50.0 VDC
0.1 A/point, 0.8 A/common
0.5 mA
1.0.VDC @ 0.1 A
1.5 µA @ 26.4 VDC
1 A for 10 ms
< 0.5 ms
< 0.5 ms
Module activity:
Status Indicators
one green LED
2 (8 points/+V Terminal)
+V Terminals & Common
Isolated, 1 Common
Fuse
No fuse
Max. 200 mA @
Power Budget Requirements 5 VDC (supplied by
base), (all pts. ON)
Dimensions (mm)
19.8(W) x 76.8(H) x 53.9(D)
Weight
22 g (0.78 oz.)
12-24VDC
Internal module circuitry
Derating chart
NOTE: The DL05 CPU’s discrete feature for this module requires DirectSOFT32 Version 3.0c (or later) and
firmware version 4.10 (or later). The DL06 requires DirectSOFT32 version V4.0, build 16 (or later) and
firmware version 1.00 (or later). See our website for more information: www.automationdirect.com.
Wiring for ZL-CM056
Load - Single
Power Source
Wiring
Load - Dual
Power Source
Wiring
Use ZipLink ZL-CBL056 cable and ZL-CM056
connector module, or ZL-CBL056FR cable and ZLCM16RL24B relay module or ZL-CM16TF2 fuse
module. You can also build your own cables using
24-pin Molex Micro Fit 3.0 receptacle, part
number 43025, or compatible.
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
2–27
Chapter 2: Discrete I/O Guidelines
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
D0-07CDR
4-Point DC Input and 3-Point Relay Output Module
Output Specifications
Input Specifications
Number of Inputs
Operating Voltage Range
Input Voltage Range
Peak Voltage
Maximum Input Current
4 (sink/source)
12-24 VDC
10.8-26.4 VDC
30.0 VDC
11 mA @ 26.4 VDC
Typical: 4 mA @ 12 VDC
Input Current
8.5 mA @ 24 VDC
2.8 K @ 12-24 VDC
Input Impedance
ON Voltage Level
> 10.0 VDC
OFF Voltage Level
< 2.0 VDC
Minimum ON Current
3.5 mA
Maximum OFF Current
0.5 mA
OFF to ON Response
2-8 ms, typical 4 ms
ON to OFF Response
2-8 ms, typical 4 ms
Commons
1 (4 points/common)
Max. 200 mA @
Power Budget Requirements 5 VDC (supplied by
base), (all pts. ON)
Number of Outputs
Operating Voltage Range
Output Type
Peak Voltage
Maximum Current (Resistive)
Minimum Load Current
Maximum Leakage Current
ON Voltage Drop
Maximum Inrush Current
OFF to ON Response
ON to OFF Response
Status Indicators
Commons
Fuse
Dimensions (mm)
Weight
3
6-27 VDC/6-240 VAC
Relay, form A, SPST
30.0 VDC/264 VAC
1 A/point, 4 A/common
5 mA @ 5 VDC
0.1 mA @ 264 VAC
N/A
Output: 3 A for 10 ms, Comm: 10 A for 10 ms
< 15 ms
< 10 ms
Module acitivity: one green LED
1 (3 points/common)
No fuse
19.8(W) x 76.8(H) x 53.9(D)
38 g (1.34 oz.)
NOTE: The DL05 CPU’s discrete feature for this module requires DirectSOFT32 Version 3.0c (or later) and
firmware version 4.10 (or later). The DL06 requires DirectSOFT32 version V4.0, build 16 (or later) and
firmware version 1.00 (or later). See our website for more information: www.automationdirect.com.
Equivalent output circuit
Equivalent input circuit
Internal module circuitry
Internal module circuitry
V+
INPUT
to LED
Sink
COM
Source
12-24 VDC
Sink
Source
2–28
12-24 VDC
Derating chart for DC inputs
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
Derating chart for relay outputs
Chapter 2: Discrete I/O Guidelines
D0-08TR
8-Point Relay Output Module
Output Specifications
Number of Outputs
8
Operating Voltage Range
6-27 VDC/6-240 VAC
Output Type
Relay, form A, SPST
Peak Voltage
30.0 VDC/264 VAC
Maximum Current (Resistive) 1 A/point, 4 A/common
Minimum Load Current
0.5mA
Maximum Leakage Current 0.1 mA @ 264 VAC
ON Voltage Drop
N/A
Maximum Inrush Current
Output: 3A for 10 ms, Common: 10A for 10 ms
OFF to ON Response
< 15 ms
ON to OFF Response
< 10 ms
Status Indicators
Module acitivity: one green LED
Commons
2 Isolated. (4 points/common)
Fuse
No fuse
280 mA @ 5 VDC (supplied by base),
Power Budget Requirements Max.
(all pts. ON)
Dimensions (mm)
19.8(W) x 76.8(H) x 53.9(D)
Weight
55 g (1.94 oz.)
NOTE: The DL05 CPU’s discrete feature for this module requires DirectSOFT32 Version 3.0c (or later) and
firmware version 4.10 (or later). The DL06 requires DirectSOFT32 version V4.0, build 16 (or later) and
firmware version 1.00 (or later). See our website for more information: www.automationdirect.com.
Derating chart
Equivalent output circuit
Internal module circuitry
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
2–29
Chapter 2: Discrete I/O Guidelines
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
D0-08CDD1
4-Point DC Input and 4-Point DC Output Module
Input Specifications
Output Specifications
Number of Inputs
Operating Voltage Range
Input Voltage Range
Peak Voltage
Maximum Input Current
4 (sink/source)
10.8-26.4 VDC
12-24 VDC
30.0 VDC
11 mA @ 26.4 VDC
Typical: 4 mA @ 12 VDC
Input Current
8.5 mA @ 24 VDC
2.8 K @ 12-24 VDC
Input Impedance
ON Voltage Level
> 10.0 VDC
OFF Voltage Level
< 2.0 VDC
Minimum ON Current
3.5 mA
Maximum OFF Current
0.5 mA
OFF to ON Response
2-8 ms, typical 4 ms
ON to OFF Response
2-8 ms, typical 4 ms
Commons
2 Non-isolated
VDC, max.
External DC Power Required 20-28
80 mA (all pts. ON)
Max. 200 mA @
Power Budget Requiremnts 5 VDC (supplied by
base), (all pts. ON)
Number of Outputs
Operating Voltage Range
Output Voltage Range
Peak Voltage
Maximum Output Current
Minimum Output Current
Maximum Leakage Current
ON Voltage Drop
Maximum Inrush Current
OFF to ON Response
ON to OFF Response
Status indicators
Commons
Fuse
Dimensions (mm)
Weight
4 (sinking)
6-27 VDC
5-30 VDC
50.0 VDC
0.3 A/point, 1.2 A/common
0.5 mA
1.5 µA @ 30.0 VDC
0.5 VDC @ 0.3 A
1 A for 10 ms
< 10 µs
< 60 µs
Module acitivity: one green LED
2 Non-isolated
No fuse
19.8(W) x 76.8(H) x 53.9(D)
34 g (1.20 oz.)
NOTE: The DL05 CPU’s discrete feature for this module requires DirectSOFT32 Version 3.0c (or later) and
firmware version 4.10 (or later). The DL06 requires DirectSOFT32 version V4.0, build 16 (or later) and
firmware version 1.00 (or later). See our website for more information: www.automationdirect.com.
Equivalent output circuit
Equivalent input circuit
Internal module circuitry
Internal module circuitry
V+
INPUT
to LED
Source
12-24 VDC
Sink
COM
Sink
Source
12-24 VDC
2–30
Input Derating Chart
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
Output Derating chart
Chapter 2: Discrete I/O Guidelines
F0-04TRS
4-Point Relay Output Module
Output Specifications
Number of Outputs
Operating Voltage Range
4
5-30 VDC/5-125 VAC
2 - form C (SPDT)
Output Type
2 - form A (SPST normally open)
Peak Voltage
60 VDC/220 VAC
AC Frequency
47-63 Hz
Maximum Current (Resistive) 3 A/point with no derating
Minimum Load Current
10 mA @ 5 VDC
Maximum Leakage Current N/A
ON Voltage Drop
N/A
Maximum Inrush Current
5A
5 ms (typical)
OFF to ON Response
5 ms (typical)
ON to OFF Response
Status Indicators
None
Commons
4 Isolated
Fuse
4, IEC 3.15 A, replaceable, D2-FUSE-1
250 mA @ 5 VDC (supplied by base),
Power Budget Requirements Max.
(all pts. ON)
Dimensions (mm)
19.8(W) x 76.8(H) x 53.9(D)
Weight
51 g (1.8 oz.)
OUT
RELAY
125V 3A
50-60Hz
30V 3A
L
NO-0
L
NC-0
C-0
5-30VDC
5-125VAC
L
N0-1
C-1
5-30VDC
5-125VAC
L
NO-2
C-2
5-30VDC
5-125VAC
L
NO-3
L
NC-3
C-3
5-30VDC
5-125VAC
F0-04TRS
Derating chart
NOTE: The DL05 CPU’s discrete feature for this module requires
DirectSOFT32 Version 3.0c (or later) and firmware version 4.70
(or later). The DL06 requires DirectSOFT32 version V4.0, build 16
(or later) and firmware version 1.50 (or later). See our website for
more information: www.automationdirect.com.
3A
Equivalent output circuit
Internal Circuitry
3.15A
Common
F0-04TRS Typical Relay Life
at 30 Operations per Minute
Load Type
Resistive
Resistive
Resistive
Inductive: SC-E5
Motor Starter
Inductive: SC-E5
Motor Starter
Rated
Voltage
Rated
Current
Number of
Operations
120VAC
120VAC
24VDC
3A
1A
1A
120,000
550,000
2M
24VDC
0.2A
2M (see Note)
L
Equivalent output circuit
Internal Circuitry
3.15A
Common
L
120VAC
0.1A operating
1.7A fault
2M (see Note)
NO
L
NO
NC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Note: Transient suppression must be installed with inductive loads.
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
2–31
F0-04AD-1 4-CH.
ANALOG CURRENT INPUT
CHAPTER
23
In This Chapter...
Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3–2
Setting the Module Jumper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3–4
Connecting and Disconnecting the Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3–4
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3–5
Module Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3–6
Special V-memory Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3–7
Using the Pointer in Your Control Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3–9
Detecting Input Signal Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3–11
Scale Conversions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3–11
Special Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3–13
Module Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3–15
Analog Input Ladder Logic Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3–16
Chapter 3: F0-04AD-1 4-Ch. Analog Current Input
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Module Specifications
3–2
The F0-04AD-1 Analog Input module offers the
following features:
• The DL05 and DL06 will read all four channels in
one scan.
• The removable terminal block makes it possible to
remove the module without disconnecting the field
wiring.
• Analog inputs can be used as process variables for the
four (4) PID loops in the DL05 and the eight (8)
PID loops in the DL06 CPUs.
• Field device burn–out is detected on all four channels
when 4–20mA range is selected.
• On-board active analog filtering and RISC-like
microcontroller provide digital signal processing to
maintain precise analog measurements in noisy
environments.
NOTE: The DL05 CPU’s analog feature for this module requires DirectSOFT32 Version 3.0c (or later) and
firmware version 2.10 (or later). The DL06 requires DirectSOFT32 version V4.0, build 16 (or later) and
firmware version 1.00 (or later). See our website for more information: www.automationdirect.com.
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
Chapter 3: F0-04AD-1 4-Ch. Analog Current Input
The following tables provide the specifications for the F0–04AD–1 Analog Input Module.
Review these specifications to make sure the module meets your application requirements.
Input Specifications
Number of Channels
Input Range
Resolution
Step Response
Crosstalk
Active Low-pass Filtering
Input Impedance
Absolute Maximum Ratings
Converter type
Linearity Error (End to End)
Input Stability
Full Scale Calibration Error
(Offset error not included)
Offset Calibration Error
4, single ended (one common)
0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA current (jumper selectable)
12 bit (1 in 4096) for 0-20mA, scaled for 4-20mA
25.0 mS (typ) to 95% of full step change
-80 dB, 1/2 count maximum *
-3 dB at 40Hz (-12 dB per octave)
125 Ohm ± 0.1%, 1/8 W current input
-30 mA to +30 mA current input
Successive approximation
± 2 counts maximum *
± 1 count *
± 10 counts maximum, @ 20mA current input*
± 5 counts maximum @ 4mA current input *
±.4% @ 25°C (77°F)
Maximum Inaccuracy
±.85% 0 to 60°C (32 to 140°F)
±100 ppm/ °C maximum full scale calibration
Accuracy vs. Temperature
(including maximum offset change)
Recommended Fuse (external)
0.032 A Series 217 fast-acting current inputs
* One count in the specification table is equal to one least significant bit of the analog data value (1 in 4096).
General Specifications
PLC Update Rate
16-bit Data Word
Operating Temperature
Storage Temperature
Relative Humidity
Environmental air
Vibration
Shock
Noise Immunity
Power Budget Requirement
Connector
Connector Wire Size
Connector Screw Torque
Connector Screwdriver Size
4 channels per scan
12 binary data bits 2 channel ID bits 2 diagnostic bits
0 to 60° C (32 to 140°F)
-20 to 70°C (-4 to 158°F)
5 to 95% (non-condensing)
No corrosive gases permitted
MIL STD 810C 514.2
MIL STD 810C 516.2
NEMA ICS3-304
50 mA @ 5VDC (supplied by base)
Phoenix Mecano, Inc. Part No. AK1550/8-3.5 - green
28 - 16 AWG
0.4 Nm
DN-SS1 (recommended)
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
3–3
Chapter 3: F0-04AD-1 4-Ch. Analog Current Input
Setting the Module Jumper
OFF = 4 – 20
1
The position of jumper J3 determines the input signal level. You can choose between 4–20mA
and 0–20mA. The module ships with the jumper not connecting the two pins. In this position,
the expected input signal is 4–20mA. To select 0–20mA signals, use the jumper to cover both
2
pins.
3
The default jumper setting selects a
4
4–20mA signal source. The default
jumper setting does not connect the
5
two pins.
6
7
WARNING: Before removing the analog module or the terminal block on the face of the module,
8
disconnect power to the PLC and all field devices. Failure to disconnect power can result in damage to
the PLC and/or field devices.
9
Connecting and Disconnecting the Field Wiring
10
Wiring Guidelines
11
Your company may have guidelines for wiring and cable installation. If so, you should check
those before you begin the installation. Here are some general things to consider:
• Use the shortest wiring route whenever possible.
12
• Use shielded wiring and ground the shield at the transmitter source. Do not ground the shield at both
the module and the source.
13
• Do not run the signal wiring next to large motors, high current switches, or transformers. This may
cause noise problems.
14
• Route the wiring through an approved cable housing to minimize the risk of accidental damage.
Check local and national codes to choose the correct method for your application.
A
The F0–04AD–1 does not supply power to field devices. You will need to power transmitters
separately from the PLC.
B
To remove the terminal block, disconnect power to the PLC and the field devices. Pull the
terminal block firmly until the connector separates from the module.
You can remove the analog module from the PLC by folding out the retaining tabs at the top
C
and bottom of the module. As the retaining tabs pivot upward and outward, the module’s
connector is lifted out of the PLC socket. Once the connector is free, you can lift the module
D
out of its slot.
3–4
J3
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
Chapter 3: F0-04AD-1 4-Ch. Analog Current Input
Wiring Diagram
Use the following diagram to connect the field wiring. If necessary, the F0–04AD–1 terminal
block can be removed to make removal of the module possible without disturbing field wiring.
Typical User Wiring
Internal
Module
Wiring
A n a lo g In pu t
4 –CH A N N EL S
0 – 20 m A
4 – 20 m A
+
–
+
CH1
4–wire
–
4–20mA
Transmitter
PWR
–
+
RUN
ohms
CH2+
–
125
ohms
+
+
CH3
2-wire
4–20mA
–
Transmitter
CH2–
CH3+
+
1
–
CH3–
125
ohms
125
ohms
A to D
Converter
+
CH4
2-wire
–
4–20mA
Transmitter
+
2
–
+
3
–
+
4
–
+
–
Analog Switch
CH2
3–wire
–
4–20mA
Transmitter
CPU
T X1
R X1
T X2
RX2
CH4+
–
NOTE 1: Shields should be grounded at the signal
source.
NOTE 2: Connect all external power supply commons.
NOTE 3: A Series 217, 0.032A fast–acting fuse is
recommended for current loops.
125
+ +
+
CH1+
CH1–
–
+ –
+ –
+ –
+
CH4 CH3
CH2
CH1
See NOTE 1
F0– 04 AD–1
CH4–
– +
18-30VDC
Supply
OV
Transmitter Supply
Current Loop Transmitter Impedance
Manufacturers of transmitters and transducers specify a wide variety of power sources for their
products. Follow the manufacturer’s recommendations.
In some cases, manufacturers specify a minimum loop or load resistance that must be used with
the transmitter. The F0-04AD-1 provides 125 ohm resistance for each channel. If your
transmitter requires a load resistance below 125 ohms, you do not have to make any changes.
However, if your transmitter requires a load resistance higher than 125 ohms, you need to add
a resistor in series with the module.
Consider the following example for a transmitter being operated from a 30 VDC supply with
a recommended load resistance of 750 ohms. Since the module has a 125 ohm resistor, you need
to add an additional resistor.
R = Tr – Mr
R = resistor to add
R = 750 – 125
Tr = Transmitter Requirement
R 욷 625
Mr = Module resistance (internal 125 ohms)
Two-wire Transmitter
+
–
DC Supply
+30V
0V
Module Channel 1
R
CH1
COM
100 ohms
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
0V
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
3–5
Chapter 3: F0-04AD-1 4-Ch. Analog Current Input
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Module Operation
3–6
Channel Scanning Sequence
The DL05 and DL06 will read all four channels of input data during each scan. Each CPU
supports special V-memory locations that are used to manage the data transfer. This is discussed
in more detail beginning in the section on “Special V–memory Locations”.
Scan
DL05/DL06 PLC
Read Inputs
Execute Application Program
Read the data
Store data
Scan N
Ch 1, 2, 3, 4
Scan N+1
Ch 1, 2, 3, 4
Scan N+2
Ch 1, 2, 3, 4
Scan N+3
Ch 1, 2, 3, 4
Scan N+4
Ch 1, 2, 3, 4
Write to Outputs
Analog Module Updates
Even though the channel updates to the CPUs are synchronous with the CPU scan, the module
asynchronously monitors the analog transmitter signals and converts each signal into a 12-bit
binary representation. This enables the module to continuously provide accurate measurements
without slowing down the discrete control logic in the RLL program.
The module takes approximately 25 milliseconds to sense 95% of the change in the analog
signal. For the vast majority of applications, the process changes are much slower than these
updates.
NOTE: If you are comparing other manufacturers’ update times (step responses) with ours, please be aware
that some manufacturers refer to the time it takes to convert the analog signal to a digital value. Our analog
to digital conversion takes only a few microseconds. It is the settling time of the filter that is critical in
determining the full update time. Our update time specification includes the filter settling time.
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
Chapter 3: F0-04AD-1 4-Ch. Analog Current Input
Special V-memory Locations
Formatting the Module Data
The DL05 and DL06 PLCs have special V-memory locations assigned to their respective option
slots. These V-memory locations allow you to:
• specify the data format (binary or BCD)
• specify the number of channels to scan (4 channels for the F0–04AD–1)
• specify the V-memory locations to store the input data
DL05 Data Formatting
The table below shows the special V-memory locations used by the DL05 PLC for the
F0–04AD–1.
Analog Input Module
DL05 Special V-memory Locations
Data Type and Number of Channels
Storage Pointer
V7700
V7701
Structure of V7700
Special V–memory location 7700 identifies that a F0–04AD–1 module is installed in the DL05
option slot and the data type to be either binary or BCD.
Loading a constant of 400 into V7700 identifies a
MSB
LSB
4 channel analog input module is installed in the
1 1 1 1 1 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
DL05 option slot, and reads the input data values
5 4 3 2 1 0
as BCD numbers.
Loading a constant of 8400 into V7700 identifies a
MSB
LSB
4 channel analog input module is installed in the
DL05 option slot, and reads the input data values
1 1 1 1 1 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
5 4 3 2 1 0
as binary numbers.
Structure of V7701
V7701 is a system V–memory location used as a pointer to a user V-memory location where the
analog input data is stored. The V–memory location loaded into V7701 is an octal number
identifying the first user V-memory location for reading the analog input data. This V–memory
location is user selectable. For example, loading O2000 causes the pointer to write Ch 1’s data
value to V2000, Ch 2’s data value to V2001, Ch 3’s data value to V2002, and Ch 4’s data value
to V2003.
You will find an example program that loads appropriate values to V7700 and V7701 on page
3–9.
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
3–7
Chapter 3: F0-04AD-1 4-Ch. Analog Current Input
DL06 Data Formatting
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
3–8
Special V–memory locations are assigned to the four option slots of the DL06 PLC. The table
below shows these V-memory locations which can be used to setup the F0–04AD–1.
Analog Input Module
DL06 Special V-memory Locations
Slot No.
Data Type and Number of Channels
Storage Pointer
1
V700
V701
2
V710
V711
3
V720
V721
4
V730
V731
Setup Data Type and Number of Channels
V–memory locations 700, 710, 720 and 730 are used to set the data format to be read in either
binary or BCD, and to set the number of channels that will be active.
MSB
LSB
For example, the F0–04AD–1 is installed in slot 1.
Loading a constant of 400 into V700 sets 4 channels
1 1 1 1 1 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
active, and the input data value is read as a BCD
5 4 3 2 1 0
number.
With the F0–4AD–1 in slot 1, loading a constant of
MSB
LSB
8400 into V700 sets 4 channels active, and the input
data value is read as a binary number.
1 1 1 1 1 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Storage Pointer Setup
5 4 3 2 1 0
V–memory locations 701, 711, 721 and 731 are special locations used as storage pointers. A
V–memory address is loaded into this location as an octal number identifying the first user Vmemory location for the analog input data. This V–memory location is user selectable. For
example, loading O2000 causes the pointer to write Ch 1’s data value to V2000, Ch 2’s data
value to V2001, Ch 3’s data value to V2002, and Ch 4’s data value to V2003.
You will find an example program that loads appropriate values to V700 and V701 beginning
on page 3–10.
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
Chapter 3: F0-04AD-1 4-Ch. Analog Current Input
Using the Pointer in Your Control Program
DL05 Pointer Method
The DL05 CPU examines the pointer values (the memory locations identified in V7700 and
V7701) on the first scan only.
The example program below shows how to setup these locations. This rung can be placed
anywhere in the ladder program or in the initial stage if you are using stage programming
instructions.
This is all that is required to read the analog input data into V-memory locations. Once the data
is in V-memory you can perform math on the data, compare the data against preset values, and
so forth. V2000 is used in the example but you can use any user V-memory location.
SP0
LD
K400
Loads a constant that specifies the number of channels to scan and the
data format. The upper byte selects the data format (i.e. 0=BCD,
8=Binary) and the number of channels (set to 4 for the F0–04AD–1).
- or LD
K8400
OUT
V7700
LDA
O2000
OUT
V7701
The binary format is used for displaying data on some operator
interface units. The DL05 PLCs support binary math functions.
Special V-memory location assigned to the option slot contains the data
format and the number of channels to scan.
This loads an octal value for the first V-memory location that will be used
to store the incoming data. For example, the O2000 entered here would
designate the following addresses.
Ch1 – V2000, Ch2 – V2001, Ch3 – V2002, Ch 4 – V2003
The octal address (O2000) is stored here. V7701 is assigned to the
option slot and acts as a pointer, which means the CPU will use the octal
value in this location to determine exactly where to store the incoming
data.
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
3–9
Chapter 3: F0-04AD-1 4-Ch. Analog Current Input
DL06 Pointer Method
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
3–10
Use the special V–memory table below as a guide to setup the storage pointer in the following
example for the DL06. Slot 1 is the left most option slot. The CPU will examine the pointer
values at these locations only after a mode transition.
Analog Input Module
DL06 Special V-memory Locations
Slot No.
No. of Channels
Input Pointer
1
V700
V701
2
V710
V711
3
V720
V721
4
V730
V731
The F0–04AD–1 can be installed in any available DL06 option slot. Using the example
program from the previous page, but changing the V–memory addresses, the ladder diagram
below shows how to setup these locations with the module installed in slot 1 of the DL06. Use
the above table to determine the pointer values if locating the module in any of the other slot
locations. Place this rung anywhere in the ladder program or in the initial stage if you are using
stage programming instructions.
Like the DL05 example, this logic is all that is required to read the analog input data into Vmemory locations. Once the data is in V-memory you can perform mathematical calculations
with the data, compare the data against preset values, and so forth. V2000 is used in the example
but you can use any user V-memory location.
SP0
LD
K400
Loads a constant that specifies the number of channels to scan and the
data format. The upper byte selects the data format (i.e. 0=BCD,
8=Binary) and the number of channels (set to 4 for the F0–04AD–1).
- or LD
K8400
The binary format can be used for displaying data on some
operator interface units and the DL06 LCD display. The DL06
PLCs support binary math functions.
OUT
V700
Special V-memory location assigned to the first option slot contains the
data format and the number of channels to scan.
LDA
O2000
This loads an octal value for the first V-memory location that will be used
to store the incoming data. For example, the O2000 entered here would
designate the following addresses.
Ch1 – V2000, Ch2 – V2001, Ch3 – V2002, Ch 4 – V2003
OUT
V701
The octal address (O2000) is stored here. V701 is assigned to the
first option slot and acts as a pointer, which means the CPU will use the
octal value in this location to determine exactly where to store the
incoming data.
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
Chapter 3: F0-04AD-1 4-Ch. Analog Current Input
Detecting Input Signal Loss
Analog Signal Loss
The F0–04AD–1 analog module can sense the loss of analog input signals in 4–20mA loops.
The Special Relays described on page 3–14 allow you to use this feature in your ladder program.
For example, in the rung below SP610 is used to pull-in coil Y1, which would be used to open
or close an external circuit.
SP610
Y1
OUT
The Special Relay SP610 detects
a loss of input signal to channel 1.
Use SP610 to trigger an alarm or
shut down a machine.
NOTE: The F0–04AD–1 analog module cannot sense the loss of analog input signals in 0–20mA loops. See
page 3–4 for information about setting the jumper to select your input type.
Scale Conversions
Scaling the Input Data
H–L
Units = A
+L
Many applications call for measurements in
65535
engineering units, which can be more meaningful
H = High limit of the engineering
than raw data. Convert to engineering units using
unit range
the formula shown to the right.
L = Low limit of the engineering
You may have to make adjustments to the formula
unit range
depending on the scale you choose for the
A = Analog value (0 – 65535)
engineering units.
For example, if you wanted to measure pressure (PSI) from 0.0 to 99.9 then you would have to
multiply the analog value by 10 in order to imply a decimal place when you view the value with
the programming software or a handheld programmer. Notice how the calculations differ when
you use the multiplier.
Analog Value of 2024, slightly less than half scale, should yield 49.4 PSI
Example without multiplier
Example with multiplier
Units = A H – L + L
65535
Units = 10 A H – L + L
65535
Units = 32375
Units = 49
100 – 0 + 0
65535
Units = 323750 100 – 0 + 0
65535
Units = 494
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
3–11
Chapter 3: F0-04AD-1 4-Ch. Analog Current Input
The Conversion Program
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
3–12
The following example shows how you would write the program to perform the engineering
unit conversion. This example assumes you have BCD data loaded into the appropriate Vmemory locations using instructions that apply for the model of CPU you are using.
Note: this example uses SP1, which is always on. You
could also use an X, C, etc. permissive contact.
SP1
LD
V2000
When SP1 is on, load channel 1 data to the accumulator.
MUL
K1000
Multiply the accumulator by 1000 (for a range of 0–1000).
DIV
K4095
Divide the accumulator by 4095 (the module resolution).
OUT
V2010
Store the result in V2010.
Analog and Digital Value Conversions
Sometimes it is useful to convert between the signal levels and the digital values. This is
especially helpful during machine startup or troubleshooting. The following table provides
formulas to make this conversion easier.
Range
If you know the digital value
If you know the analog signal level
4 to 20mA
A = 16D + 4
4095
D = 4095 (A - 4)
16
0 to 20mA
A = 20D
4095
D = 4095
16
For example, if you have measured the signal as
10mA, you can use the formula to determine the
65535 . A
digital value that will be stored in the V-memory D =
20
location that contains the data.
D = 65535 . 10mA
20
D = 32767
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
Chapter 3: F0-04AD-1 4-Ch. Analog Current Input
Special Relays
The list of other Special Relays associated with the DL05 and DL06 PLCs are contained in the
DL05 User Manual and the DL06 User Manual. The following special relays are new and relate
to the status of the F0–04AD–1 module or one of its input channels.
DL05 Special Relays
DL05 Special Relays
SP600
SP601
SP602
SP603
SP610
SP611
SP612
SP613
Chan 1 input type
Chan 2 input type
Chan 3 input type
Chan 4 input type
Chan 1 input open
Chan 2 input open
Chan 3 input open
Chan 4 input open
0 = 0 - 20mA
0 = 0 - 20mA
0 = 0 - 20mA
0 = 0 - 20mA
1 = xmitter signal open
1 = xmitter signal open
1 = xmitter signal open
1 = xmitter signal open
1 = 4 - 20mA
1 = 4 - 20mA
1 = 4 - 20mA
1 = 4 - 20mA
0 = xmitter signal good
0 = xmitter signal good
0 = xmitter signal good
0 = xmitter signal good
DL06 SpecialRelays
DL06 Special Relays
Slot 1
SP140
SP141
SP142
SP143
SP150
SP151
SP152
SP153
Chan 1 input type
Chan 2 input type
Chan 3 input type
Chan 4 input type
Chan 1 input open
Chan 2 input open
Chan 3 input open
Chan 4 input open
0 = 0 - 20mA
0 = 0 - 20mA
0 = 0 - 20mA
0 = 0 - 20mA
1 = xmitter signal open
1 = xmitter signal open
1 = xmitter signal open
1 = xmitter signal open
1 = 4 - 20mA
1 = 4 - 20mA
1 = 4 - 20mA
1 = 4 - 20mA
0 = xmitter signal good
0 = xmitter signal good
0 = xmitter signal good
0 = xmitter signal good
Chan 1 input type
Chan 2 input type
Chan 3 input type
Chan 4 input type
Chan 1 input open
Chan 2 input open
Chan 3 input open
Chan 4 input open
0 = 0 - 20mA
0 = 0 - 20mA
0 = 0 - 20mA
0 = 0 - 20mA
1 = xmitter signal open
1 = xmitter signal open
1 = xmitter signal open
1 = xmitter signal open
1 = 4 - 20mA
1 = 4 - 20mA
1 = 4 - 20mA
1 = 4 - 20mA
0 = xmitter signal good
0 = xmitter signal good
0 = xmitter signal good
0 = xmitter signal good
Slot 2
SP240
SP241
SP242
SP243
SP250
SP251
SP252
SP253
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
3–13
Chapter 3: F0-04AD-1 4-Ch. Analog Current Input
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
3–14
DL06 Special Relays (cont’d)
Slot 3
SP340
SP341
SP342
SP343
SP350
SP351
SP352
SP353
Chan 1 input type
Chan 2 input type
Chan 3 input type
Chan 4 input type
Chan 1 input open
Chan 2 input open
Chan 3 input open
Chan 4 input open
0 = 0 - 20mA
0 = 0 - 20mA
0 = 0 - 20mA
0 = 0 - 20mA
1 = xmitter signal open
1 = xmitter signal open
1 = xmitter signal open
1 = xmitter signal open
1 = 4 - 20mA
1 = 4 - 20mA
1 = 4 - 20mA
1 = 4 - 20mA
0 = xmitter signal good
0 = xmitter signal good
0 = xmitter signal good
0 = xmitter signal good
Chan 1 input type
Chan 2 input type
Chan 3 input type
Chan 4 input type
Chan 1 input open
Chan 2 input open
Chan 3 input open
Chan 4 input open
0 = 0 - 20mA
0 = 0 - 20mA
0 = 0 - 20mA
0 = 0 - 20mA
1 = xmitter signal open
1 = xmitter signal open
1 = xmitter signal open
1 = xmitter signal open
1 = 4 - 20mA
1 = 4 - 20mA
1 = 4 - 20mA
1 = 4 - 20mA
0 = xmitter signal good
0 = xmitter signal good
0 = xmitter signal good
0 = xmitter signal good
Slot 4
SP440
SP441
SP442
SP443
SP450
SP451
SP452
SP453
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
Chapter 3: F0-04AD-1 4-Ch. Analog Current Input
Module Resolution
Analog Data Bits
The first twelve bits represent the analog data in binary format.
Bit
0
1
2
3
4
5
Value
1
2
4
8
16
32
Bit
6
7
8
9
10
11
Value
64
128
256
512
1024
2048
MSB
LSB
1 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 0
= data bits
Resolution Details
Since the module has 12-bit resolution, the analog signal is converted into 4096 counts ranging
from 0 - 4095 (212). For example, a 4mA signal would be 0 and a 20mA signal would be 4095.
This is equivalent to a binary value of 0000 0000 0000 to 1111 1111 1111, or 000 to FFF
hexadecimal.
Each count can also be expressed in terms of the signal level by using the following equation:
4 – 20mA
Resolution = H – L
4095
20mA
H = high limit of the signal range
4mA
L = low limit of the signal range
0
4095
The following table shows the smallest detectable signal change that will result in one LSB
change in the data value for each increment of the signal change.
mA Range
4 to 20mA
0 to 20mA
Signal Span
(H – L)
Divide By
Smallest Detectable
Change
16mA
10mA
4095
4095
3.907µA
4.884µA
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
3–15
Chapter 3: F0-04AD-1 4-Ch. Analog Current Input
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Analog Input Ladder Logic Filter
3–16
PID Loops / Filtering:
Please refer to the “PID Loop Operation” chapter in the DL06 or DL05 User Manual for
information on the built-in PV filter (DL05/06) and the ladder logic filter (DL06 only) shown
below. A filter must be used to smooth the analog input value when auto tuning PID loops to
prevent giving a false indication of loop characteristics.
Smoothing the Input Signal (DL06 only):
The filter logic can also be used in the same way to smooth the analog input signal to help
stabilize PID loop operation or to stabilize the analog input signal value for use with an operator
interface display, etc.
Warning: The built-in and logic filters are not intended to smooth or filter noise generated by improper
field device wiring or grounding. Small amounts of electrical noise can cause the input signal to bounce
considerably. Proper field device wiring and grounding must be done before attempting to use the filters
to smooth the analog input signal.
Using Binary Data Format
SP1
LDD
V2000
Loads the analog signal, which is in binary format
and has been loaded from V–memory location
V2000 – 2001, into the accumulator. Contact SP1
is always on.
BTOR
Converts the binary value in the accumulator
to a real number.
SUBR
V1400
Subtracts the real number stored in location
V1400 from the real number in the accumulator,
and stores the result in the accumulator. V1400
is the designated workspace in this example.
MULR
R0.2
Multiplies the real number in the accumulator by
0.2 (the filter factor), and stores the result in the
accumulator. This is the filtered value. The filter
range is 0.1 to 0.9. Smaller filter factors
increase filtering. (1.0 eliminates filtering.)
ADDR
V1400
Adds the real number stored in location V1400
to the real number filtered value in the
accumulator, and stores the result in the accumulator.
OUTD
V1400
Copies the value in the accumulator to
location V1400.
RTOB
Converts the real number in the
accumulator to a binary value, and
stores the result in the accumulator.
OUT
V2100
Loads the binary number filtered value from
the accumulator into location V2100 to use in
your application or PID loop.
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
Chapter 3: F0-04AD-1 4-Ch. Analog Current Input
NOTE: Be careful not to do a multiple number conversion on a value. For example, if you are using the pointer
method in BCD format to get the analog value, it must be converted to binary (BIN) as shown below. If you
are using the pointer method in Binary format, the conversion to binary (BIN) instruction is not needed.
Using BCD Data Format
SP1
LD
V2000
Loads the analog signal, which is in BCD format
and has been loaded from V–memory location
V2000, into the accumulator. Contact SP1
is always on.
BIN
Converts the BCD value in the accumulator
to binary.
BTOR
Converts the binary value in the accumulator
to a real number.
SUBR
V1400
Subtracts the real number stored in location
V1400 from the real number in the accumulator,
and stores the result in the accumulator. V1400
is the designated workspace in this example.
MULR
R0.2
Multiplies the real number in the accumulator by
0.2 (the filter factor), and stores the result in the
accumulator. This is the filtered value. The filter
range is 0.1 to 0.9. Smaller filter factors
increase filtering. (1.0 eliminates filtering.)
ADDR
V1400
Adds the real number stored in location V1400
to the real number filtered value in the
accumulator, and stores the result in the accumulator.
OUTD
V1400
Copies the value in the accumulator to
location V1400.
RTOB
Converts the real number in the
accumulator to a binary value, and
stores the result in the accumulator.
BCD
Converts the binary value in the accumulator
to a BCD number. Note: The BCD instruction
is not needed to PID loop PV (loop PV is a
binary number).
OUT
V1402
Loads the BCD number filtered value from
the accumulator into location V1402 to use in
your application or PID loop.
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
3–17
F0-08ADH-1 8-CH.
ANALOG CURRENT INPUT
CHAPTER
4
In This Chapter...
Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4–2
Connecting and Disconnecting the Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4–4
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4–5
Module Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4–6
Special V-memory Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4–7
Using the Pointer in Your Control Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4–9
Scale Conversions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4–11
Module Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4–14
Analog Input Ladder Logic Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4–15
Chapter 4: F0-08ADH-1 8-Ch. Analog Current Input
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Module Specifications
4–2
The F0-08ADH-1 Analog Input module offers the following features:
• The DL05 and DL06 will read all eight channels in one scan.
• The removable terminal block simplifies module replacement.
• Analog inputs can be used as process variables for the four (4) PID
loops in the DL05 and the eight (8) PID loops in the DL06 CPUs.
• On-board active analog filtering and RISC-like microcontroller provide
digital signal processing to maintain precise analog measurements in
noisy environments.
NOTE: The DL05 CPU’s analog feature for this module requires DirectSOFT32 Version 3.0c (or later) and
firmware version 5.20 (or later). The DL06 requires DirectSOFT32 version V4.0, build 16 (or later) and
firmware version 2.30 (or later). See our website for more information: www.automationdirect.com.
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
Chapter 4: F0-08ADH-1 8-Ch. Analog Current Input
The following tables provide the specifications for the F0–08ADH –1 Analog Input Module.
Review these specifications to make sure the module meets your application requirements.
Input Specifications
Inputs per module
Input Range
Resolution
Input Type
Maximum Continuous Overload
Input Impedance
Filter Characteristics
PLC Data Format
Sample Duration Time
All Channel Update Rate
Open Circuit Detection Time
Conversion Method
Accuracy vs. Temperature
Maximum Inaccuracy
Linearity Error (End to End)
Input Stability and Repeatability
Full Scale Calibration Error (incl offset)
Offset Calibration Error
Maximum Crosstalk at DC, 50 Hz and 60 Hz
Recommended Fuse (external)
External 24VDC Power Required
Base Power Required (5.0V)
1
8
0-20mA
16-bit, .305µA/bit
Single Ended (one common)
±31mA
100 ohms, 1/10W, current input
Low pass, -3dB @ 60Hz
1
16-bit, Unsigned Integer, 0–FFFF (binary) or 0–65535 (BCD)
10.2ms (time to 95% of full step change per channel)
81.6ms (10.2ms x 8 ch.)
Zero reading within 1s
Successive Approximation
±50PPM/°C Maximum
0.2% of range (including temperature changes)
±10 count maximum; Monotonic with no missing codes
±10 count maximum
±10 count maximum
±10 count maximum
±10 count maximum
Littelfuse Series 217, .032A fuse
25mA
25mA
Each channel requires 2 words of V-memory irrespective of the format used.
General Specifications
Operating Temperature
Storage Temperature
Humidity
Environmental air
Vibration
Shock
Field to Logic side Isolation
Insulation Resistance
Noise Immunity
Agency Approvals
Module Location
Field Wiring
Weight
0 to 55°C (32 to 131°F)
-20 to 70°C (-4 to 158°F)
5 to 95% (non-condensing)
No corrosive gases permitted (EN61131-2 pollution degree 1)
MIL STD 810C 514.2
MIL STD 810C 516.2
1800VAC applied for 1 second (100% tested)
>10M ohms @ 500VDC
NEMA ICS3-304; Impulse 1000V @ 1mS pulse; RFI, (145MHz,
440Mhz 5W @ 15cm); Worst case error during noise disturbance
is .5% of full scale
UL508; UL60079-15 Zone 2
Any slot in a DL05 or DL06 System
Removable Terminal Block
49 g (1.7 oz.)
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
4–3
Chapter 4: F0-08ADH-1 8-Ch. Analog Current Input
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Connecting and Disconnecting the Field Wiring
4–4
WARNING: Before removing the analog module or the terminal block on the face of the module,
disconnect power to the PLC and all field devices. Failure to disconnect power can result in damage to
the PLC and/or field devices.
Wiring Guidelines
Your company may have guidelines for wiring and cable installation. If so, you should check
those before you begin the installation. Here are some general things to consider:
• Use the shortest wiring route whenever possible.
• Use shielded wiring and ground the shield at the transmitter source. Do not ground the shield at both
the module and the source.
• Do not run the signal wiring next to large motors, high current switches, or transformers. This may
cause noise problems.
• Route the wiring through an approved cable housing to minimize the risk of accidental damage.
Check local and national codes to choose the correct method for your application.
The F0–08ADH–1 does not supply power to field devices. You will need to power transmitters
separately from the PLC.
To remove the terminal block, disconnect power to the PLC and the field devices. Pull the
terminal block firmly until the connector separates from the module.
You can remove the analog module from the PLC by folding out the retaining tabs at the top
and bottom of the module. As the retaining tabs pivot upward and outward, the module’s
connector is lifted out of the PLC socket. Once the connector is free, you can lift the module
out of its slot.
NOTE: The F0–08ADH–1 analog module cannot sense the loss of analog input signals in 0–20mA loops.
Terminal Block Specifications
Number of Positions
Re-Order Number
Pitch
Wire Range
Screwdriver Size (Slotted)
Screw Size
Screw Torque
13
D0-ACC-4
.2 inch (5.08 mm)
28-16AWG Solid or Stranded Conductor;
Wire strip length 5/16" (7-8mm)
0.4T x 2.5W mm (part number DN-SS1)
M2.5 size
4.5 inch-pounds (.52 Nm)
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
Chapter 4: F0-08ADH-1 8-Ch. Analog Current Input
Wiring Diagram
Use the following diagram to connect the field wiring. If necessary, the F0–08ADH–1 terminal
block can be removed to make removal of the module possible without disturbing field wiring.
Typical User Wiring
Internal Module Circuitry
CH1
2-wire 4–20mA
Transmitter
4-20mA Transmitter
Shield, Ch. 1
SEE NOTE 1.
2-wire 4–20mA
Transmitter
4-20mA Transmitter
Shield, Ch. 3
.032A
3-wire 4–20mA
Transmitter
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH5
100 Ω
100 Ω
CH8
COM
CH6 ADC
CH5
CH7 ADC
CH6
CH7
CH8 ADC
100 Ω
COM
CH4
CH5 ADC
100 Ω
4-20mA Transmitter
Shield, Ch. 5
0–20mA
CH4 ADC
100 Ω
4-20mA Transmitter
Shield, Ch. 5
+
ANALOG
CH3 ADC
100 Ω
COM
IN
CH2 ADC
100 Ω
CH3
AC or DC
4-wire 4–20mA
Transmitter
CH1 ADC
100 Ω
CH8
COM
COM
SHIELD CONNECTED TO SIGNAL
SOURCE COMMON. SEE NOTE 2.
COM
+24VDC
Note 1: A Littelfuse Series 217, 0.032A fast-acting fuse
is recommended for all 4-20mA current loops.
Note 2: Do not connect both ends of shield.
+24V
ISOLATED ANALOG
CIRCUIT POWER
0VDC
0V
F0-08ADH-1
0V
24VDC
Power Supply
Current Loop Transmitter Impedance
Manufacturers of transmitters and transducers specify a wide variety of power sources for their
products. Follow the manufacturer’s recommendations.
In some cases, manufacturers specify a minimum loop or load resistance that must be used with
the transmitter. The F0-08ADH-1 provides 100 ohm resistance for each channel. If your
transmitter requires a load resistance below 100 ohms, you do not have to make any changes.
However, if your transmitter requires a load resistance higher than 100 ohms, you need to add
a resistor in series with the module.
Consider the following example for a transmitter being operated from a 30 VDC supply with
a recommended load resistance of 750 ohms. Since the module has a 100 ohm resistor, you need
to add an additional resistor.
R = Tr – Mr
R = Resistor to add
R = 750 – 100
Tr = Transmitter requirement
R 욷 650
Mr = Module resistance (internal 100 ohms)
Two-wire Transmitter
+
–
DC Supply
+30V
0V
Module Channel 1
R
CH1
COM
100 ohms
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
0V
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
4–5
Chapter 4: F0-08ADH-1 8-Ch. Analog Current Input
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Module Operation
4–6
Channel Scanning Sequence
The DL05 and DL06 will read all eight channels of input data during each scan. Each CPU
supports special V-memory locations that are used to manage the data transfer. This is discussed
in more detail beginning in the section on “Special V–memory Locations”.
Scan
DL05/DL06 PLC
Read Inputs
Execute Application Program
Read the data
Store data
Scan N
Ch 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8
Scan N+1
Ch 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8
Scan N+2
Ch 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8
Scan N+3
Ch 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8
Scan N+4
Ch 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8
Write to Outputs
Analog Module Updates
Even though the channel updates to the CPUs are synchronous with the CPU scan, the module
asynchronously monitors the analog transmitter signals and converts each signal into a 16-bit
binary representation. This enables the module to continuously provide accurate measurements
without slowing down the discrete control logic in the RLL program.
The module takes approximately 10.2 milliseconds to sense 95% of the change in the analog
signal per channel. It takes approximately 81.6 ms to sample all channels if 8 channels are used
(10.2 ms X 8 channels = 81.6 ms).
NOTE: If you are comparing other manufacturers’ update times (step responses) with ours, please be aware
that some manufacturers refer to the time it takes to convert the analog signal to a digital value. Our analog
to digital conversion takes only a few microseconds. It is the settling time of the filter that is critical in
determining the full update time. Our update time specification includes the filter settling time.
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
Chapter 4: F0-08ADH-1 8-Ch. Analog Current Input
Special V-memory Locations
Formatting the Analog Module Data
The DL05 and DL06 PLCs have special V-memory locations assigned to their respective option
slots. These V-memory locations allow you to:
• specify the data format (binary or BCD)
• specify the number of channels to scan (up to 8 channels for the F0–08ADH–1)
• specify the V-memory locations to store the input data
DL05 Data Formatting
The table below shows the special V-memory locations used by the DL05 PLC for the
F0–08ADH–1.
Analog Input Module
DL05 Special V-memory Locations
Data Type and Number of Channels
Storage Pointer
V7700
V7701
Setup Data Type and Number of Active Channels
Special V–memory location 7700 is used to set the data
format to either BCD or binary and to set the number of
channels that will be active.
For example, assume the F0–08ADH–1 is installed in the
option slot. Loading a constant of 800 into V7700 sets
8 channels active and causes the input data value to be read as
a BCD number.
With the F0–08ADH–1 in the option slot, loading a constant
of 8800 into V7700 sets 8 channels active, and the input data
value is read as a binary number.
V7700 BCD setup
MSB
LSB
1 1 1 1 1 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
5 4 3 2 1 0
V7700 binary setup
MSB
LSB
1 1 1 1 1 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
5 4 3 2 1 0
Storage Pointer Setup
V7701 is a system V–memory location used as a pointer to a user V-memory location where
the analog input data is stored. The V–memory location loaded into V7701 is an octal
number identifying the first user V-memory location for reading the analog input data. This
V–memory location is user selectable. For example, loading O2000 causes the pointer to
write Ch 1’s data value to V2000 – 2001, Ch 2’s data value to V2002 – 2003, Ch 3’s data
value to V2004 – 2005, Ch 4’s data value to V2006 – 2007, Ch 5’s data value to V2010 –
2011, Ch 6’s data value to V2012 – 2013, Ch 7’s data value to V2014 – 2015, and Ch 8’s
data value to V2016 – 2017.
You will find an example program that loads appropriate values to V7700 and V7701 on
page 4–9.
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
4–7
Chapter 4: F0-08ADH-1 8-Ch. Analog Current Input
DL06 Data Formatting
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
4–8
Special V–memory locations are assigned to the four option slots of the DL06 PLC. The table
below shows these V-memory locations which can be used to setup the F0–08ADH–1.
Analog Input Module
DL06 Special V-memory Locations
Slot No.
Data Type and Number of Channels
Storage Pointer
1
V700
V701
2
V710
V711
3
V720
V721
4
V730
V731
Setup Data Type and Number of Active Channels
V–memory locations 700, 710, 720, and 730 are used to set
the data format to either BCD or binary and to set the
number of channels that will be active.
For example, assume the F0–08ADH–1 is installed in slot 1.
Loading a constant of 800 into V700 sets 8 channels active
and causes the input data value to be read as a BCD number.
With the F0–08ADH–1 in slot 1, loading a constant of
8800 into V700 sets 8 channels active, and the input data
value is read as a binary number.
V700 BCD setup
MSB
LSB
1 1 1 1 1 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
5 4 3 2 1 0
V700 binary setup
MSB
LSB
1 1 1 1 1 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
5 4 3 2 1 0
Storage Pointer Setup
V–memory locations 701, 711, 721 and 731 are special locations used as storage pointers. A
V–memory address is loaded into this location as an octal number identifying the first user
V–memory location for the analog input data. This V–memory location is user selectable. For
example, loading O2000 causes the pointer to write Ch 1’s data value to V2000 – 2001, Ch 2’s
data value to V2002 – 2003, Ch 3’s data value to V2004 – 2005, Ch 4’s data value to V2006 –
2007, Ch 5’s data value to V2010 – 2011, Ch 6’s data value to V2012 – 2013, Ch 7’s data value
to V2014 – 2015, and Ch 8’s data value to V2016 – 2017.
You will find an example program that loads appropriate values to V700 and V701 beginning
on page 4–10.
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
Chapter 4: F0-08ADH-1 8-Ch. Analog Current Input
Using the Pointer in Your Control Program
DL05 Pointer Method Using Conventional Ladder Logic
The proper use of the DL05 pointer requires that the V–memory address be written to the special memory
location on the first scan only. Use the SP0 bit as a permissive contact when using the code shown below.
The example program below shows how to setup the special V–memory locations. This rung
can be placed anywhere in the ladder program or in the initial stage if you are using stage
programming instructions.
This is all that is required to read the analog input data into V-memory locations. Once the data
is in V-memory you can perform math on the data, compare the data against preset values, and
so forth. V2000 is used in the example but you can use any user V-memory location.
SP0
LD
K800
Loads a constant that specifies the number of channels to scan and the
data format. The upper byte selects the data format (i.e. 0=BCD, 8=Binary)
and the number of channels (up to 8 for the F0-08ADH-1).
- or LD
K8800
The binary format is used for displaying data on some operator
interface units. The DL05 PLCs support binary math functions.
OUT
V7700
Special V-memory location assigned to the option slot contains the
data format and the number of channels to scan.
LDA
O2000
This loads an octal value for the first V-memory location that will be used
to store the incoming data. For example, the O2000 entered here would
designate the following addresses:
Ch1 – V2000-2001, Ch2 – V2002-V2003, Ch3 – V2004-V2005, Ch 4 – V2006-2007
Ch 5 – V2010-2011, Ch 6 – V2012-V2013, Ch 7 – V2014-V2015, Ch 8 – V2016-V2017.
OUT
V7701
The octal address (O2000) is stored here. V7701 is assigned to the option slot
and acts as a pointer, which means the CPU will use the octal value in this location
to determine exaclty where to store the incoming data.
DL05 Pointer Method Using the IBox Instruction Available in DirectSOFT5
The following logic accomplishes the same thing as the previous ladder example, but it uses
the IBox instruction ANLGIN.
Analog Input Module Pointer Setup
ANLGIN
No permissive contact or input logic
is used with this instruction. This instruction
operates on the first scan only.
Base # (K0 - Local)
Slot #
Number of Input Channels
Input Data Format (0 - BCD 1 - BIN)
Input Data Address
IB-460
K0
K1
K8
K0
V2000
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
4–9
Chapter 4: F0-08ADH-1 8-Ch. Analog Current Input
DL06 Pointer Method Using Conventional Ladder Logic
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
4–10
The proper use of the DL06 pointer requires that the V–memory address be written to the special memory
location on the first scan only. Use the SP0 bit as a permissive contact when using the code shown below.
Use the special V–memory table below as a guide to setup the storage pointer in the following
example for the DL06. Slot 1 is the left most option slot.
Analog Input Module
DL06 Special V-memory Locations
Slot No.
No. of Channels
Input Pointer
1
V700
V701
2
V710
V711
3
V720
V721
4
V730
V731
The F0–08ADH–1 can be installed in any available DL06 option slot. The ladder diagram
below shows how to set up these locations with the module installed in slot 1 of the DL06. Use
the above table to determine the pointer values if locating the module in any of the other slot
locations. Place this rung anywhere in the ladder program or in the initial stage if you are using
stage programming instructions.
This logic is all that is required to read the analog input data into V-memory locations. Once
the data is in V-memory you can perform mathematical calculations with the data, compare
the data against preset values, and so forth. In the example, V2000 is used, but you can use
any user V-memory location.
SP0
LD
K800
Loads a constant that specifies the number of channels to scan and the
data format. The upper byte selects the data format (i.e. 0=BCD, 8=Binary)
and the number of channels (up to 8 for the F0-08ADH-1).
- or LD
K8800
The binary format is used for displaying data on some operator
interface units and the DL06 display. The DL06 PLCs support
binary math functions.
OUT
V700
Special V-memory location assigned to the first option slot contains the
data format and the number of channels to scan.
LDA
O2000
This loads an octal value for the first V-memory location that will be used
to store the incoming data. For example, the O2000 entered here would
designate the following addresses:
Ch1 – V2000-2001, Ch2 – V2002-V2003, Ch3 – V2004-V2005, Ch 4 – V2006-2007
Ch 5 – V2010-2011, Ch 6 – V2012-V2013, Ch 7 – V2014-V2015, Ch 8 – V2016-V2017.
OUT
V701
The octal address (O2000) is stored here. V701 is assigned to the first option slot
and acts as a pointer, which means the CPU will use the octal value in this location
to determine exaclty where to store the incoming data.
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
Chapter 4: F0-08ADH-1 8-Ch. Analog Current Input
DL06 Pointer Method Using the IBox Instruction Available in DirectSOFT5
The following logic accomplishes the same thing as the previous ladder example, but it uses
the IBox instruction ANLGIN.
Analog Input Module Pointer Setup
ANLGIN
No permissive contact or input logic
is used with this instruction. This instruction
operates on the first scan only.
Base # (K0 - Local)
Slot #
Number of Input Channels
Input Data Format (0 - BCD 1 - BIN)
Input Data Address
IB-460
K0
K1
K8
K0
V2000
Scale Conversions
Scaling the Input Data
Many applications call for measurements in
Units = A H – L + L
65535
engineering units, which can be more meaningful
than raw data. Convert to engineering units using
H = High limit of the engineering
the formula shown to the right.
unit range
You may have to make adjustments to the formula
L = Low limit of the engineering
unit range
depending on the scale you choose for the
engineering units.
A = Analog value (0 – 65535)
For example, if you wanted to measure pressure
(PSI) from 0.0 to 99.9 then you would have to multiply the analog value by 10 in order to
imply a decimal place when you view the value with the programming software or a handheld
programmer. Notice how the calculations differ when you use the multiplier.
Analog Value of 32375, slightly less than half scale, should yield 49.4 PSI.
Example without multiplier
Example with multiplier
Units = A H – L + L
65535
Units = 10 A H – L + L
65535
Units = 32375
Units = 49
100 – 0 + 0
65535
Units = 323750 100 – 0 + 0
65535
Units = 494
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
4–11
Chapter 4: F0-08ADH-1 8-Ch. Analog Current Input
The Conversion Program in Standard Ladder Logic
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
4–12
The following example shows how you would write the program to perform the engineering
unit conversion. This example assumes you have BCD data loaded into the appropriate Vmemory locations using instructions that apply for the model of CPU you are using.
_First Scan
SP0
LDD
K100
Loads the constant 100 to the accumulator.
OUTD
V3000
Copies the constant 100 from the accumulator
to the memory location V3000 and V3001.
LDD
K65535
Loads the constant 65535 to the accumulator.
OUTD
V3002
Copies the content of V2000 from the accumulator
to the memory location V3002 and V3003.
LDD
V2000
Loads data from V2000 and V2001.
MULD
V3000
Multiplies the accumulator value by 100
(previously loaded into V3000 and V3001).
DIVD
V3002
Divides the accumulator value by 65535
(previously loaded into V3002 and V3003).
OUTD
V2100
Copies the content of the accumulator to the memory
location V2100 and V2101.
_On
SP1
V2000/2001
V2100/2101
32375
49
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
Chapter 4: F0-08ADH-1 8-Ch. Analog Current Input
Analog and Digital Value Conversions
Sometimes it is useful to convert between the signal levels and the digital values. This is
especially helpful during machine start-up or troubleshooting. The following table provides
formulas to make this conversion easier.
Range
0 to 20mA
If you know the digital value
A=
20
. D
65535
For example, if you have measured the signal
as 10mA, you can use the formula to
determine the digital value that should be
stored in the V–memory location that contains
the data.
If you know the analog signal level
D=
65535 .
A
20
D = 65535 . A
20
D = 65535 . 10mA
20
D = 32767
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
4–13
Chapter 4: F0-08ADH-1 8-Ch. Analog Current Input
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Module Resolution
4–14
Analog Data Bits
Two 16-bit words are reserved for the analog data whether you are using BCD or binary data
formatting. The 16 bits in the low word represent the analog data in binary format.
BCD Example
MSB
V2001
LSB
V2000
MSB
LSB
3 2 1 0 3 2 1 0 3 2 1 0 3 2 1 0
3 2 1 0
Binary Example
MSB
V2001
LSB
1 1 1 1 1 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
5 4 3 2 1 0
V2000
MSB
LSB
1 1 1 1 1 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
5 4 3 2 1 0
= data bits
Resolution Details
Since the module has 16-bit resolution, the analog signal is converted into 65,536 counts
ranging from 0 - 65,535 (216). A 0mA signal would be 0 and a 20mA signal would be 65535.
This is equivalent to a binary value of 0000 0000 0000 0000 to 1111 1111 1111 1111, or 000
to FFFF hexadecimal.
Each count can also be expressed in terms of the signal level by using the following equation:
0 – 20mA
20mA
Resolution =
H–L
65535
H = high limit of the signal range
L = low limit of the signal range
0mA
0
65535
The following table shows the smallest detectable signal change that will result in one LSB
change in the data value for each increment of the signal change.
mA Range
0 to 20mA
Signal Span
(H – L)
Divide By
Smallest Detectable
Change
20mA
65535
.3052µA
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
Chapter 4: F0-08ADH-1 8-Ch. Analog Current Input
Analog Input Ladder Logic Filter
PID Loops / Filtering:
Please refer to the “PID Loop Operation” chapter in the DL06 or DL05 User Manual for
information on the built-in PV filter (DL05/06) and the ladder logic filter (DL06 only) shown
below. A filter must be used to smooth the analog input value when auto tuning PID loops to
prevent giving a false indication of loop characteristics.
Smoothing the Input Signal (DL06 only):
The filter logic can also be used in the same way to smooth the analog input signal to help
stabilize PID loop operation or to stabilize the analog input signal value for use with an operator
interface display, etc.
Warning: The built-in and logic filters are not intended to smooth or filter noise generated by improper
field device wiring or grounding. Small amounts of electrical noise can cause the input signal to bounce
considerably. Proper field device wiring and grounding must be done before attempting to use the filters
to smooth the analog input signal.
Binary Data Format Filter Using Ladder Logic
SP1
LDD
V2000
Loads the analog signal, which is in binary format
and has been loaded from V–memory location
V2000 – 2001, into the accumulator. Contact SP1
is always on.
BTOR
Converts the binary value in the accumulator
to a real number.
SUBR
V1400
Subtracts the real number stored in location
V1400 from the real number in the accumulator,
and stores the result in the accumulator. V1400
is the designated workspace in this example.
MULR
R0.2
Multiplies the real number in the accumulator by
0.2 (the filter factor), and stores the result in the
accumulator. This is the filtered value. The filter
range is 0.1 to 0.9. Smaller filter factors
increase filtering. (1.0 eliminates filtering.)
ADDR
V1400
Adds the real number stored in location V1400
to the real number filtered value in the
accumulator, and stores the result in the accumulator.
OUTD
V1400
Copies the value in the accumulator to
location V1400.
RTOB
Converts the real number in the
accumulator to a binary value, and
stores the result in the accumulator.
OUT
V2100
Loads the binary number filtered value from
the accumulator into location V2100 to use in
your application or PID loop.
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
4–15
Chapter 4: F0-08ADH-1 8-Ch. Analog Current Input
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
4–16
NOTE: Be careful not to do a multiple number conversion on a value. For example, if you are using the pointer
method in BCD format to get the analog value, it must be converted to binary (BIN) as shown below. If you
are using the pointer method in Binary format, the conversion to binary (BIN) instruction is not needed.
BCD Data Format Filter Using Ladder Logic
SP1
LDD
V2000
Loads the analog signal, which is in BCD format
and has been loaded from V–memory location
V2000 – 2001, into the accumulator. Contact SP1
is always on.
BIN
Converts the BCD value in the accumulator
to binary.
BTOR
Converts the binary value in the accumulator
to a real number.
SUBR
V1400
Subtracts the real number stored in location
V1400 from the real number in the accumulator,
and stores the result in the accumulator. V1400
is the designated workspace in this example.
MULR
R0.2
Multiplies the real number in the accumulator by
0.2 (the filter factor), and stores the result in the
accumulator. This is the filtered value. The filter
range is 0.1 to 0.9. Smaller filter factors
increase filtering. (1.0 eliminates filtering.)
ADDR
V1400
Adds the real number stored in location V1400
to the real number filtered value in the
accumulator, and stores the result in the accumulator.
OUTD
V1400
Copies the value in the accumulator to
location V1400.
RTOB
Converts the real number in the
accumulator to a binary value, and
stores the result in the accumulator.
BCD
Converts the binary value in the accumulator
to a BCD number. Note: The BCD instruction
is not needed to PID loop PV (loop PV is a
binary number).
OUTD
V2100
Loads the BCD number filtered value from
the accumulator into location V2100 to use in
your application or PID loop.
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
Chapter 4: F0-08ADH-1 8-Ch. Analog Current Input
Example Code to Scale a 4–20mA Signal to 0–1000 BCD
(For applications where the field transmitter sends a 4–20mA signal to the analog input card.)
This example will scale the first input, a double word BCD value located at V2000 and
V2001, as a 4–20mA input signal from 0–1000. Because the input card ranges from 0–20mA
instead of 4–20mA, an offset value must be used to deal with the 0–4mA values. Any value
below a 4mA (13107) value is forced to a 4mA (13107) value.
Load V2020 with the maximum engineering value (1000 in this example). Load
V2022 with the maximum 16-bit value after the 4mA value (13107) is subtracted.
SP1
LDD
K1000
OUTD
V2020
LDD
K52428
OUTD
V2022
Determine if the incoming value is below 4mA, or 13107 counts.
V2001
K1
V2001
≥
K3107
V2000
≥
=
C0
OUT
K2
If the incoming value is below 4mA (13107 count) then load the
minumum count value of 13107 into the accumulator.
C0
LDD
K13107
If the incoming value is between 4mA and 20mA then load the
incoming count value into the accumulator.
C0
LDD
V2000
Scale the incoming raw count of 13107 to 65535 to a value
between 0 and 1000. Output the value in V3000.
SP1
SUBD
K13107
MULD
V2020
DIVD
V2022
OUT
V3000
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
4–17
Chapter 4: F0-08ADH-1 8-Ch. Analog Current Input
Example Code to Scale a 4–20mA Signal to 0–1000 Binary
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
4–18
(For applications where the field transmitter sends a 4–20mA signal to the analog input card.)
This example will scale the first input, a binary/decimal value located at V2000 (the CPU
reserves two words for each channel so V2000 and V2001 are reserved), as a 4–20mA input
signal from 0–1000. Because the input card ranges from 0–20mA instead of 4–20mA, an
offset value must be used to deal with the 0–4mA values. Any value below a 4mA (13107 or
3333h) value is forced to a 4mA (13107 or 3333h) value.
Load V2020 with the maximum engineering value (1000 or 3E8h in this example). Load
V2022 with the maximum 16-bit value after the 4mA value (13107 or 3333h) is subtracted.
SP1
LDD
K1000
BIN
OUTD
V2020
LDD
K52428
BIN
OUTD
V2022
If the incoming value is below 4mA (13107 or 3333h) then load the
minumum count value of 13107 (3333h) into the accumulator.
V2000
K3333
<
LDD
K3333
If the incoming value is between 4mA and 20mA then load the
incoming count value into the accumulator.
V2000
≥
K3333
LDD
V2000
Scale the incoming raw count of 13107 (3333h) to 65535 (FFFFh) to a value
between 0 and 1000 (3E8h). Output the value in V3000 as a binary/decimal number.
SP1
SUBB
K3333
MULB
V2020
DIVB
V2022
OUT
V3000
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
F0-04AD-2 4-CH.
ANALOG VOLTAGE INPUT
CHAPTER
5
In This Chapter...
Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5–2
Setting the Module Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5–4
Connecting and Disconnecting the Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5–5
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5–5
Module Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5–6
Special V-memory Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5–7
Using the Pointer in Your Control Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5–9
Scale Conversions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5–11
Module Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5–14
Analog Input Ladder Logic Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5–15
Chapter 5: F0-04AD-2 4-Ch. Analog Voltage Input
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Module Specifications
5–2
The F0-04AD-2 Analog input module offers the
following features:
• The DL05 and DL06 will read all four channels in one
scan.
• The removable terminal block makes it possible to
remove the module without disconnecting the field
wiring.
• Analog inputs can be used as process variables for the
four (4) PID loops in the DL05 CPU and the eight (8)
PID loops in the DL06 CPUs.
• On-board active analog filtering and RISC-like
microcontroller provide digital signal processing to
maintain precise analog measurements in noisy
environments.
NOTE: The DL05 CPU’s analog feature for this module requires DirectSOFT32 Version 3.0c (or later) and
firmware version 2.10 (or later). The DL06 requires DirectSOFT32 version V4.0, build 16 (or later) and
firmware version 1.00 (or later). See our website for more information: www.automationdirect.com.
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
Chapter 5: F0-04AD-2 4-Ch. Analog Voltage Input
The following tables provide the specifications for the F0–04AD–2 Analog Input Module.
Review these specifications to make sure the module meets your application requirements.
Input Specifications
Number of Channels
Input Range
Resolution
Step Response
Crosstalk
Active Low-pass Filtering
Input Impedance
Absolute Maximum Ratings
Linearity Error (End to End)
Input Stability
Gain Error
Offset Error
4, single ended (one common)
0 to 5 VDC or 0 to 10 VDC (jumper selectable)
12 bit (1 in 4096)
10.0 mS to 95% of full step change
-80 dB, 1/2 count maximum*
-3 dB at 300Hz (-12 dB per octave)
Greater than 20K⏲
± 15V
± 2 counts maximum*
± 1 count *
± 6 counts maximum *
± 2 counts maximum*
±0.3% @ 25°C (77°F)
Maximum Inaccuracy
±0.6% 0 to 60°C (32 to 140°F)
Accuracy vs. Temperature
±100 ppm/°C typical
* One count in the specification tables is equal to one least significant bit of the analog data value ( 1 in 4096).
General Specifications
PLC Update Rate
16-bit Data Word
Operating Temperature
Storage Temperature
Relative Humidity
Environmental Air
Vibration
Shock
Noise Immunity
Power Budget Requirement
Connector
Connector Wire Size
Connector Screw Torque
Connector Screwdriver Size
4 input channels per scan
12 binary data bits
0 to 60° C (32 to 140° F)
-20 to 70° C (-4 to 158° F)
5 to 95% (non-condensing)
No corrosive gases permitted
MIL STD 810C 514.2
MIL STD 810C 516.2
NEMA ICS3-304
75 mA @ 5 VDC (supplied by base)
Phoenix Mecano, Inc. Part No. AK1550/8-3.5 - green
28 - 16 AWG
0.4 Nm
DN-SS1 (recommended)
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5–3
Chapter 5: F0-04AD-2 4-Ch. Analog Voltage Input
Setting the Module Jumpers
5–4
The position of the J2 jumpers determines the input signal levels. You can choose between
0–5VDC or 0–10VDC. The module ships with the jumpers installed connecting the pins. In
this position, the input signal level is 0–5VDC. To select 0–10VDC signals, use the jumper
selection chart located on the module. One or more channels can be selected for 0–10 VDC
input signal level by removing the jumper from the connecting pin of the appropriate channel.
This allows you to have some channels selected for 0–5 VDC signals and other channels selected
for 0–10 VDC signals.
J2 jumpers shown below are
configured as CH1 and CH4 set
for 0–10V, and CH2 and CH3
set for 0–5V.
J2
CH1
CH2
CH3 INPUTS
CH4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Refer to jumper selection chart.
ON=0–5V
RANGE
C14
WARNING: Before removing the analog module or the terminal block on the face of the module,
disconnect power to the PLC and all field devices. Failure to disconnect power can result in damage to
the PLC and/or field devices.
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
Chapter 5: F0-04AD-2 4-Ch. Analog Voltage Input
Connecting and Disconnecting the Field Wiring
Wiring Guidelines
Your company may have guidelines for wiring and cable installation. If so, you should check
those before you begin the installation. Here are some general things to consider:
• Use the shortest wiring route whenever possible.
• Use shielded wiring and ground the shield at the transmitter source. Do not ground the shield at both
the module and the source.
• Do not run the signal wiring next to large motors, high current switches, or transformers. This may
cause noise problems.
• Route the wiring through an approved cable housing to minimize the risk of accidental damage.
Check local and national codes to choose the correct method for your application.
A separate transmitter power supply may be required, depending on the type of transmitter
being used.
This module has a removable connector to make wiring and module removal easier. To remove
the terminal block, disconnect power to the PLC and the field devices. Pull the terminal block
firmly until the connector separates from the module.
The analog module can be removed from the PLC by folding out the retaining tabs at the top
and bottom of the module. As the retaining tabs pivot upward and outward, the module’s
connector is lifted out of the PLC socket. Once the connector is free, you can lift the module
out of its slot.
Wiring Diagram
Use the following diagram to connect the field wiring. If necessary, the terminal block can be
removed to make removal of the module possible without disturbing field wiring.
A n a l o g Input
4-CHANNELS
0–5V
0–10V
CH1+
CH2+
CH3+
CH4+
0V
0V
0V
0V
F0–04AD–2
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5–5
Chapter 5: F0-04AD-2 4-Ch. Analog Voltage Input
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Module Operation
5–6
Input Channel Update Sequence
The DL05 and DL06 read four channels of input data data during each scan. The CPU
supports special V-memory locations that are used to manage the data transfer. This is discussed
in more detail on the next page, “Special V–memory Locations”.
Scan
DL05/DL06 PLC
Read Inputs
Execute Application Program
Read the data
Store data
Scan N
Ch 1, 2, 3, 4
Scan N+1
Ch 1, 2, 3, 4
Scan N+2
Ch 1, 2, 3, 4
Scan N+3
Ch 1, 2, 3, 4
Scan N+4
Ch 1, 2, 3, 4
Write to Outputs
Analog Module Updates
Even though the channel updates to the CPU are synchronous with the CPU scan, the module
asynchronously monitors the analog transmitter signals and converts each signal into a 12-bit
binary representation. This enables the module to continuously provide accurate measurements
without slowing down the discrete control logic in the RLL program.
The module takes approximately 10 milliseconds to sense 95% of the change in the analog
signal. For the vast majority of applications, the process changes are much slower than these
updates.
NOTE: If you are comparing other manufacturers’ update times (step responses) with ours, please be aware
that some manufacturers refer to the time it takes to convert the analog signal to a digital value. Our analog
to digital conversion takes only a few microseconds. It is the settling time of the filter that is critical in
determining the full update time. Our update time specification includes the filter settling time.
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
Chapter 5: F0-04AD-2 4-Ch. Analog Voltage Input
Special V-memory Locations
Formatting the Module Data
The DL05 and DL06 PLCs have special V-memory locations assigned to their respective option
slots. These V-memory locations allow you to:
• specify the data format (binary or BCD)
• specify the number of channels to scan (4 channels for the F0-04AD-2)
• specify the V-memory locations to store the input data
DL05 Data Formatting
The table below shows the special V-memory locations which are used by the DL05 PLC for the
F0–04AD–2.
Analog Input Module
DL05 Special V-memory Locations
Data Type and Number of I/O Channels
Input Storage Pointer
V7700
V7701
Structure of V7700
Special V–memory location 7700 identifies that a F0-04AD-2 module is installed in the DL05
option slot and the data type to be either binary or BCD.
Loading a constant of 400 into V7700 identifies a
MSB
LSB
4 channel analog input module is installed in the
1 1 1 1 1 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
DL05 option slot, and reads the input data values
5 4 3 2 1 0
as BCD numbers.
Loading a constant of 8400 into V7700 identifies a
MSB
LSB
4 channel analog input module is installed in the
DL05 option slot, and reads the input data values
1 1 1 1 1 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
5 4 3 2 1 0
as binary numbers.
Structure of V7701
V7701 is a system V–memory location used as a pointer to a user V-memory location where the
analog input data is stored. The V–memory location loaded into V7701 is an octal number
identifying the first user V-memory location for reading the analog input data. This V–memory
location is user selectable. For example, loading O2000 causes the pointer to write Ch 1’s data
value to V2000, Ch 2’s data value to V2001, Ch 3’s data value to V2002, and Ch 4’s data value
to V2003.
You will find an example program that loads appropriate values to V7700 and V7701 on page
5–9.
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5–7
Chapter 5: F0-04AD-2 4-Ch. Analog Voltage Input
DL06 Data Formatting
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5–8
Special V–memory locations are assigned to the four option module slots of the DL06 PLC.
The table below shows these V–memory locations which can be used for the F0–04AD–2.
Analog Input Module
DL06 Special V-memory Locations
Slot No.
Number of Channels
Input Pointer
1
V700
V701
2
V710
V711
3
V720
V721
4
V730
V731
Setup Data Type and Number of Channels
V–memory locations 700, 710, 720 and 730 are used to set the data format to be read in either
binary or BCD, and to set the number of channels that will be active.
MSB
LSB
For example, the F0–04AD–2 is installed in slot 1.
Loading a constant of 400 into V700 sets 4 channels
1 1 1 1 1 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
active, and the input data value is read as a BCD
5 4 3 2 1 0
number.
With the F0–4AD–2 in slot 1, loading a constant of
MSB
LSB
8400 into V700 sets 4 channels active, and the input
data value is read as a binary number.
1 1 1 1 1 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Storage Pointer Setup
5 4 3 2 1 0
V-memory locations 701, 711, 721 and 731 are special locations used as storage pointers for the
analog input data. With the analog module installed in slot 4, the V–memory location loaded
in V731, for instance, is an octal number identifying the first user V-memory location to read
the analog input data. This V–memory location is user selectable. For example, loading O2000
using the LDA instruction causes the pointer to write Ch 1’s data value to V2000, Ch 2’s data
value to V2001, CH 3’s data value to V2002 and Ch 4’s data value to V2003.
You will find an example program that loads appropriate values to V700 and V701 on page
5–10.
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
Chapter 5: F0-04AD-2 4-Ch. Analog Voltage Input
Using the Pointer in Your Control Program
DL05 Pointer Method
The DL05 CPU examines the pointer values (the memory locations identified in V7700 and
V7701) on the first scan only.
The example program below shows how to setup these locations. This rung can be placed
anywhere in the ladder program or in the initial stage if you are using stage programming
instructions.
This is all that is required to read the analog input data into V-memory locations. Once the data
is in V-memory you can perform math on the data, compare the data against preset values, and
so forth. V2000 is used in the example but you can use any user V-memory location.
SP0
LD
K400
Loads a constant that specifies the number of channels to scan and the
data format. The upper byte selects the data format (i.e. 0=BCD,
8=Binary) and the number of channels (set to 4 for the F0–04AD–2).
- or LD
K8400
OUT
V7700
LDA
O2000
OUT
V7701
The binary format is used for displaying data on some operator
interface units. The DL05 PLCs support binary math functions.
Special V-memory location assigned to the option slot contains the data
format and the number of channels to scan.
This loads an octal value for the first V-memory location that will be used
to store the incoming data. For example, the O2000 entered here would
designate the following addresses.
Ch1 – V2000, Ch2 – V2001, Ch3 – V2002, Ch 4 – V2003
The octal address (O2000) is stored here. V7701 is assigned to the
option slot and acts as a pointer, which means the CPU will use the octal
value in this location to determine exactly where to store the incoming
data.
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5–9
Chapter 5: F0-04AD-2 4-Ch. Analog Voltage Input
DL06 Pointer Method
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5–10
Use the special V–memory table below as a guide to setup the pointer values in the following
example for the DL06. Slot 1 is the left most option slot. The CPU will examine the pointer
values at these locations only after a mode transition, first scan only.
Analog Input Module
DL06 Special V-memory Locations
Slot No.
Number of Channels
Input Pointer
1
V700
V701
2
V710
V711
3
V720
V721
4
V730
V731
The F0–04AD–2 can be installed in any available DL06 option slot. Using the example
program from the previous page, but changing the V–memory addresses, the ladder diagram
below shows how to setup these locations with the module installed in slot 1 of the DL06. Use
the above table to determine the pointer values if locating the module in any of the other slot
locations. Place this rung anywhere in the ladder program or in the initial stage if you are using
stage programming instructions.
Like the DL05 example, this logic is all that is required to read the analog input data into Vmemory locations. Once the data is in V-memory you can perform mathematical calculations
with the data, compare the data against preset values, and so forth. V2000 is used in the example
but you can use any user V-memory location.
SP0
LD
K400
Loads a constant that specifies the number of channels to scan and the
data format. The upper byte selects the data format (i.e. 0=BCD,
8=Binary) and the number of channels (set to 4 for the F0–04AD–2).
- or LD
K8400
The binary format can be used for displaying data on some
operator interface units and the DL06 LCD display. The DL06
PLCs support binary math functions.
OUT
V700
Special V-memory location assigned to the first option slot contains the
data format and the number of channels to scan.
LDA
O2000
This loads an octal value for the first V-memory location that will be used
to store the incoming data. For example, the O2000 entered here would
designate the following addresses.
Ch1 – V2000, Ch2 – V2001, Ch3 – V2002, Ch 4 – V2003
OUT
V701
The octal address (O2000) is stored here. V701 is assigned to the
first option slot and acts as a pointer, which means the CPU will use
the octal value in this location to determine exactly where to store the
incoming data.
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
Chapter 5: F0-04AD-2 4-Ch. Analog Voltage Input
Scale Conversions
Scaling the Input Data
Many applications call for measurements in
engineering units, which can be more meaningful
than raw data. Convert to engineering units using
the formula shown to the right.
You may have to make adjustments to the formula
depending on the scale you choose for the
engineering units.
Units = A H – L + L
65535
H = High limit of the engineering
unit range
L = Low limit of the engineering
unit range
A = Analog value (0 – 65535)
For example, if you wanted to measure pressure (PSI) from 0.0 to 100.0 then you would have
to multiply the analog value by 10 in order to imply a decimal place when you view the value
with the programming software or a handheld programmer. Notice how the calculations differ
when you use the multiplier.
Analog Value of 2024, slightly less than half scale, should yield 49.4 PSI
Example without multiplier
Units = A
Units = 49
Units = 10 A H – L + L
65535
H–L +L
65535
Units = 32375
Example with multiplier
100 – 0 + 0
65535
Units = 323750 100 – 0 + 0
65535
Units = 494
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5–11
Chapter 5: F0-04AD-2 4-Ch. Analog Voltage Input
The Conversion Program
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5–12
The following example shows how you would write the program to perform the engineering
unit conversion from input data formats 0–4095. This example assumes the raw input data read
at V2000 is in BCD format.
Note: this example uses SP1, which is always on. You could also use an X, C, etc. permissive
contact.
SP1
LD
V2000
When SP1 is on, load channel 1 data to the accumulator (for
a range of 0–1000).
MUL
K1000
Multiply the accumulator by 1000.
DIV
K4095
Divide the accumulator by 4095 (the module resolution).
OUT
V2100
Store the result in V2100.
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
Chapter 5: F0-04AD-2 4-Ch. Analog Voltage Input
Analog and Digital Value Conversions
Sometimes it is useful to convert between the signal levels and the digital values. This is
especially helpful during machine startup or troubleshooting. The following table provides
formulas to make this conversion easier.
Range
If you know the digital value
If you know the analog signal level
0 to 5V
A = 5D
4095
D = 4095 (A)
5
0 to 10V
A = 10D
4095
D = 4095 (A)
10
For example, if you are using the 0–10V range and
you need a 6V signal level, use this formula to
determine the digital value (D) that will be stored in
the V-memory location that contains the data.
D = 4095 (A)
10
4095
(6V)
D=
10
D = (409.5) (6)
D = 2457
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5–13
Chapter 5: F0-04AD-2 4-Ch. Analog Voltage Input
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Module Resolution
5–14
Analog Data Bits
The first twelve bits represent the analog data in binary format.
Bit
0
1
2
3
4
5
Value
1
2
4
8
16
32
Bit
6
7
8
9
10
11
Value
64
128
256
512
1024
2048
MSB
LSB
1 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 0
= data bits
Resolution Details
Since the module has 12-bit resolution, the analog voltage signal is converted into 4096 counts
ranging from 0–4095 (212). For example, with a 0 to 10V range, a 0V signal would be a count
value of 0, and a 10V signal would produce a count value of 4095. This is equivalent to a binary
value of 0000 0000 0000 to 1111 1111 1111, or 000 to FFF hexadecimal.
Each count can also be expressed in terms of the signal level by using the following equation:
0 – 10V
Resolution = H – L
4095
10V
H = high limit of the signal range
L = low limit of the signal range
0V
0
4095
The following table shows the smallest detectable signal change that will result in one LSB
change in the data value for each increment of the signal change.
Voltage Range
0 to 5V
0 to 10V
Signal Span
(H – L)
Divide By
Smallest Detectable
Change
5 volts
10 volts
4095
4095
1.22 mV
2.44 mV
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
Chapter 5: F0-04AD-2 4-Ch. Analog Voltage Input
Analog Input Ladder Logic Filter
PID Loops / Filtering:
Please refer to the “PID Loop Operation” chapter in the DL06 or DL05 User Manual for
information on the built-in PV filter (DL05/06) and the ladder logic filter (DL06 only) shown
below. A filter must be used to smooth the analog input value when auto tuning PID loops to
prevent giving a false indication of loop characteristics.
Smoothing the Input Signal (DL06 only):
The filter logic can also be used in the same way to smooth the analog input signal to help
stabilize PID loop operation or to stabilize the analog input signal value for use with an operator
interface display, etc.
Warning: The built-in and logic filters are not intended to smooth or filter noise generated by improper
field device wiring or grounding. Small amounts of electrical noise can cause the input signal to bounce
considerably. Proper field device wiring and grounding must be done before attempting to use the filters
to smooth the analog input signal.
Using Binary Data Format
SP1
LDD
V2000
Loads the analog signal, which is in binary format
and has been loaded from V–memory location
V2000 – 2001, into the accumulator. Contact SP1
is always on.
BTOR
Converts the binary value in the accumulator
to a real number.
SUBR
V1400
Subtracts the real number stored in location
V1400 from the real number in the accumulator,
and stores the result in the accumulator. V1400
is the designated workspace in this example.
MULR
R0.2
Multiplies the real number in the accumulator by
0.2 (the filter factor), and stores the result in the
accumulator. This is the filtered value. The filter
range is 0.1 to 0.9. Smaller filter factors
increase filtering. (1.0 eliminates filtering.)
ADDR
V1400
Adds the real number stored in location V1400
to the real number filtered value in the
accumulator, and stores the result in the accumulator.
OUTD
V1400
Copies the value in the accumulator to
location V1400.
RTOB
Converts the real number in the
accumulator to a binary value, and
stores the result in the accumulator.
OUT
V2100
Loads the binary number filtered value from
the accumulator into location V2100 to use in
your application or PID loop.
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5–15
Chapter 5: F0-04AD-2 4-Ch. Analog Voltage Input
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5–16
NOTE: Be careful not to do a multiple number conversion on a value. For example, if you are using the pointer
method in BCD format to get the analog value, it must be converted to binary (BIN) as shown below. If you
are using the pointer method in Binary format, the conversion to binary (BIN) instruction is not needed.
Using BCD Data Format
SP1
LD
V2000
Loads the analog signal, which is in BCD format
and has been loaded from V–memory location
V2000, into the accumulator. Contact SP1
is always on.
BIN
Converts the BCD value in the accumulator
to binary.
BTOR
Converts the binary value in the accumulator
to a real number.
SUBR
V1400
Subtracts the real number stored in location
V1400 from the real number in the accumulator,
and stores the result in the accumulator. V1400
is the designated workspace in this example.
MULR
R0.2
Multiplies the real number in the accumulator by
0.2 (the filter factor), and stores the result in the
accumulator. This is the filtered value. The filter
range is 0.1 to 0.9. Smaller filter factors
increase filtering. (1.0 eliminates filtering.)
ADDR
V1400
Adds the real number stored in location V1400
to the real number filtered value in the
accumulator, and stores the result in the accumulator.
OUTD
V1400
Copies the value in the accumulator to
location V1400.
RTOB
Converts the real number in the
accumulator to a binary value, and
stores the result in the accumulator.
BCD
Converts the binary value in the accumulator
to a BCD number. Note: The BCD instruction
is not needed to PID loop PV (loop PV is a
binary number).
OUT
V1402
Loads the BCD number filtered value from
the accumulator into location V1402 to use in
your application or PID loop.
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
F0-08ADH-2 8-CH.
ANALOG VOLTAGE INPUT
CHAPTER
6
In This Chapter...
Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6–2
Setting the Module Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6–4
Connecting and Disconnecting the Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6–5
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6–6
Module Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6–7
Special V-memory Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6–8
Using the Pointer in Your Control Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6–10
Scale Conversions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6–12
Module Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6–15
Analog Input Ladder Logic Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6–16
Chapter 6: F0-08ADH-2 8-Ch. Analog Voltage Input
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Module Specifications
6–2
The F0-08ADH-2 Analog Input module offers the following
features:
• The DL05 and DL06 will read all eight channels in one scan.
• The removable terminal block simplifies module replacement.
• Analog inputs can be used as process variables for the four (4) PID
loops in the DL05 and the eight (8) PID loops in the DL06 CPUs.
• On-board active analog filtering and RISC-like microcontroller provide
digital signal processing to maintain precise analog measurements in
noisy environments.
NOTE: The DL05 CPU’s analog feature for this module requires DirectSOFT32 Version 3.0c (or later) and
firmware version 5.20 (or later). The DL06 requires DirectSOFT32 version V4.0, build 16 (or later) and
firmware version 2.30 (or later). See our website for more information: www.automationdirect.com.
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
Chapter 6: F0-08ADH-2 8-Ch. Analog Voltage Input
The following tables provide the specifications for the F0–08ADH–2 Analog Input Module.
Review these specifications to make sure the module meets your application requirements.
Input Specifications
Inputs per module
Input Range
Resolution
Input Type
Maximum Continuous Overload
Input Impedance
Filter Characteristics
PLC Data Format
Sample Duration Time
All Channel Update Rate
Conversion Method
Accuracy vs. Temperature
Maximum Inaccuracy
8
0-5VDC or 0-10VDC (Jumper selectable)
16-bit, 76µV/bit or 152µV/bit
Single Ended (one common)
±100V
>200k ohms
Low pass, -3dB @ 60Hz
1
Linearity Error (End to End)
Input Stability and Repeatability
Full Scale Calibration Error (including Offset)
Offset Calibration Error
Maximum Crosstalk at DC, 50 Hz and 60 Hz
External 24VDC Power Required
Base Power Required (5.0V)
1
16-bit, Unsigned Integer, 0–FFFF (binary) or 0–65535 (BCD)
10.2 ms
81.6 ms
Successive Approximation
±50PPM / °C Maximum
0.2% of range (including temperature drift)
±10 count maximum
Monotonic with no missing codes
±10 count (after 10 min. warm up)
±10 counts maximum
±10 count maximum
±10 count maximum
25mA
25mA
Each channel requires 2 words of V-memory irrespective of the format used.
General Specifications
Operating Temperature
Storage Temperature
Humidity
Environmental air
Vibration
Shock
Field to Logic side Isolation
Insulation Resistance
Noise Immunity
Agency Approvals
Module Location
Field Wiring
Weight
0 to 55°C (32 to 131°F)
-20 to 70°C (-4 to 158°F)
5 to 95% (non-condensing)
No corrosive gases permitted (EN61131-2 pollution degree 1)
MIL STD 810C 514.2
MIL STD 810C 516.2
1800VAC applied for 1 second (100% tested)
>10M ohms @ 500VDC
NEMA ICS3-304; Impulse 1000V @ 1mS pulse; RFI, (145MHz,
440Mhz 5W @ 15cm); Worst case error during noise disturbance
is .5% of full scale
UL508; UL60079-15 Zone 2
Any slot in a DL05 or DL06 System
Removable Terminal Block
49 g (1.7 oz.)
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
6–3
Chapter 6: F0-08ADH-2 8-Ch. Analog Voltage Input
6–4
The position of the jumper determines the input signal voltage levels. You can choose
between 0–5VDC or 0–10VDC. The 0–5V position is the default position. With the jumper
connecting the J5 posts, an input signal level of 0–5VDC is selected. Select 0–10VDC inputs
by removing the jumper from the J5 posts and placing it across the J4 posts.
Locating the jumpers
FACTS
F0-08ADH-2
ON=0–10V
J4
J5
ON=0–5V
Setting the appropriate jumper
0–5 Volt Operation
0–10 Volt Operation
J4
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
J4
J5
default jumper position
J5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Setting the Module Jumpers
Chapter 6: F0-08ADH-2 8-Ch. Analog Voltage Input
Connecting and Disconnecting the Field Wiring
WARNING: Before removing the analog module or the terminal block on the face of the module,
disconnect power to the PLC and all field devices. Failure to disconnect power can result in damage to
the PLC and/or field devices.
Wiring Guidelines
Your company may have guidelines for wiring and cable installation. If so, you should check
those before you begin the installation. Here are some general things to consider:
• Use the shortest wiring route whenever possible.
• Use shielded wiring and ground the shield at the transmitter source. Do not ground the shield at both
the module and the source.
• Do not run the signal wiring next to large motors, high current switches, or transformers. This may
cause noise problems.
• Route the wiring through an approved cable housing to minimize the risk of accidental damage.
Check local and national codes to choose the correct method for your application.
The F0–08ADH–2 does not supply power to field devices. You will need to power transmitters
separately from the PLC.
To remove the terminal block, disconnect power to the PLC and the field devices. Pull the
terminal block firmly until the connector separates from the module.
You can remove the analog module from the PLC by folding out the retaining tabs at the top
and bottom of the module. As the retaining tabs pivot upward and outward, the module’s
connector is lifted out of the PLC socket. Once the connector is free, you can lift the module
out of its slot.
Terminal Block Specifications
Number of Positions
Re-Order Number
Pitch
Wire Range
Screwdriver Size (Slotted)
Screw Size
Screw Torque
13
D0-ACC-4
.2 inch (5.08 mm)
28-16AWG Solid or Stranded Conductor;
Wire strip length 5/16" (7-8mm)
0.4T x 2.5W mm (part number DN-SS1)
M2.5 size
4.5 inch-pounds (.52 Nm)
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
6–5
Chapter 6: F0-08ADH-2 8-Ch. Analog Voltage Input
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Wiring Diagram
6–6
Use the following diagram to connect the field wiring. If necessary, the F0–08ADH–2 terminal
block can be removed to make removal of the module possible without disturbing field wiring.
Typical User Wiring
3-wire Voltage
Transmitter
3-wire Voltage
Transmitter
Internal Module Circuitry
CH1
+
+
CH1 ADC
Voltage Transmitter
Shield, Ch. 1
CH2 ADC
CH3
CH3 ADC
Voltage Transmitter
Shield, Ch. 3
CH4 ADC
COM
AC or DC
4-wire Voltage
Transmitter
3-wire Voltage
Transmitter
CH5 ADC
CH8
Voltage Transmitter
Shield, Ch. 5
ANALOG
0–10V
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH5
Voltage Transmitter
Shield, Ch. 5
+
IN
CH4
COM
CH6 ADC
CH5
CH7 ADC
CH6
CH8 ADC
COM
CH7
CH8
COM
COM
COM
+24VDC
SHIELD CONNECTED TO SIGNAL
SOURCE COMMON. SEE NOTE 1.
ISOLATED ANALOG
CIRCUIT POWER
0VDC
Note 1: Do not connect both ends of shield.
24VDC
Power Supply
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
+24V
0V
F0-08ADH-2
0V
Chapter 6: F0-08ADH-2 8-Ch. Analog Voltage Input
Module Operation
Channel Scanning Sequence
The DL05 and DL06 will read all eight channels of input data during each scan. Each CPU
supports special V-memory locations that are used to manage the data transfer. This is discussed
in more detail beginning in the section on “Special V–memory Locations”.
Scan
DL05/DL06 PLC
Read Inputs
Execute Application Program
Read the data
Store data
Scan N
Ch 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8
Scan N+1
Ch 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8
Scan N+2
Ch 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8
Scan N+3
Ch 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8
Scan N+4
Ch 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8
Write to Outputs
Analog Module Updates
Even though the channel updates to the CPUs are synchronous with the CPU scan, the module
asynchronously monitors the analog transmitter signals and converts each signal into a 16-bit
binary representation. This enables the module to continuously provide accurate measurements
without slowing down the discrete control logic in the RLL program.
The module takes approximately 10.2 milliseconds to sense 95% of the change in the analog
signal per channel. It takes approximately 81.6 ms to sample all channels if 8 channels are used
(10.2 ms X 8 channels = 81.6 ms).
NOTE: If you are comparing other manufacturers’ update times (step responses) with ours, please be aware
that some manufacturers refer to the time it takes to convert the analog signal to a digital value. Our analog
to digital conversion takes only a few microseconds. It is the settling time of the filter that is critical in
determining the full update time. Our update time specification includes the filter settling time.
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
6–7
Chapter 6: F0-08ADH-2 8-Ch. Analog Voltage Input
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Special V-memory Locations
6–8
Formatting the Analog Module Data
The DL05 and DL06 PLCs have special V-memory locations assigned to their respective option
slots. These V-memory locations allow you to:
• specify the data format (binary or BCD)
• specify the number of channels to scan (up to 8 channels for the F0–08ADH–2)
• specify the V-memory locations to store the input data
DL05 Data Formatting
The table below shows the special V-memory locations used by the DL05 PLC for the
F0–08ADH–2.
Analog Input Module
DL05 Special V-memory Locations
Data Type and Number of Channels
Storage Pointer
V7700
V7701
Setup Data Type and Number of Active Channels
V–memory location 7700 is used to set the data format to
either BCD or binary and to set the number of channels that
will be active.
For example, assume the F0–08ADH–2 is installed in the
option slot. Loading a constant of 800 into V7700 sets
8 channels active and causes the input data value to be read as
a BCD number.
With the F0–08ADH–2 in the option slot, loading a constant
of 8800 into V7700 sets 8 channels active, and the input data
value is read as a binary number.
V7700 BCD setup
MSB
LSB
1 1 1 1 1 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
5 4 3 2 1 0
V7700 binary setup
MSB
LSB
1 1 1 1 1 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
5 4 3 2 1 0
Storage Pointer Setup
V7701 is a system V–memory location used as a pointer to a user V-memory location where
the analog input data is stored. The V–memory location loaded into V7701 is an octal
number identifying the first user V-memory location for reading the analog input data. This
V–memory location is user selectable. For example, loading O2000 causes the pointer to
write Ch 1’s data value to V2000 – 2001, Ch 2’s data value to V2002 – 2003, Ch 3’s data
value to V2004 – 2005, Ch 4’s data value to V2006 – 2007, Ch 5’s data value to V2010 –
2011, Ch 6’s data value to V2012 – 2013, Ch 7’s data value to V2014 – 2015, and Ch 8’s
data value to V2016 – 2017.
You will find an example program that loads appropriate values to V7700 and V7701 on
page 6–10.
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
Chapter 6: F0-08ADH-2 8-Ch. Analog Voltage Input
DL06 Data Formatting
Special V–memory locations are assigned to the four option slots of the DL06 PLC. The table
below shows these V-memory locations which can be used to setup the F0–08ADH–2.
Analog Input Module
DL06 Special V-memory Locations
Slot No.
Data Type and Number of Channels
Storage Pointer
1
V700
V701
2
V710
V711
3
V720
V721
4
V730
V731
Setup Data Type and Number of Active Channels
V–memory locations 700, 710, 720, and 730 are used to set
the data format to either BCD or binary and to set the
number of channels that will be active.
For example, assume the F0–08ADH–2 is installed in slot 1.
Loading a constant of 800 into V700 sets 8 channels active
and causes the input data value to be read as a BCD number.
With the F0–08ADH–2 in slot 1, loading a constant of 8800
into V700 sets 8 channels active, and the input data value is
read as a binary number.
V700 BCD setup
MSB
LSB
1 1 1 1 1 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
5 4 3 2 1 0
V700 binary setup
MSB
LSB
1 1 1 1 1 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
5 4 3 2 1 0
Storage Pointer Setup
V–memory locations 701, 711, 721 and 731 are special locations used as storage pointers. A
V–memory address is loaded into this location as an octal number identifying the first user
V–memory location for the analog input data. This V–memory location is user selectable. For
example, loading O2000 causes the pointer to write Ch 1’s data value to V2000 – 2001, Ch 2’s
data value to V2002 – 2003, Ch 3’s data value to V2004 – 2005, Ch 4’s data value to V2006 –
2007, Ch 5’s data value to V2010 – 2011, Ch 6’s data value to V2012 – 2013, Ch 7’s data value
to V2014 – 2015, and Ch 8’s data value to V2016 – 2017.
You will find an example program that loads appropriate values to V700 and V701 beginning
on page 4–10.
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
6–9
Chapter 6: F0-08ADH-2 8-Ch. Analog Voltage Input
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Using the Pointer in Your Control Program
6–10
DL05 Pointer Method Using Conventional Ladder Logic
The proper use of the DL05 pointer requires that the V–memory address be written to the special memory
location on the first scan only. Use the SP0 bit as a permissive contact when using the code shown below.
The example program below shows how to setup these locations. This rung can be placed
anywhere in the ladder program or in the initial stage if you are using stage programming
instructions.
This is all that is required to read the analog input data into V-memory locations. Once the data
is in V-memory you can perform math on the data, compare the data against preset values, and
so forth. V2000 is used in the example but you can use any user V-memory location.
SP0
LD
K800
Loads a constant that specifies the number of channels to scan and the
data format. The upper byte selects the data format (i.e. 0=BCD, 8=Binary)
and the number of channels (up to 8 for the F0-08ADH-2).
- or LD
K8800
The binary format is used for displaying data on some operator
interface units. The DL05 PLCs support binary math functions.
OUT
V7700
Special V-memory location assigned to the option slot contains the
data format and the number of channels to scan.
LDA
O2000
This loads an octal value for the first V-memory location that will be used
to store the incoming data. For example, the O2000 entered here would
designate the following addresses:
Ch1 – V2000-2001, Ch2 – V2002-V2003, Ch3 – V2004-V2005, Ch 4 – V2006-2007
Ch 5 – V2010-2011, Ch 6 – V2012-V2013, Ch 7 – V2014-V2015, Ch 8 – V2016-V2017.
OUT
V7701
The octal address (O2000) is stored here. V7701 is assigned to the option slot
and acts as a pointer, which means the CPU will use the octal value in this location
to determine exaclty where to store the incoming data.
DL05 Pointer Method Using the IBox Instruction Available in DirectSOFT5
The following logic accomplishes the same thing as the previous ladder example, but it uses
the IBox instruction ANLGIN.
Analog Input Module Pointer Setup
ANLGIN
No permissive contact or input logic
is used with this instruction. This instruction
operates on the first scan only.
Base # (K0 - Local)
Slot #
Number of Input Channels
Input Data Format (0 - BCD 1 - BIN)
Input Data Address
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
IB-460
K0
K1
K8
K0
V2000
Chapter 6: F0-08ADH-2 8-Ch. Analog Voltage Input
DL06 Pointer Method Using Conventional Ladder Logic
The proper use of the DL06 pointer requires that the V–memory address be written to the special memory
location on the first scan only. Use the SP0 bit as a permissive contact when using the code shown below.
Use the special V–memory table below as a guide to setup the storage pointer in the following
example for the DL06. Slot 1 is the left most option slot.
Analog Input Module
DL06 Special V-memory Locations
Slot No.
No. of Channels
Input Pointer
1
V700
V701
2
V710
V711
3
V720
V721
4
V730
V731
The F0–08ADH–2 can be installed in any available DL06 option slot. The ladder diagram
below shows how to set up these locations with the module installed in slot 1 of the DL06. Use
the above table to determine the pointer values if locating the module in any of the other slot
locations. Place this rung anywhere in the ladder program or in the initial stage if you are using
stage programming instructions.
This logic is all that is required to read the analog input data into V-memory locations. Once
the data is in V-memory you can perform mathematical calculations with the data, compare
the data against preset values, and so forth. In the example, V2000 is used, but you can use
any user V-memory location.
SP0
LD
K800
Loads a constant that specifies the number of channels to scan and the
data format. The upper byte selects the data format (i.e. 0=BCD, 8=Binary)
and the number of channels (up to 8 for the F0-08ADH-2).
- or LD
K8800
The binary format is used for displaying data on some operator
interface units and the DL06 display. The DL06 PLCs support
binary math functions.
OUT
V700
Special V-memory location assigned to the first option slot contains the
data format and the number of channels to scan.
LDA
O2000
This loads an octal value for the first V-memory location that will be used
to store the incoming data. For example, the O2000 entered here would
designate the following addresses:
Ch1 – V2000-2001, Ch2 – V2002-V2003, Ch3 – V2004-V2005, Ch 4 – V2006-2007
Ch 5 – V2010-2011, Ch 6 – V2012-V2013, Ch 7 – V2014-V2015, Ch 8 – V2016-V2017.
OUT
V701
The octal address (O2000) is stored here. V701 is assigned to the first option slot
and acts as a pointer, which means the CPU will use the octal value in this location
to determine exaclty where to store the incoming data.
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
6–11
Chapter 6: F0-08ADH-2 8-Ch. Analog Voltage Input
DL06 Pointer Method Using the IBox Instruction Available in DirectSOFT5
The following logic accomplishes the same thing as the previous ladder example, but it uses
1
the IBox instruction ANLGIN.
2
3
4
5
6 Scale Conversions
Scaling the Input Data
7
Many applications call for measurements in
engineering units, which can be more meaningful
8
than raw data. Convert to engineering units using
the formula shown to the right.
9
You may have to make adjustments to the formula
depending on the scale you choose for the
engineering units.
10
For example, if you wanted to measure pressure
(PSI) from 0.0 to 99.9 then you would have to multiply the analog value by 10 in order to
11
imply a decimal place when you view the value with the programming software or a handheld
programmer. Notice how the calculations differ when you use the multiplier.
12
Analog Value of 32375, slightly less than half scale, should yield 49.4 PSI.
13
14
A
B
C
D
Analog Input Module Pointer Setup
IB-460
ANLGIN
No permissive contact or input logic
is used with this instruction. This instruction
operates on the first scan only.
Base # (K0 - Local)
Slot #
Number of Input Channels
Input Data Format (0 - BCD 1 - BIN)
Input Data Address
K0
K1
K8
K0
V2000
Units = A H – L + L
65535
H = High limit of the engineering
unit range
L = Low limit of the engineering
unit range
A = Analog value (0 – 65535)
Example without multiplier
Example with multiplier
Units = A H – L + L
65535
Units = 10 A H – L + L
65535
Units = 32375
Units = 49
6–12
100 – 0 + 0
65535
Units = 323750 100 – 0 + 0
65535
Units = 494
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
Chapter 6: F0-08ADH-2 8-Ch. Analog Voltage Input
The Conversion Program in Standard Ladder Logic
The following example shows how you would write the program to perform the engineering
unit conversion. This example assumes you have BCD data loaded into the appropriate Vmemory locations using instructions that apply for the model of CPU you are using.
_First Scan
SP0
LDD
K100
Loads the constant 100 to the accumulator.
OUTD
V3000
Copies the constant 100 from the accumulator
to the memory location V3000 and V3001.
LDD
K65535
Loads the constant 65535 to the accumulator.
OUTD
V3002
Copies the content of V2000 from the accumulator
to the memory location V3002 and V3003.
LDD
V2000
Loads data from V2000 and V2001.
MULD
V3000
Multiplies the accumulator value by 100
(previously loaded into V3000 and V3001).
DIVD
V3002
Divides the accumulator value by 65535
(previously loaded into V3002 and V3003).
OUTD
V2100
Copies the content of the accumulator to the memory
location V2100 and V2101.
_On
SP1
V2000/2001
V2100/2101
32375
49
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
6–13
Chapter 6: F0-08ADH-2 8-Ch. Analog Voltage Input
Analog and Digital Value Conversions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
6–14
Sometimes it is useful to convert between the signal levels and the digital values. This is
especially helpful during machine start-up or troubleshooting. The following table provides
formulas to make this conversion easier.
Range
If you know the digital value
If you know the analog signal level
0 to 5V
A=
5
. D
65535
D=
65535 .
A
5
0 to 10V
A=
10
. D
65535
D=
65535 .
A
10
For example, if you have measured the signal
as 6V, you can use the formula to determine
the digital value that will be stored in the
V–memory location that contains
the data.
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
D = 65535
10
D = 65535
10
D = 39321
A
6V
Chapter 6: F0-08ADH-2 8-Ch. Analog Voltage Input
Module Resolution
Analog Data Bits
Two 16-bit words are reserved for the analog data whether you are using BCD or binary data
formatting. The 16 bits in the low word represent the analog data in binary format.
BCD Example
V2001
MSB
LSB
MSB
V2000
LSB
3 2 1 0 3 2 1 0 3 2 1 0 3 2 1 0
3 2 1 0
Binary Example
V2001
MSB
LSB
1 1 1 1 1 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
5 4 3 2 1 0
MSB
V2000
LSB
1 1 1 1 1 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
5 4 3 2 1 0
= data bits
Resolution Details
Since the module has 16-bit resolution, the analog signal is converted into 65,536 counts
ranging from 0 - 65,535 (216). For example, with a 10V range, a 0V signal would be 0 and
a 10V signal would be 65535. This is equivalent to a binary value of 0000 0000 0000 0000 to
1111 1111 1111 1111, or 000 to FFFF hexadecimal.
Each count can also be expressed in terms of the signal level by using the following equation:
0 – 10V
10V
Resolution =
H–L
65535
H = high limit of the signal range
L = low limit of the signal range
0V
0
65535
The following table shows the smallest detectable signal change that will result in one LSB
change in the data value for each increment of the signal change.
mA Range
0 to 5V
0 to 10V
Signal Span
(H – L)
Divide By
Smallest Detectable
Change
5 volts
10 volts
65535
65535
.07630mV
.15259mV
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
6–15
Chapter 6: F0-08ADH-2 8-Ch. Analog Voltage Input
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Analog Input Ladder Logic Filter
6–16
PID Loops / Filtering:
Please refer to the “PID Loop Operation” chapter in the DL06 or DL05 User Manual for
information on the built-in PV filter (DL05/06) and the ladder logic filter (DL06 only) shown
below. A filter must be used to smooth the analog input value when auto tuning PID loops to
prevent giving a false indication of loop characteristics.
Smoothing the Input Signal (DL06 only):
The filter logic can also be used in the same way to smooth the analog input signal to help
stabilize PID loop operation or to stabilize the analog input signal value for use with an operator
interface display, etc.
Warning: The built-in and logic filters are not intended to smooth or filter noise generated by improper
field device wiring or grounding. Small amounts of electrical noise can cause the input signal to bounce
considerably. Proper field device wiring and grounding must be done before attempting to use the filters
to smooth the analog input signal.
Binary Data Format Filter Using Ladder Logic
SP1
LDD
V2000
Loads the analog signal, which is in binary format
and has been loaded from V–memory location
V2000 – 2001, into the accumulator. Contact SP1
is always on.
BTOR
Converts the binary value in the accumulator
to a real number.
SUBR
V1400
Subtracts the real number stored in location
V1400 from the real number in the accumulator,
and stores the result in the accumulator. V1400
is the designated workspace in this example.
MULR
R0.2
Multiplies the real number in the accumulator by
0.2 (the filter factor), and stores the result in the
accumulator. This is the filtered value. The filter
range is 0.1 to 0.9. Smaller filter factors
increase filtering. (1.0 eliminates filtering.)
ADDR
V1400
Adds the real number stored in location V1400
to the real number filtered value in the
accumulator, and stores the result in the accumulator.
OUTD
V1400
Copies the value in the accumulator to
location V1400.
RTOB
Converts the real number in the
accumulator to a binary value, and
stores the result in the accumulator.
OUT
V2100
Loads the binary number filtered value from
the accumulator into location V2100 to use in
your application or PID loop.
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
Chapter 6: F0-08ADH-2 8-Ch. Analog Voltage Input
NOTE: Be careful not to do a multiple number conversion on a value. For example, if you are using the pointer
method in BCD format to get the analog value, it must be converted to binary (BIN) as shown below. If you
are using the pointer method in Binary format, the conversion to binary (BIN) instruction is not needed.
Using BCD Data Format
SP1
LDD
V2000
Loads the analog signal, which is in BCD format
and has been loaded from V–memory location
V2000 – 2001, into the accumulator. Contact SP1
is always on.
BIN
Converts the BCD value in the accumulator
to binary.
BTOR
Converts the binary value in the accumulator
to a real number.
SUBR
V1400
Subtracts the real number stored in location
V1400 from the real number in the accumulator,
and stores the result in the accumulator. V1400
is the designated workspace in this example.
MULR
R0.2
Multiplies the real number in the accumulator by
0.2 (the filter factor), and stores the result in the
accumulator. This is the filtered value. The filter
range is 0.1 to 0.9. Smaller filter factors
increase filtering. (1.0 eliminates filtering.)
ADDR
V1400
Adds the real number stored in location V1400
to the real number filtered value in the
accumulator, and stores the result in the accumulator.
OUTD
V1400
Copies the value in the accumulator to
location V1400.
RTOB
Converts the real number in the
accumulator to a binary value, and
stores the result in the accumulator.
BCD
Converts the binary value in the accumulator
to a BCD number. Note: The BCD instruction
is not needed to PID loop PV (loop PV is a
binary number).
OUTD
V2100
Loads the BCD number filtered value from
the accumulator into location V2100 to use in
your application or PID loop.
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
6–17
F0-04DAH-1 4-CH.
ANALOG CURRENT
OUTPUT
CHAPTER
47
In This Chapter...
Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7–2
Connecting and Disconnecting the Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7–4
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7–5
Module Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7–6
Special V-memory Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7–7
Using the Pointer in Your Control Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7–9
Output Scale Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7–11
Module Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7–14
Chapter 7: F0-04DAH-1 4-Ch. Analog Current Output
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Module Specifications
7–2
The F0-04DAH-1 analog output module offers the following
features:
• Full 16-bit resolution.
• The DL05 and DL06 will update all four channels in one scan.
• The removable terminal block simplifies module replacement.
NOTE: The DL05 CPU’s analog feature for this module requires DirectSOFT32 Version 3.0c (or later) and
firmware version 5.20 (or later). The DL06 requires DirectSOFT32 version V4.0, build 16 (or later) and
firmware version 2.30 (or later). See our website for more information: www.automationdirect.com.
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
Chapter 7: F0-04DAH-1 4-Ch. Analog Current Output
The following tables provide the specifications for the F0–04DAH –1 Analog Output Module.
Review these specifications to make sure the module meets your application requirements.
Output Specifications
Outputs per module
Output Range
Resolution
Output Type
PLC Data Format
Output value in program mode
Load Impedance
Maximum Inductive Load
Allowed load type
Maximum Inaccuracy
Maximum Full Scale Calibration Error (not
including offset error)
Maximum Offset Calibration Error
Accuracy vs. Temperature
Maximum Crosstalk
Linearity Error (End to End)
Output Stability and Repeatability
Output Ripple
Output Settling Time
All Channel Update Rate
Maximum Continuous Overload
Type of Output Protection
Output signal at power-up and power-down
External 24VDC Power Required
Base Power Required (5.0V)
1
4
4-20mA
16-bit, .244μA/bit
Current sourcing at 20mA max.
1
16-bit, Unsigned Integer, 0–FFFF (binary) or 0–65535 (BCD)
4mA (excluding PID, independent mode)
250-750 Ohms
1 mH
Grounded
0.2% of range
±.025% of range maximum
±.025% of range maximum
±50 ppm/ °C maximum full scale calibration change
±10 counts
±16 count maximum (±0.025% of full scale)
Monotonic with no missing codes
±10 LSB after 10 min. warm-up typical
.05% of Full Scale
.5 ms maximum, 5 μs minimum (full scale change)
100μs
Outputs open circuit protected
Electronically current limited to 20mA or less
4mA
150mA
25mA
Each channel requires 2 words of V-memory irrespective of the format used.
General Specifications
Operating Temperature
Storage Temperature
Humidity
Environmental air
Vibration
Shock
Field to Logic side Isolation
Insulation Resistance
Noise Immunity
Agency Approvals
Module Location
Field Wiring
Weight
0 to 55°C (32 to 131°F)
-20 to 70°C (-4 to 158°F)
5 to 95% (non-condensing)
No corrosive gases permitted
(EN61131-2 pollution degree 1)
MIL STD 810C 514.2
MIL STD 810C 516.2
1800VAC applied for 1 second (100% tested)
>10M ohms @ 500VDC
NEMA ICS3-304; Impulse 1000V @ 1mS pulse; RFI,
(145MHz, 440Mhz 5W @ 15cm); Worst case error during
noise disturbance is .5% of full scale
UL508; UL60079-15 Zone 2
Any slot in a DL05 or DL06 System
Removable Terminal Block
49 g (1.7 oz.)
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
7–3
Chapter 7: F0-04DAH-1 4-Ch. Analog Current Output
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Connecting and Disconnecting the Field Wiring
7–4
WARNING: Before removing the analog module or the terminal block on the face of the module, disconnect power to the PLC and all field devices. Failure to disconnect power can result in damage to the PLC
and/or field devices.
Wiring Guidelines
Your company may have guidelines for wiring and cable installation. If so, you should check
those before you begin the installation. Here are some general things to consider:
• Use the shortest wiring route whenever possible.
• Use shielded wiring and ground the shield at the transmitter source. Do not ground the shield at both
the module and the source.
• Do not run the signal wiring next to large motors, high current switches, or transformers. This may
cause noise problems.
• Route the wiring through an approved cable housing to minimize the risk of accidental damage.
Check local and national codes to choose the correct method for your application.
The F0–04DAH–1 does not supply power to field devices. You will need to power transmitters separately from the PLC.
To remove the terminal block, disconnect power to the PLC and the field devices. Pull the
terminal block firmly until the connector separates from the module.
You can remove the analog module from the PLC by folding out the retaining tabs at the top
and bottom of the module. As the retaining tabs pivot upward and outward, the module’s
connector is lifted out of the PLC socket. Once the connector is free, you can lift the module
out of its slot.
Terminal Block Specifications
Number of Positions
Re-Order Number
Pitch
Wire Range
Screwdriver Size (Slotted)
Screw Size
Screw Torque
13
D0-ACC-4
.2 inch (5.08 mm)
28-16AWG Solid or Stranded Conductor;
Wire strip length 5/16" (7-8mm)
0.4T x 2.5W mm (part number DN-SS1)
M2.5 size
4.5 inch-pounds (.52 Nm)
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
Chapter 7: F0-04DAH-1 4-Ch. Analog Current Output
Wiring Diagram
Use the following diagram to connect the field wiring. If necessary, the F0–04DAH–1 terminal
block can be removed to make removal of the module possible without disturbing field wiring.
Typical User Wiring
4-20mA Output
Ch. 1
Internal Module Circuitry
CH1
CH2
4-20mA Output
Ch. 2
CH3
CH4
4-20mA Output
Ch. 3
COM
4–20mA
current sourcing
4–20mA
current sourcing
4–20mA
current sourcing
4–20mA
current sourcing
CH1 DAC
CH2 DAC
CH3 DAC
CH4 DAC
OUT
ANALOG
4–20mA
CH1
CH2
CH3
4-20mA Output
Ch. 4
CH4
COM
COM
COM
SHIELD CONNECTED TO SIGNAL
SOURCE COMMON (1 OF 4 SHOWN)
COM
COM
COM
COM
+24VDC
ISOLATED ANALOG
CIRCUIT POWER
0VDC
24VDC
Power Supply
+24V
0V
F0-04DAH-1
ISOLATED ANALOG
CIRCUIT COMMON
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
7–5
Chapter 7: F0-04DAH-1 4-Ch. Analog Current Output
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Module Operation
7–6
Channel Scanning Sequence
The DL05 and DL06 will write all four channels of output data during each scan. Each CPU
supports special V-memory locations that are used to manage the data transfer. This is
discussed in more detail beginning in the section on “Special V–memory Locations.”
Scan
DL05/DL06 PLC
Read Inputs
Execute Application Program
Read the data
Store data
Scan N
Ch 1, 2, 3, 4
Scan N+1
Ch 1, 2, 3, 4
Scan N+2
Ch 1, 2, 3, 4
Scan N+3
Ch 1, 2, 3, 4
Scan N+4
Ch 1, 2, 3, 4
Write to Outputs
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
Chapter 7: F0-04DAH-1 4-Ch. Analog Current Output
Special V-memory Locations
Formatting the Analog Module Data
The DL05 and DL06 PLCs have special V-memory locations assigned to their respective
option slots. These V-memory locations allow you to:
• specify the data format (binary or BCD)
• specify the number of channels to update (up to 4 channels for the F0–04DAH–1)
• specify the V-memory locations where the user program will store the output data pending
distribution to the output module
DL05 Data Formatting
The table below shows the special V-memory locations used by the DL05 PLC for the
F0–04DAH–1.
Analog Output Module
DL05 Special V-memory Locations
Data Type and Number of Channels
Storage Pointer
V7700
V7702
Data Type and Number of Active Channels Setup
System memory location V7700 is used to set the data
format either to BCD or binary and to set the number of
channels that will be active.
For example, loading a constant of 0004 (BCD) into
V7700 sets four channels active and causes the output data
value to be read from pointer-designated V–memory as a
BCD number.
Alternatively, loading a constant of 0084 (BCD) into
V7700 sets four channels active and causes the output data
value to be read from pointer-designated V–memory as a
binary number.
V7700 BCD setup
MSB
LSB
1 1 1 1 1 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
5 4 3 2 1 0
V7700 binary setup
MSB
LSB
1 1 1 1 1 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
5 4 3 2 1 0
Storage Pointer Setup
System memory location V7702 is used as a pointer. It points to a user memory location
where the analog output data is stored by the user program, pending distribution to the
output module. An octal number is loaded to the pointer memory to identify the beginning
of a block of user memory where output values are stored.
For example, loading O2100 into V7702 causes the CPU to look for Ch 1’s output data
value in V2100 – 2101, Ch 2’s data value in V2102 – 2103, Ch 3’s data value in V2104 –
2105, and Ch 4’s data value in V2106 – 2107.
You will find an example program that loads appropriate values to V7700 and V7702 on
page 7–9.
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
7–7
Chapter 7: F0-04DAH-1 4-Ch. Analog Current Output
DL06 Data Formatting
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
7–8
Special V–memory locations are assigned to the four option slots of the DL06 PLC. The table
below shows these V-memory locations which can be used to setup the F0–04DAH–1.
Analog Output Module
DL06 Special V-memory Locations
Slot No.
Data Type and Number of Channels
Output Pointer
1
V700
V702
2
V710
V712
3
V720
V722
4
V730
V732
Data Type and Number of Active Channels Setup
System memory locations V700, 710, 720, and 730 are used
to set the data format either to BCD or binary and to set the
number of channels that will be active.
For example, loading a constant of 0004 (BCD) into V700
sets four channels active and causes the output data value to
be read from pointer-designated V–memory as a BCD
number.
Alternatively, loading a constant of 0084 (BCD) into V700
sets four channels active and causes the output data value to
be read from pointer-designated V–memory as a binary
number.
V700 BCD setup
MSB
LSB
1 1 1 1 1 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
5 4 3 2 1 0
V700 binary setup
MSB
LSB
1 1 1 1 1 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
5 4 3 2 1 0
Storage Pointer Setup
System memory locations V702, 712, 722, and 732 are used as pointers. They point to user
memory locations where the analog output data is stored by the user program, pending
distribution to the output module. An octal number is loaded to the pointer memory to
identify the beginning of a block of user memory where output values are stored.
For example, loading O2100 into V702 causes the CPU to look for Ch 1’s output data value
in V2100 – 2101, Ch 2’s data value in V2102 – 2103, Ch 3’s data value in V2104 – 2105,
and Ch 4’s data value in V2106 – 2107.
You will find an example program that loads appropriate values to V7700 and V7702 on
page 7–10.
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
Chapter 7: F0-04DAH-1 4-Ch. Analog Current Output
Using the Pointer in Your Control Program
DL05 Pointer Method Using Conventional Ladder Logic
The proper use of the DL05 pointer requires that the V–memory address be written to the special memory
location on the first scan only. Use the SP0 bit as a permissive contact when using the code shown below.
The example program below shows how to setup the special V–memory locations. This rung
can be placed anywhere in the ladder program or in the initial stage if you are using stage
programming instructions.
This is all that is required to read the analog output data from V-memory locations. In the
example, V2100 is used, but you can use any user V-memory location.
SP0
LD
K4
Loads a constant that specifies the number of channels to scan and the
data format. The lower byte selects the data format (i.e. 0=BCD, 8=Binary)
and the number of channels (up to 4 for the F0-04DAH-1).
- or LD
K84
The binary format is used for displaying data on some operator
interface units. The DL05 PLCs support binary math functions.
OUT
V7700
Special V-memory location assigned to the option slot contains the
data format and the number of channels to scan.
LDA
O2100
This loads an octal value for the first V-memory location that will hold the data
to send to the output module. For example, the O2100 entered here would
designate the following addresses:
Ch1 – V2100-2101, Ch2 – V2102-V2103, Ch3 – V2104-V2105, Ch 4 – V2106-2107
OUT
V7702
The octal address (O2100) is stored here. V7702 is assigned to the option slot
and acts as a pointer, which means the CPU will use the octal value in this location
to determine exaclty where to get the data to send to the output module.
DL05 Pointer Method Using the IBox Instruction Available in DirectSOFT5
The following logic accomplishes the same thing as the previous ladder example, but it uses
the IBox instruction ANLGOUT.
Analog Output Module Pointer Setup
ANLGOUT
No permissive contact or input logic
is used with this instruction.
Base # (K0 - Local)
Slot #
Number of Output Channels
Output Data Format (0 - BCD 1 - BIN)
Output Data Address
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
IB-461
K0
K1
K4
K0
V2100
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
7–9
Chapter 7: F0-04DAH-1 4-Ch. Analog Current Output
DL06 Pointer Method Using Conventional Ladder Logic
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
7–10
The proper use of the DL06 pointer requires that the V–memory address be written to the special memory
location on the first scan only. Use the SP0 bit as a permissive contact when using the code shown below.
Use the special V–memory table below as a guide to setup the storage pointer in the
following example for the DL06. Slot 1 is the left most option slot.
Analog Output Module
DL06 Special V-memory Locations
Slot No.
No. of Channels
Output Pointer
1
V700
V702
2
V710
V712
3
V720
V722
4
V730
V732
The F0–04DAH–1 can be installed in any available DL06 option slot. The ladder diagram
below shows how to setup these locations with the module installed in slot 1 of the DL06. Use
the above table to determine the pointer values if locating the module in any of the other slot
locations. Place this rung anywhere in the ladder program or in the initial stage if you are using
stage programming instructions.
This logic is all that is required to write the analog output data from V-memory locations. In
the example, V2100 is used, but you can use any user V-memory location.
SP0
LD
K4
Loads a constant that specifies the number of channels to scan and the
data format. The lower byte selects the data format (i.e. 0=BCD, 8=Binary)
and the number of channels (up to 4 for the F0-04DAH-1).
- or LD
K84
The binary format is used for displaying data on some operator
interface units and the DL06 display. The DL06 PLCs support
binary math functions.
OUT
V700
Special V-memory location assigned to the first option slot contains the
data format and the number of channels to scan.
LDA
O2100
This loads an octal value for the first V-memory location that will hold the data
to send to the output module. For example, the O2100 entered here would
designate the following addresses:
Ch1 – V2100-2101, Ch2 – V2102-V2103, Ch3 – V2104-V2105, Ch 4 – V2106-2107.
OUT
V702
The octal address (O2100) is stored here. V702 is assigned to the first option slot
and acts as a pointer, which means the CPU will use the octal value in this location
to determine exaclty where to get the data to send to the output module.
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
Chapter 7: F0-04DAH-1 4-Ch. Analog Current Output
DL06 Pointer Method Using the IBox Instruction Available in DirectSOFT5
The following logic accomplishes the same thing as the previous ladder example, but it uses
the IBox instruction ANLGOUT.
Analog Output Module Pointer Setup
IB-461
ANLGOUT
No permissive contact or input logic
is used with this instruction.
Base # (K0 - Local)
Slot #
Number of Output Channels
Output Data Format (0 - BCD 1 - BIN)
Output Data Address
K0
K1
K4
K0
V2100
Output Scale Conversion
Calculating the Digital Output Value
Your program has to calculate the digital value to
A= U – L
65535
send to the analog output module. Most applicaH–L
tions use measurements in engineering units, so it is
U = Engineering units to output
usually necessary to convert from engineering units
H = High limit of the engineering
to a suitable output value. The conversion to an
unit range
output value can be accomplished by using the
conversion formula shown.
L = Low limit of the engineering
unit range
You will need to substitute the engineering units for
A = Analog value (0 – 65535)
your scale into the formula to the right.
For example, if you want to output pressure (PSI)
between 0.0 and 100.0, you may multiply the pressure value by 10 to store in a V-memory
location and eliminate the decimal point. Notice how the calculations differ when you use the
multiplier.
The following example demonstrates how to output 49.4 PSI.
Example without multiplier
Example with multiplier
A=
U–L
H–L
65535
A=
U–L
H–L
A=
49 – 0
100 – 0
65535
A=
494 – 0
1000 – 0
A = 32112
65535
65535
A = 32374
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
7–11
Chapter 7: F0-04DAH-1 4-Ch. Analog Current Output
The Conversion Program in Standard Ladder Logic
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
7–12
The following example shows how you would write the program to perform the engineering
unit conversion. This example assumes you have BCD data loaded into the appropriate
V-memory locations using instructions that apply for the model of CPU you are using.
_First Scan
SP0
LDD
K100
Loads the constant 100 to the accumulator.
OUTD
V3000
Copies the constant 100 from the accumulator
to the memory location V3000 and V3001.
LDD
K65535
Loads the constant 65535 to the accumulator.
OUTD
V3002
Copies the content of V2000 from the accumulator
to the memory location V3002 and V3003.
LDD
V2200
Loads data from V2200 and V2201.
MULD
V3002
Multiplies the accumulator value by 65535
(previously loaded into V3002 and V3003).
DIVD
V3000
Divides the accumulator value by 100
(previously loaded into V3000 and V3001).
OUTD
V2100
Copies the content of the accumulator to the memory
location V2100 and V2101.
_On
SP1
V2200/2201
V2100/2101
49
32112
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
Chapter 7: F0-04DAH-1 4-Ch. Analog Current Output
Analog and Digital Value Conversions
Sometimes it is useful to convert between the signal levels and the digital values. This is
especially helpful during machine startup or troubleshooting. The following table provides
formulas to make this conversion easier.
The formulas in the table show the relationship between A, the analog value, and D, the
digital value.
Range
4 to 20mA
If you know the digital value
A=
(
16
. D
65535
)
+ 4mA
For example, if you need a 10mA signal to
achieve the desired result, you can use the
formula to determine the digital value that
should be used.
If you know the analog signal level
D=
65535 . (A – 4mA)
16
D = 65535 . (A – 4mA)
16
D = 65535 . (10mA – 4mA)
16
D = 24576
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
7–13
Chapter 7: F0-04DAH-1 4-Ch. Analog Current Output
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Module Resolution
7–14
Analog Data Bits
Two 16-bit words are reserved for the analog data whether you are using BCD or binary data
formatting. The 16 bits in the low word represent the analog data in binary format.
BCD Example
V2001
MSB
LSB
V2000
MSB
LSB
3 2 1 0 3 2 1 0 3 2 1 0 3 2 1 0
3 2 1 0
Binary Example
V2001
MSB
LSB
1 1 1 1 1 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
5 4 3 2 1 0
V2000
MSB
LSB
1 1 1 1 1 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
5 4 3 2 1 0
= data bits
Resolution Details
Since the module has 16-bit resolution, the analog signal is converted into 65,536 counts
ranging from 0 - 65,535 (216). A 4mA signal would be 0 and a 20mA signal would be 65535.
This is equivalent to a binary value of 0000 0000 0000 0000 to 1111 1111 1111 1111, or 000
to FFFF hexadecimal.
Each count can also be expressed in terms of the signal level by using the following equation:
4 – 20mA
20mA
Resolution =
H–L
65535
H = high limit of the signal range
4mA
L = low limit of the signal range
0
65535
The following table shows the smallest detectable signal change that will result in one LSB
change in the data value for each increment of the signal change.
mA Range
4 to 20mA
Signal Span
(H – L)
Divide By
Smallest Detectable
Change
16mA
65535
.244mA
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
F0-08DAH-1 8-CH.
ANALOG CURRENT
OUTPUT
CHAPTER
48
In This Chapter...
Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8–2
Connecting and Disconnecting the Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8–4
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8–5
Module Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8–6
Special V-memory Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8–7
Using the Pointer in Your Control Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8–9
Output Scale Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8–11
Module Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8–14
Chapter 8: F0-08DAH-1 8-Ch. Analog Current Output
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Module Specifications
8–2
The F0-08DAH-1 analog output module offers the following
features:
• The DL05 and DL06 will update all eight channels in one scan.
• The removable terminal block simplifies module replacement.
• Full 16-bit resolution.
NOTE: The DL05 CPU’s analog feature for this module requires DirectSOFT32 Version 3.0c (or later) and
firmware version 5.20 (or later). The DL06 requires DirectSOFT32 version V4.0, build 16 (or later) and
firmware version 2.30 (or later). See our website for more information: www.automationdirect.com.
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
Chapter 8: F0-08DAH-1 8-Ch. Analog Current Output
The following tables provide the specifications for the F0–08DAH –1 Analog Output Module.
Review these specifications to make sure the module meets your application requirements.
Output Specifications
Outputs per module
Output Range
Resolution
Output Type
PLC Data Format
Output value in program mode
Load Impedance
Maximum Inductive Load
Allowed load type
Maximum Inaccuracy
Maximum Full Scale Calibration Error (not
including offset error)
Maximum Offset Calibration Error
Accuracy vs. Temperature
Maximum Crosstalk
Linearity Error (End to End)
Output Stability and Repeatability
Output Ripple
Output Settling Time
All Channel Update Rate
Maximum Continuous Overload
Type of Output Protection
Output signal at power-up and power-down
External 24VDC Power Required
Base Power Required (5.0V)
1
8
4-20mA
16-bit, .244µA/bit
Current sourcing at 20mA max.
1
16-bit, Unsigned Integer, 0–FFFF (binary) or 0–65535 (BCD)
4mA (excluding PID, independent mode)
250-750 Ohms
1 mH
Grounded
0.2% of range
±.025% of range maximum
±.025% of range maximum
±50 ppm/ °C maximum full scale calibration change
±10 counts
±16 count maximum (±0.025% of full scale)
Monotonic with no missing codes
±10 counts after 10 min. warm-up typical
.05% of Full Scale
.5 ms maximum, 5 µs minimum (full scale change)
100us
Outputs open circuit protected
Electronically current limited to 20mA or less
4mA
220mA
25mA
Each channel requires 2 words of V-memory irrespective of the format used.
General Specifications
Operating Temperature
Storage Temperature
Humidity
Environmental air
Vibration
Shock
Field to Logic side Isolation
Insulation Resistance
Noise Immunity
Agency Approvals
Module Location
Field Wiring
Weight
0 to 55°C (32 to 131°F)
-20 to 70°C (-4 to 158°F)
5 to 95% (non-condensing)
No corrosive gases permitted (EN61131-2 pollution degree 1)
MIL STD 810C 514.2
MIL STD 810C 516.2
1800VAC applied for 1 second (100% tested)
>10M ohms @ 500VDC
NEMA ICS3-304; Impulse 1000V @ 1mS pulse; RFI, (145MHz,
440Mhz 5W @ 15cm); Worst case error during noise disturbance
is .5% of full scale
UL508; UL60079-15 Zone 2
Any slot in a DL05 or DL06 System
Removable Terminal Block
49 g (1.7 oz.)
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
8–3
Chapter 8: F0-08DAH-1 8-Ch. Analog Current Output
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Connecting and Disconnecting the Field Wiring
8–4
WARNING: Before removing the analog module or the terminal block on the face of the module,
disconnect power to the PLC and all field devices. Failure to disconnect power can result in damage to
the PLC and/or field devices.
Wiring Guidelines
Your company may have guidelines for wiring and cable installation. If so, you should check
those before you begin the installation. Here are some general things to consider:
• Use the shortest wiring route whenever possible.
• Use shielded wiring and ground the shield at the transmitter source. Do not ground the shield at both
the module and the source.
• Do not run the signal wiring next to large motors, high current switches, or transformers. This may
cause noise problems.
• Route the wiring through an approved cable housing to minimize the risk of accidental damage.
Check local and national codes to choose the correct method for your application.
The F0–08DAH–1 does not supply power to field devices. You will need to power transmitters
separately from the PLC.
To remove the terminal block, disconnect power to the PLC and the field devices. Pull the
terminal block firmly until the connector separates from the module.
You can remove the analog module from the PLC by folding out the retaining tabs at the top
and bottom of the module. As the retaining tabs pivot upward and outward, the module’s
connector is lifted out of the PLC socket. Once the connector is free, you can lift the module
out of its slot.
Terminal Block Specifications
Number of Positions
Re-Order Number
Pitch
Wire Range
Screwdriver Size (Slotted)
Screw Size
Screw Torque
13
D0-ACC-4
.2 inch (5.08 mm)
28-16AWG Solid or Stranded Conductor;
Wire strip length 5/16" (7-8mm)
0.4T x 2.5W mm (part number DN-SS1)
M2.5 size
4.5 inch-pounds (.52 Nm)
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
Chapter 8: F0-08DAH-1 8-Ch. Analog Current Output
Wiring Diagram
Use the following diagram to connect the field wiring. If necessary, the F0–08DAH–1 terminal
block can be removed to make removal of the module possible without disturbing field wiring.
Typical User Wiring
4-20mA Output
Ch. 1
Internal Module Circuitry
CH1
4–20mA
current sourcing
4–20mA
current sourcing
4–20mA
current sourcing
4–20mA
current sourcing
CH2
4-20mA Output
Ch. 2
CH3
CH4
4-20mA Output
Ch. 3
COM
4–20mA
current sourcing
4–20mA
current sourcing
4–20mA
current sourcing
4–20mA
current sourcing
CH6
4-20mA Output
Ch. 5
CH7
CH8
4-20mA Output
Ch. 6
CH2 DAC
OUT
ANALOG
4–20mA
CH3 DAC
CH1
CH4 DAC
CH2
CH3
CH5
4-20mA Output
Ch. 4
CH1 DAC
COM
CH4
CH5 DAC
COM
CH6 DAC
CH5
CH7 DAC
CH6
CH7
CH8 DAC
CH8
COM
COM
4-20mA Output
Ch. 7
COM
+24VDC
0VDC
4-20mA Output
Ch. 8
SHIELD CONNECTED TO SIGNAL
SOURCE COMMON (1 OF 8 SHOWN)
+24V
ISOLATED ANALOG
CIRCUIT POWER
0V
F0-08DAH-1
0V
24VDC
Power Supply
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
8–5
Chapter 8: F0-08DAH-1 8-Ch. Analog Current Output
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Module Operation
8–6
Channel Scanning Sequence
The DL05 and DL06 will read all eight channels of output data during each scan. Each CPU
supports special V-memory locations that are used to manage the data transfer. This is discussed
in more detail beginning in the section on “Special V–memory Locations”.
Scan
DL05/DL06 PLC
Read Inputs
Execute Application Program
Read the data
Store data
Scan N
Ch 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8
Scan N+1
Ch 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8
Scan N+2
Ch 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8
Scan N+3
Ch 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8
Scan N+4
Ch 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8
Write to Outputs
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
Chapter 8: F0-08DAH-1 8-Ch. Analog Current Output
Special System V-memory Locations
Formatting the Analog Module Data
The DL05 and DL06 PLCs have system V-memory locations assigned to their respective option
slots. These V-memory locations allow you to:
• specify the data format (binary or BCD)
• specify the number of channels to scan (up to 8 channels for the F0–08DAH–1)
• specify the V-memory locations where the user program will store the output data pending
distribution to the output module
DL05 Data Formatting
The table below shows the system V-memory locations used by the DL05 PLC for the
F0–08DAH–1.
Analog Output Module
DL05 Special V-memory Locations
Data Type and Number of Channels
Storage Pointer
V7700
V7702
Data Type and Number of Active Channels Setup
System memory location V7700 is used to set the data
format either to BCD or binary and to set the number of
channels that will be active.
For example, loading a constant of 0008 (BCD) into
V7700 sets eight channels active and causes the output data
value to be read from pointer-designated V–memory as a
BCD number.
Alternatively, loading a constant of 0088 (BCD) into
V7700 sets eight channels active and causes the output data
value to be read from pointer-designated V–memory as a
binary number.
V7700 BCD setup
MSB
LSB
1 1 1 1 1 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
5 4 3 2 1 0
V7700 binary setup
MSB
LSB
1 1 1 1 1 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
5 4 3 2 1 0
Storage Pointer Setup
System memory location V7702 is used as a pointer. It points to a user memory location
where the analog output data is stored by the user program, pending distribution to the
output module. An octal number is loaded to the pointer memory to identify the beginning
of a block of user memory where output values are stored.
For example, loading O2100 into V7702 causes the CPU to look for Ch 1’s output data value
in V2100 – 2101, Ch 2’s data value in V2102 – 2103, Ch 3’s data value in V2104 – 2105,
Ch 4’s data value in V2106 – 2107, Ch 5’s data value in V2110 – 2111, Ch 6’s data value in
V2112 – 2113, Ch 7’s data value in V2114 – 2115, and Ch 8’s data value in V2116 – 2117.
You will find an example program that loads appropriate values to V7700 and V7702 on
page 8–9.
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
8–7
Chapter 8: F0-08DAH-1 8-Ch. Analog Current Output
DL06 Data Formatting
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
8–8
Special V–memory locations are assigned to the four option slots of the DL06 PLC. The table
below shows these V-memory locations which can be used to setup the F0–08DAH–1.
Analog Output Module
DL06 Special V-memory Locations
Slot No.
Data Type and Number of Channels
Output Pointer
1
V700
V702
2
V710
V712
3
V720
V722
4
V730
V732
Data Type and Number of Active Channels Setup
System memory locations V700, 710, 720, and 730 are
used to set the data format either to BCD or binary and to
set the number of channels that will be active.
For example, loading a constant of 0008 (BCD) into V700
sets eight channels active and causes the output data values
to be read from pointer-designated V–memory as a BCD
number.
Alternatively, loading a constant of 0088 (BCD) into V700
sets eight channels active and causes the output data value
to be read from pointer-designated V–memory as a binary
number.
V700 BCD setup
MSB
LSB
1 1 1 1 1 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
5 4 3 2 1 0
V700 binary setup
MSB
LSB
1 1 1 1 1 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
5 4 3 2 1 0
Storage Pointer Setup
System memory locations V702, 712, 722, and 732 are used as pointers. They point to user
memory locations where the analog output data is stored by the user program, pending
distribution to the output module. An octal number is loaded to the pointer memory to
identify the beginning of a block of user memory where output values are stored.
For example, loading O2100 into V702 causes the CPU to look for Ch 1’s output data value
in V2100 – 2101, Ch 2’s data value in V2102 – 2103, Ch 3’s data value in V2104 – 2105,
Ch 4’s data value in V2106 – 2107, Ch 5’s data value in V2110 – 2111, Ch 6’s data value in
V2112 – 2113, Ch 7’s data value in V2114 – 2115, and Ch 8’s data value in V2116 – 2117.
You will find an example program that loads appropriate values to V700 and V702 on
page 8–10.
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
Chapter 8: F0-08DAH-1 8-Ch. Analog Current Output
Using the Pointer in Your Control Program
DL05 Pointer Method Using Conventional Ladder Logic
The proper use of the DL05 pointer requires that the V–memory address be written to the special memory
location on the first scan only. Use the SP0 bit as a permissive contact when using the code shown below.
The example program below shows how to setup the special V–memory locations. This rung
can be placed anywhere in the ladder program or in the initial stage if you are using stage
programming instructions.
This is all that is required to read the analog output data from V-memory locations. In the
example, V2100 is used, but you can use any user V-memory location.
SP0
LD
K8
Loads a constant that specifies the number of channels to scan and the
data format. The lower byte selects the data format (i.e. 0=BCD, 8=Binary)
and the number of channels (set to 8 for the F0-08DAH-1).
- or LD
K88
The binary format is used for displaying data on some operator
interface units. The DL05 PLCs support binary math functions.
OUT
V7700
Special V-memory location assigned to the option slot contains the
data format and the number of channels to scan.
LDA
O2100
This loads an octal value for the first V-memory location that will hold the data
to send to the output module. For example, the O2100 entered here would
designate the following addresses:
Ch1 – V2100-2101, Ch2 – V2102-V2103, Ch3 – V2104-V2105, Ch 4 – V2106-2107
Ch 5 – V2110-2111, Ch 6 – V2112-V2113, Ch 7 – V2114-V2115, Ch 8 – V2116-V2117.
OUT
V7702
The octal address (O2100) is stored here. V7702 is assigned to the option slot
and acts as a pointer, which means the CPU will use the octal value in this location
to determine exaclty where to get the data to send to the output module.
DL05 Pointer Method Using the IBox Instruction Available in DirectSOFT5
The following logic accomplishes the same thing as the previous ladder example, but it uses
the IBox instruction ANLGOUT.
Analog Output Module Pointer Setup
ANLGOUT
No permissive contact or input logic
is used with this instruction.
Base # (K0 - Local)
Slot #
Number of Output Channels
Output Data Format (0 - BCD 1 - BIN)
Output Data Address
IB-461
K0
K1
K8
K0
V2100
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
8–9
Chapter 8: F0-08DAH-1 8-Ch. Analog Current Output
DL06 Pointer Method Using Conventional Ladder Logic
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
8–10
The proper use of the DL06 pointer requires that the V–memory address be written to the special memory
location on the first scan only. Use the SP0 bit as a permissive contact when using the code shown below.
Use the special V–memory table below as a guide to setup the storage pointer in the following
example for the DL06. Slot 1 is the left most option slot.
Analog Output Module
DL06 Special V-memory Locations
Slot No.
No. of Channels
Output Pointer
1
V700
V702
2
V710
V712
3
V720
V722
4
V730
V732
The F0–08DAH–1 can be installed in any available DL06 option slot. Using the example
program from the previous page, but changing the V–memory addresses, the ladder diagram
below shows how to setup these locations with the module installed in slot 1 of the DL06. Use
the above table to determine the pointer values if locating the module in any of the other slot
locations. Place this rung anywhere in the ladder program or in the initial stage if you are using
stage programming instructions.
This logic is all that is required to write the analog output data from V-memory locations. In
the example, V2100 is used, but you can use any user V-memory location.
SP0
LD
K8
Loads a constant that specifies the number of channels to scan and the
data format. The lower byte selects the data format (i.e. 0=BCD, 8=Binary)
and the number of channels (up to 8 for the F0-08DAH-1).
- or LD
K88
The binary format is used for displaying data on some operator
interface units and the DL06 display. The DL06 PLCs support
binary math functions.
OUT
V700
Special V-memory location assigned to the first option slot contains the
data format and the number of channels to scan.
LDA
O2100
This loads an octal value for the first V-memory location that will hold the data
to send to the output module. For example, the O2100 entered here would
designate the following addresses:
Ch1 – V2100-2101, Ch2 – V2102-V2103, Ch3 – V2104-V2105, Ch 4 – V2106-2107
Ch 5 – V2110-2111, Ch 6 – V2112-V2113, Ch 7 – V2114-V2115, Ch 8 – V2116-V2117.
OUT
V702
The octal address (O2100) is stored here. V702 is assigned to the first option slot
and acts as a pointer, which means the CPU will use the octal value in this location
to determine exaclty where to get the data to send to the output module.
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
Chapter 8: F0-08DAH-1 8-Ch. Analog Current Output
DL06 Pointer Method Using the IBox Instruction Available in DirectSOFT5
The following logic accomplishes the same thing as the previous ladder example, but it uses
the IBox instruction ANLGOUT.
Analog Output Module Pointer Setup
ANLGOUT
Base # (K0 - Local)
Slot #
Number of Output Channels
Output Data Format (0 - BCD 1 - BIN)
Output Data Address
No permissive contact or input logic
is used with this instruction.
IB-461
K0
K1
K8
K0
V2100
Output Scale Conversion
Calculating the Digital Output Value
Your program has to calculate the digital value to
A= U – L
65535
send to the analog output module. Most
H–L
applications use measurements in engineering
U = Engineering units to output
units, so it is usually necessary to convert from
engineering units to a suitable output value. The
H = High limit of the engineering
unit range
conversion to an output value can be accomplished
by using the conversion formula shown.
L = Low limit of the engineering
unit range
You will need to substitute the engineering units for
A = Analog value (0 – 65535)
your scale into the formula to the right.
For example, if you want to output pressure (PSI)
between 0.0 and 100.0, you may multiply the pressure value by 10 to store in a V-memory
location and eliminate the decimal point. Notice how the calculations differ when you use the
multiplier.
The following example demonstrates how to output 49.4 PSI.
Example without multiplier
Example with multiplier
A=
U–L
H–L
65535
A=
U–L
H–L
A=
49 – 0
100 – 0
65535
A=
494 – 0
1000 – 0
A = 32112
65535
65535
A = 32374
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
8–11
Chapter 8: F0-08DAH-1 8-Ch. Analog Current Output
The Conversion Program in Standard Ladder Logic
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
8–12
The following example shows how you would write the program to perform the engineering
unit conversion. This example assumes you have BCD data loaded into the appropriate Vmemory locations using instructions that apply for the model of CPU you are using.
_First Scan
SP0
LDD
K100
Loads the constant 100 to the accumulator.
OUTD
V3000
Copies the constant 100 from the accumulator
to the memory location V3000 and V3001.
LDD
K65535
Loads the constant 65535 to the accumulator.
OUTD
V3002
Copies the content of V2000 from the accumulator
to the memory location V3002 and V3003.
LDD
V2200
Loads data from V2200 and V2201.
MULD
V3002
Multiplies the accumulator value by 65535
(previously loaded into V3002 and V3003).
DIVD
V3000
Divides the accumulator value by 100
(previously loaded into V3000 and V3001).
OUTD
V2100
Copies the content of the accumulator to the memory
location V2100 and V2101.
_On
SP1
V2200/2201
V2100/2101
49
32112
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
Chapter 8: F0-08DAH-1 8-Ch. Analog Current Output
Analog and Digital Value Conversions
Sometimes it is useful to convert between the signal levels and the digital values. This is
especially helpful during machine startup or troubleshooting. The following table provides
formulas to make this conversion easier.
The formulas in the table show the relationship between A, the analog value, and D, the
digital value.
Range
4 to 20mA
If you know the digital value
A=
(
16
. D
65535
)
+ 4mA
For example, if you need a 10mA signal to
achieve the desired result, you can use the
formula to determine the digital value that
should be used.
If you know the analog signal level
D=
65535 . (A – 4mA)
16
D = 65535 . (A – 4mA)
16
D = 65535 . (10mA – 4mA)
16
D = 24576
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
8–13
Chapter 8: F0-08DAH-1 8-Ch. Analog Current Output
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Module Resolution
8–14
Analog Data Bits
Two 16-bit words are reserved for the analog data whether you are using BCD or binary data
formatting. The 16 bits in the low word represent the analog data in binary format.
BCD Example
V2001
MSB
LSB
V2000
MSB
LSB
3 2 1 0 3 2 1 0 3 2 1 0 3 2 1 0
3 2 1 0
Binary Example
V2001
MSB
LSB
1 1 1 1 1 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
5 4 3 2 1 0
V2000
MSB
LSB
1 1 1 1 1 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
5 4 3 2 1 0
= data bits
Resolution Details
Since the module has 16-bit resolution, the analog signal is converted into 65,536 counts
ranging from 0 - 65,535 (216). A 4mA signal would be 0 and a 20mA signal would be 65535.
This is equivalent to a binary value of 0000 0000 0000 0000 to 1111 1111 1111 1111, or 000
to FFFF hexadecimal.
Each count can also be expressed in terms of the signal level by using the following equation:
4 – 20mA
20mA
Resolution =
H–L
65535
H = high limit of the signal range
4mA
L = low limit of the signal range
0
65535
The following table shows the smallest detectable signal change that will result in one LSB
change in the data value for each increment of the signal change.
mA Range
4 to 20mA
Signal Span
(H – L)
Divide By
Smallest Detectable
Change
16mA
65535
.244µA
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
F0-04DAH-2 4-CH.
ANALOG VOLTAGE OUTPUT
CHAPTER
9
In This Chapter...
Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9–2
Connecting and Disconnecting the Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9–4
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9–5
Module Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9–6
Special V-memory Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9–7
Using the Pointer in Your Control Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9–9
Output Scale Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9–11
Module Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9–14
Chapter 9: F0-04DAH-2 4-Ch. Analog Voltage Output
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Module Specifications
9–2
The F0–04DAH–2 analog output module offers the following
features:
• The DL05 and DL06 will update all four channels in one scan.
• The removable terminal block simplifies module replacement.
• Full 16-bit resolution.
NOTE: The DL05 CPU’s analog feature for this module requires DirectSOFT32 Version 3.0c (or later) and
firmware version 5.20 (or later). The DL06 requires DirectSOFT32 version V4.0, build 16 (or later) and
firmware version 2.30 (or later). See our website for more information: www.automationdirect.com.
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
Chapter 9: F0-04DAH-2 4-Ch. Analog Voltage Output
The following tables provide the specifications for the F0–04DAH–2 Analog Output Module.
Review these specifications to make sure the module meets your application requirements.
Output Specifications
Outputs per module
Output Range
Resolution
Output Type
PLC Data Format
Output value in program mode
Output Impedance
Load Impedance
Maximum Capacitive Load
Allowed load type
Maximum Inaccuracy
Maximum Full Scale Calibration Error
(including offset error)
Maximum Offset Calibration Error
Accuracy vs. Temperature
Maximum Crosstalk
4
0-10VDC
16-bit, 152μV/bit
Voltage sourcing/sinking at 5mA max.
1
16-bit, Unsigned Integer, 0–FFFF (binary) or 0–65535 (BCD)
0V (excluding PID, independent mode)
0.5 Ohms typical
>2000 Ohms
0.01 μF maximum
Grounded
0.2% of range (including temperature changes)
±.025% of range maximum
Linearity Error (End to End)
Output Stability and Repeatability
Output Ripple
Output Settling Time
All Channel Update Rate
Maximum Continuous Overload
Type of Output Protection
Output signal at power-up and power-down
External 24VDC Power Required
Base Power Required (5.0V)
1
±.025% of range maximum
±50 ppm/ °C maximum full scale calibration change
±10 counts
±16 count maximum (±0.025% of full scale)
Monotonic with no missing codes
±10 counts after 10 min. warm-up typical
.05% of Full Scale
.5 ms maximum, 5 μs minimum (full scale change)
100μs
Outputs current limited to 40mA typical. A continuous short
circuit will damage the output.
24VDC Peak Output Voltage
(capacitor transient voltage suppressor)
0V
45mA
25mA
Each channel requires 2 words of V-memory irrespective of the format used.
General Specifications
Operating Temperature
Storage Temperature
Humidity
Environmental air
Vibration
Shock
Field to Logic side Isolation
Insulation Resistance
Noise Immunity
Agency Approvals
Module Location
Field Wiring
Weight
0 to 55°C (32 to 131°F)
-20 to 70°C (-4 to 158°F)
5 to 95% (non-condensing)
No corrosive gases permitted
(EN61131-2 pollution degree 1)
MIL STD 810C 514.2
MIL STD 810C 516.2
1800VAC applied for 1 second (100% tested)
>10M ohms @ 500VDC
NEMA ICS3-304; Impulse 1000V @ 1mS pulse; RFI,
(145MHz, 440Mhz 5W @ 15cm); Worst case error during
noise disturbance is .5% of full scale
UL508; UL60079-15 Zone 2
Any slot in a DL05 or DL06 System
Removable Terminal Block
49 g (1.7 oz.)
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
9–3
Chapter 9: F0-04DAH-2 4-Ch. Analog Voltage Output
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Connecting and Disconnecting the Field Wiring
9–4
WARNING: Before removing the analog module or the terminal block on the face of the module,
disconnect power to the PLC and all field devices. Failure to disconnect power can result in damage to
the PLC and/or field devices.
Wiring Guidelines
Your company may have guidelines for wiring and cable installation. If so, you should check
those before you begin the installation. Here are some general things to consider:
• Use the shortest wiring route whenever possible.
• Use shielded wiring and ground the shield at the transmitter source. Do not ground the shield at both
the module and the source.
• Do not run the signal wiring next to large motors, high current switches, or transformers. This may
cause noise problems.
• Route the wiring through an approved cable housing to minimize the risk of accidental damage.
Check local and national codes to choose the correct method for your application.
The F0–04DAH–2 does not supply power to field devices. You will need to power transmitters
separately from the PLC.
To remove the terminal block, disconnect power to the PLC and the field devices. Pull the
terminal block firmly until the connector separates from the module.
You can remove the analog module from the PLC by folding out the retaining tabs at the top
and bottom of the module. As the retaining tabs pivot upward and outward, the module’s
connector is lifted out of the PLC socket. Once the connector is free, you can lift the module
out of its slot.
Terminal Block Specifications
Number of Positions
Re-Order Number
Pitch
Wire Range
Screwdriver Size (Slotted)
Screw Size
Screw Torque
13
D0-ACC-4
.2 inch (5.08 mm)
28-16AWG Solid or Stranded Conductor;
Wire strip length 5/16" (7-8mm)
0.4T x 2.5W mm (part number DN-SS1)
M2.5 size
4.5 inch-pounds (.52 Nm)
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
Chapter 9: F0-04DAH-2 4-Ch. Analog Voltage Output
Wiring Diagram
Use the following diagram to connect the field wiring. If necessary, the F0–04DAH–2 terminal
block can be removed to make removal of the module possible without disturbing field wiring.
Typical User Wiring
Voltage Output
Ch. 1
Internal Module Circuitry
CH1
CH2
Voltage Output
Ch. 2
CH3
CH4
Voltage Output
Ch. 3
COM
voltage
sink / source
voltage
sink / source
voltage
sink / source
voltage
sink / source
CH1 DAC
CH2 DAC
CH3 DAC
CH4 DAC
OUT
ANALOG
0–10VDC
CH1
CH2
CH3
Voltage Output
Ch. 4
CH4
COM
COM
COM
SHIELD CONNECTED TO SIGNAL
SOURCE COMMON (1 OF 4 SHOWN)
COM
COM
COM
COM
+24VDC
ISOLATED ANALOG
CIRCUIT POWER
0VDC
24VDC
Power Supply
+24V
0V
F0-04DAH-2
isolated analog
circuit common
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
9–5
Chapter 9: F0-04DAH-2 4-Ch. Analog Voltage Output
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Module Operation
9–6
Channel Scanning Sequence
The DL05 and DL06 will read all four channels of output data during each scan. Each CPU
supports special V-memory locations that are used to manage the data transfer. This is discussed
in more detail beginning in the section on “Special V–memory Locations”.
Scan
DL05/DL06 PLC
Read Inputs
Execute Application Program
Read the data
Store data
Scan N
Ch 1, 2, 3, 4
Scan N+1
Ch 1, 2, 3, 4
Scan N+2
Ch 1, 2, 3, 4
Scan N+3
Ch 1, 2, 3, 4
Scan N+4
Ch 1, 2, 3, 4
Write to Outputs
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
Chapter 9: F0-04DAH-2 4-Ch. Analog Voltage Output
Special V-memory Locations
Formatting the Analog Module Data
The DL05 and DL06 PLCs have special V-memory locations assigned to their respective option
slots. These V-memory locations allow you to:
• specify the data format (binary or BCD)
• specify the number of channels to scan (up to 4 channels for the F0–04DAH–2)
• specify the V-memory locations where the user program will store the output data pending
distribution to the output module
DL05 Data Formatting
The table below shows the special V-memory locations used by the DL05 PLC for the
F0–04DAH–2.
Analog Output Module
DL05 Special V-memory Locations
Data Type and Number of Channels
Storage Pointer
V7700
V7702
Data Type and Number of Active Channels Setup
System memory location V7700 is used to set the data
format either to BCD or binary and to set the number of
channels that will be active.
For example, loading a constant of 0004 (BCD) into
V7700 sets four channels active and causes the output
data value to be read from pointer-designated V–memory
as a BCD number.
Alternatively, loading a constant of 0084 (BCD) into
V7700 sets four channels active and causes the output
data value to be read from pointer-designated V–memory
as a binary number.
V7700 BCD setup
MSB
LSB
1 1 1 1 1 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
5 4 3 2 1 0
V7700 binary setup
MSB
LSB
1 1 1 1 1 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
5 4 3 2 1 0
Storage Pointer Setup
System memory location V7702 is used as a pointer. It points to a user memory location
where the analog output data is stored by the user program, pending distribution to the
output module. An octal number is loaded to the pointer memory to identify the beginning
of a block of user memory where output values are stored.
For example, loading O2100 into V7702 causes the CPU to look for Ch 1’s output data value
in V2100 – 2101, Ch 2’s data value in V2102 – 2103, Ch 3’s data value in V2104 – 2105,
and Ch 4’s data value in V2106 – 2107.
You will find an example program that loads appropriate values to V7700 and V7702 on
page 9–9.
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
9–7
Chapter 9: F0-04DAH-2 4-Ch. Analog Voltage Output
DL06 Data Formatting
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
9–8
Special V–memory locations are assigned to the four option slots of the DL06 PLC. The table
below shows these V-memory locations which can be used to setup the F0–04DAH–2.
Analog Output Module
DL06 Special V-memory Locations
Slot No.
Data Type and Number of Channels
Output Pointer
1
V700
V702
2
V710
V712
3
V720
V722
4
V730
V732
Data Type and Number of Active Channels Setup
System memory locations V700, 710, 720, and 730 are
V700 BCD setup
used to set the data format either to BCD or binary and to
MSB
LSB
set the number of channels that will be active.
1 1 1 1 1 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
For example, loading a constant of 0004 (BCD) into
5 4 3 2 1 0
V700 sets four channels active and causes the output data
V700 binary setup
value to be read from pointer-designated V–memory as a
MSB
LSB
BCD number.
Alternatively, loading a constant of 0084 (BCD) into
1 1 1 1 1 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
5 4 3 2 1 0
V700 sets four channels active and causes the output data
value to be read from pointer-designated V–memory as a binary number.
Storage Pointer Setup
System memory locations V702, 712, 722, and 732 are used as pointers. They point to user
memory locations where the analog output data is stored by the user program, pending
distribution to the output module. An octal number is loaded to the pointer memory to
identify the beginning of a block of user memory where output values are stored.
For example, loading O2100 into V702 causes the CPU to look for Ch 1’s output data value
in V2100 – 2101, Ch 2’s data value in V2102 – 2103, Ch 3’s data value in V2104 – 2105,
and Ch 4’s data value in V2106 – 2107.
You will find an example program that loads appropriate values to V7700 and V7702 on
page 9–10.
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
Chapter 9: F0-04DAH-2 4-Ch. Analog Voltage Output
Using the Pointer in Your Control Program
DL05 Pointer Method Using Conventional Ladder Logic
The proper use of the DL05 pointer requires that the V–memory address be written to the special memory
location on the first scan only. Use the SP0 bit as a permissive contact when using the code shown below.
The example program below shows how to setup the special V–memory locations. This rung
can be placed anywhere in the ladder program or in the initial stage if you are using stage
programming instructions.
This is all that is required to read the analog output data from V-memory locations. In the
example, V2100 is used, but you can use any user V-memory location.
SP0
LD
K4
Loads a constant that specifies the number of channels to scan and the
data format. The lower byte selects the data format (i.e. 0=BCD, 8=Binary)
and the number of channels (set to 4 for the F0-04DAH-2).
- or LD
K84
The binary format is used for displaying data on some operator
interface units. The DL05 PLCs support binary math functions.
OUT
V7700
Special V-memory location assigned to the option slot contains the
data format and the number of channels to scan.
LDA
O2100
This loads an octal value for the first V-memory location that will hold the data
to send to the output module. For example, the O2100 entered here would
designate the following addresses:
Ch1 – V2100-2101, Ch2 – V2102-V2103, Ch3 – V2104-V2105, Ch 4 – V2106-2107
OUT
V7702
The octal address (O2100) is stored here. V7702 is assigned to the option slot
and acts as a pointer, which means the CPU will use the octal value in this location
to determine exaclty where to get the data to send to the output module.
DL05 Pointer Method Using the IBox Instruction Available in DirectSOFT5
The following logic accomplishes the same thing as the previous ladder example, but it uses
the IBox instruction ANLGOUT.
Analog Output Module Pointer Setup
ANLGOUT
No permissive contact or input logic
is used with this instruction.
Base # (K0 - Local)
Slot #
Number of Output Channels
Output Data Format (0 - BCD 1 - BIN)
Output Data Address
IB-461
K0
K1
K4
K0
V2100
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
9–9
Chapter 9: F0-04DAH-2 4-Ch. Analog Voltage Output
DL06 Pointer Method Using Conventional Ladder Logic
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
9–10
The proper use of the DL06 pointer requires that the V–memory address be written to the special memory
location on the first scan only. Use the SP0 bit as a permissive contact when using the code shown below.
Use the special V–memory table below as a guide to setup the storage pointer in the following
example for the DL06. Slot 1 is the left most option slot.
Analog Output Module
DL06 Special V-memory Locations
Slot No.
No. of Channels
Output Pointer
1
V700
V702
2
V710
V712
3
V720
V722
4
V730
V732
The F0–04DAH–2 can be installed in any available DL06 option slot. The ladder diagram
below shows how to setup these locations with the module installed in slot 1 of the DL06. Use
the above table to determine the pointer values if locating the module in any of the other slot
locations. Place this rung anywhere in the ladder program or in the initial stage if you are using
stage programming instructions.
This logic is all that is required to write the analog output data from V-memory locations. In
the example, V2100 is used, but you can use any user V-memory location.
SP0
LD
K4
Loads a constant that specifies the number of channels to scan and the
data format. The lower byte selects the data format (i.e. 0=BCD, 8=Binary)
and the number of channels (set to 4 for the F0-04DAH-2).
- or LD
K84
The binary format is used for displaying data on some operator
interface units and the DL06 display. The DL06 PLCs support
binary math functions.
OUT
V700
Special V-memory location assigned to the first option slot contains the
data format and the number of channels to scan.
LDA
O2100
This loads an octal value for the first V-memory location that will hold the data
to send to the output module. For example, the O2100 entered here would
designate the following addresses:
Ch1 – V2100-2101, Ch2 – V2102-V2103, Ch3 – V2104-V2105, Ch 4 – V2106-2107.
OUT
V702
The octal address (O2100) is stored here. V702 is assigned to the first option slot
and acts as a pointer, which means the CPU will use the octal value in this location
to determine exaclty where to get the data to send to the output module.
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
Chapter 9: F0-04DAH-2 4-Ch. Analog Voltage Output
DL06 Pointer Method Using the IBox Instruction Available in DirectSOFT5
The following logic accomplishes the same thing as the previous ladder example, but it uses
the IBox instruction ANLGOUT.
Analog Output Module Pointer Setup
IB-461
ANLGOUT
No permissive contact or input logic
is used with this instruction.
Base # (K0 - Local)
Slot #
Number of Output Channels
Output Data Format (0 - BCD 1 - BIN)
Output Data Address
K0
K1
K4
K0
V2100
Output Scale Conversion
Calculating the Digital Output Value
Your program has to calculate the digital value to
U–L
send to the analog output module. Most A = H – L 65535
applications use measurements in engineering U = Engineering units to output
units, so it is usually necessary to convert from
engineering units to a suitable output value. The H = High limit of the engineering
unit range
conversion to an output value can be accomplished
by using the conversion formula shown.
L = Low limit of the engineering
unit range
You will need to substitute the engineering units for
A = Analog value (0 – 65535)
your scale into the formula to the right.
For example, if you want to output pressure (PSI)
between 0.0 and 100.0, you may multiply the pressure value by 10 to store in a V-memory
location and eliminate the decimal point. Notice how the calculations differ when you use the
multiplier.
The following example demonstrates how to output 49.4 PSI.
Example without multiplier
Example with multiplier
A=
U–L
H–L
65535
A=
U–L
H–L
A=
49 – 0
100 – 0
65535
A=
494 – 0
1000 – 0
A = 32112
65535
65535
A = 32374
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
9–11
Chapter 9: F0-04DAH-2 4-Ch. Analog Voltage Output
The Conversion Program in Standard Ladder Logic
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
9–12
The following example shows how you would write the program to perform the engineering
unit conversion. This example assumes you have BCD data loaded into the appropriate Vmemory locations using instructions that apply for the model of CPU you are using.
_First Scan
SP0
LDD
K100
Loads the constant 100 to the accumulator.
OUTD
V3000
Copies the constant 100 from the accumulator
to the memory location V3000 and V3001.
LDD
K65535
Loads the constant 65535 to the accumulator.
OUTD
V3002
Copies the content of V2000 from the accumulator
to the memory location V3002 and V3003.
LDD
V2200
Loads data from V2200 and V2201.
MULD
V3002
Multiplies the accumulator value by 65535
(previously loaded into V3002 and V3003).
DIVD
V3000
Divides the accumulator value by 100
(previously loaded into V3000 and V3001).
OUTD
V2100
Copies the content of the accumulator to the memory
location V2100 and V2101.
_On
SP1
V2200/2201
V2100/2101
49
32112
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
Chapter 9: F0-04DAH-2 4-Ch. Analog Voltage Output
Analog and Digital Value Conversions
Sometimes it is useful to convert between the signal levels and the digital values. This is
especially helpful during machine startup or troubleshooting. The following table provides
formulas to make this conversion easier.
The formulas in the table show the relationship between A, the analog value, and D, the
digital value.
Range
0 to 10VDC
If you know the digital value
A=
10
. D
65535
For example, if you need a 6VDC signal to
achieve the desired result, you can use the
formula to determine the digital value that
should be used.
If you know the analog signal level
D=
D = 65535
10
D = 65535
10
D = 39321
65535 .
A
10
A
6V
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
9–13
Chapter 9: F0-04DAH-2 4-Ch. Analog Voltage Output
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Module Resolution
9–14
Analog Data Bits
Two 16-bit words are reserved for the analog data whether you are using BCD or binary data
formatting. The 16 bits in the low word represent the analog data in binary format.
BCD Example
V2001
MSB
LSB
V2000
MSB
LSB
3 2 1 0 3 2 1 0 3 2 1 0 3 2 1 0
3 2 1 0
Binary Example
V2001
MSB
LSB
1 1 1 1 1 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
5 4 3 2 1 0
V2000
MSB
LSB
1 1 1 1 1 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
5 4 3 2 1 0
= data bits
Resolution Details
Since the module has 16-bit resolution, the analog signal is converted into 65,536 counts
ranging from 0 - 65,535 (216). A 0VDC signal would be 0 and a 10VDC signal would be
65535. This is equivalent to a binary value of 0000 0000 0000 0000 to 1111 1111 1111 1111,
or 000 to FFFF hexadecimal.
Each count can also be expressed in terms of the signal level by using the following equation:
0 – 10V
10V
Resolution =
H–L
65535
H = high limit of the signal range
L = low limit of the signal range
0V
0
65535
The following table shows the smallest detectable signal change that will result in one LSB
change in the data value for each increment of the signal change.
VDC Range
0 to 10VDC
Signal Span
(H – L)
Divide By
Smallest Detectable
Change
10 VDC
65535
153μV
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
F0-08DAH-2 8-CH.
ANALOG VOLTAGE OUTPUT
CHAPTER
140
In This Chapter...
Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10–2
Connecting and Disconnecting the Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10–4
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10–5
Module Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10–6
Special V-memory Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10–7
Using the Pointer in Your Control Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10–9
Output Scale Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10–11
Module Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10–14
Chapter 10: F0-08DAH-2 8-Ch. Analog Voltage Output
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Module Specifications
10–2
The F0–08DAH–2 analog output module offers the following
features:
• The DL05 and DL06 will update all eight channels in one scan.
• The removable terminal block simplifies module replacement.
• Full 16-bit resolution.
NOTE: The DL05 CPU’s analog feature for this module requires DirectSOFT32 Version 3.0c (or later) and
firmware version 5.20 (or later). The DL06 requires DirectSOFT32 version V4.0, build 16 (or later) and
firmware version 2.30 (or later). See our website for more information: www.automationdirect.com.
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
Chapter 10: F0-08DAH-2 8-Ch. Analog Voltage Output
The following tables provide the specifications for the F0–08DAH –2 Analog Output Module.
Review these specifications to make sure the module meets your application requirements.
Output Specifications
Outputs per module
Output Range
Resolution
Output Type
PLC Data Format
Output value in program mode
Output Impedance
Load Impedance
Maximum Capacitive Load
Allowed load type
Maximum Inaccuracy
Maximum Full Scale Calibration Error
(including offset error)
Maximum Offset Calibration Error
Accuracy vs. Temperature
Maximum Crosstalk at DC, 50 Hz and 60 Hz.
Linearity Error (End to End)
Output Stability and Repeatability
Output Ripple
Output Settling Time
All Channel Update Rate
Maximum Continuous Overload
Type of Output Protection
Output signal at power-up and power-down
External 24VDC Power Required
Base Power Required (5.0V)
1
8
0-10VDC
16-bit, 152μV/bit
Voltage sourcing/sinking at 5mA max.
1
16-bit, Unsigned Integer, 0–FFFF (binary) or 0–65535 (BCD)
0V (excluding PID, independent mode)
0.5 Ohms typical
>2000 Ohms
0.01 μF maximum
Grounded
0.27% of range (including temperature changes)
±.025% of range maximum
±.025% of range maximum
±50 ppm/ °C maximum full scale calibration change
10 counts
±16 count maximum (±0.025% of full scale)
Monotonic with no missing codes
±10 counts after 10 min. warm-up typical
.05% of Full Scale
.5 ms maximum, 5 μs minimum (full scale change)
100μs
Outputs current limited to 40mA typical. A continuous short
circuit will damage the output.
24VDC Peak Output Voltage
(capacitor transient voltage suppressor)
0V
75mA
25mA
Each channel requires 2 words of V-memory irrespective of the format used.
General Specifications
Operating Temperature
Storage Temperature
Humidity
Environmental air
Vibration
Shock
Field to Logic side Isolation
Insulation Resistance
Noise Immunity
Agency Approvals
Module Location
Field Wiring
Weight
0 to 55°C (32 to 131°F)
-20 to 70°C (-4 to 158°F)
5 to 95% (non-condensing)
No corrosive gases permitted
(EN61131-2 pollution degree 1)
MIL STD 810C 514.2
MIL STD 810C 516.2
1800VAC applied for 1 second (100% tested)
>10M ohms @ 500VDC
NEMA ICS3-304; Impulse 1000V @ 1mS pulse; RFI,
(145MHz, 440Mhz 5W @ 15cm); Worst case error during
noise disturbance is .5% of full scale
UL508; UL60079-15 Zone 2
Any slot in a DL05 or DL06 System
Removable Terminal Block
49 g (1.7 oz.)
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
10–3
Chapter 10: F0-08DAH-2 8-Ch. Analog Voltage Output
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Connecting and Disconnecting the Field Wiring
10–4
WARNING: Before removing the analog module or the terminal block on the face of the module,
disconnect power to the PLC and all field devices. Failure to disconnect power can result in damage to
the PLC and/or field devices.
Wiring Guidelines
Your company may have guidelines for wiring and cable installation. If so, you should check
those before you begin the installation. Here are some general things to consider:
• Use the shortest wiring route whenever possible.
• Use shielded wiring and ground the shield at the transmitter source. Do not ground the shield at both
the module and the source.
• Do not run the signal wiring next to large motors, high current switches, or transformers. This may
cause noise problems.
• Route the wiring through an approved cable housing to minimize the risk of accidental damage.
Check local and national codes to choose the correct method for your application.
The F0–08DAH–2 does not supply power to field devices. You will need to power transmitters
separately from the PLC.
To remove the terminal block, disconnect power to the PLC and the field devices. Pull the
terminal block firmly until the connector separates from the module.
You can remove the analog module from the PLC by folding out the retaining tabs at the top
and bottom of the module. As the retaining tabs pivot upward and outward, the module’s
connector is lifted out of the PLC socket. Once the connector is free, you can lift the module
out of its slot.
Terminal Block Specifications
Number of Positions
Re-Order Number
Pitch
Wire Range
Screwdriver Size (Slotted)
Screw Size
Screw Torque
13
D0-ACC-4
.2 inch (5.08 mm)
28-16AWG Solid or Stranded Conductor;
Wire strip length 5/16" (7-8mm)
0.4T x 2.5W mm (part number DN-SS1)
M2.5 size
4.5 inch-pounds (.52 Nm)
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
Chapter 10: F0-08DAH-2 8-Ch. Analog Voltage Output
Wiring Diagram
Use the following diagram to connect the field wiring. If necessary, the F0–08DAH–2 terminal
block can be removed to make removal of the module possible without disturbing field wiring.
Typical User Wiring
Voltage Output
Ch. 1
Internal Module Circuitry
CH1
CH2
Voltage Output
Ch. 2
CH3
CH4
Voltage Output
Ch. 3
COM
CH5
Voltage Output
Ch. 4
CH6
Voltage Output
Ch. 5
CH7
CH8
Voltage Output
Ch. 6
COM
voltage
sink / source
voltage
sink / source
voltage
sink / source
voltage
sink / source
CH1 DAC
CH2 DAC
CH3 DAC
CH4 DAC
OUT
ANALOG
0–10VDC
CH1
CH2
CH3
voltage
sink / source
voltage
sink / source
voltage
sink / source
voltage
sink / source
CH5 DAC
CH4
COM
CH6 DAC
CH5
CH7 DAC
CH6
CH8 DAC
CH7
CH8
COM
COM
Voltage Output
Ch. 7
COM
+24VDC
ISOLATED ANALOG
CIRCUIT POWER
0VDC
Voltage Output
Ch. 8
SHIELD CONNECTED TO SIGNAL
SOURCE COMMON (1 OF 8 SHOWN)
24VDC
Power Supply
+24V
0V
F0-08DAH-2
isolated analog
circuit common
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
10–5
Chapter 10: F0-08DAH-2 8-Ch. Analog Voltage Output
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Module Operation
10–6
Channel Scanning Sequence
The DL05 and DL06 will read all eight channels of output data during each scan. Each CPU
supports special V-memory locations that are used to manage the data transfer. This is discussed
in more detail beginning in the section on “Special V–memory Locations”.
Scan
DL05/DL06 PLC
Read Inputs
Execute Application Program
Read the data
Store data
Scan N
Ch 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8
Scan N+1
Ch 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8
Scan N+2
Ch 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8
Scan N+3
Ch 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8
Scan N+4
Ch 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8
Write to Outputs
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
Chapter 10: F0-08DAH-2 8-Ch. Analog Voltage Output
Special V-memory Locations
Formatting the Analog Module Data
The DL05 and DL06 PLCs have special V-memory locations assigned to their respective option
slots. These V-memory locations allow you to:
• specify the data format (binary or BCD)
• specify the number of channels to scan (up to 8 channels for the F0–08DAH–2)
• specify the V-memory locations where the user program will store the output data pending
distribution to the output module
DL05 Data Formatting
The table below shows the special V-memory locations used by the DL05 PLC for the
F0–08DAH–2.
Analog Output Module
DL05 Special V-memory Locations
Data Type and Number of Channels
Storage Pointer
V7700
V7702
Data Type and Number of Active Channels Setup
System memory location V7700 is used to set the data
format either to BCD or binary and to set the number of
channels that will be active.
For example, loading a constant of 0008 (BCD) into
V7700 sets eight channels active and causes the output
data value to be read from pointer-designated V–memory
as a BCD number.
Alternatively, loading a constant of 0088 (BCD) into
V7700 sets eight channels active and causes the output
data value to be read from pointer-designated V–memory
as a binary number.
V7700 BCD setup
MSB
LSB
1 1 1 1 1 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
5 4 3 2 1 0
V7700 binary setup
MSB
LSB
1 1 1 1 1 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
5 4 3 2 1 0
Storage Pointer Setup
System memory location V7702 is used as a pointer. It points to a user memory location
where the analog output data is stored by the user program, pending distribution to the
output module. An octal number is loaded to the pointer memory to identify the beginning
of a block of user memory where output values are stored.
For example, loading O2100 into V7702 causes the CPU to look for Ch 1’s output data value
in V2100 – 2101, Ch 2’s data value in V2102 – 2103, Ch 3’s data value in V2104 – 2105,
Ch 4’s data value in V2106 – 2107, Ch 5’s data value in V2110 – 2111, Ch 6’s data value in
V2112 – 2113, Ch 7’s data value in V2114 – 2115, and Ch 8’s data value in V2116 – 2117.
You will find an example program that loads appropriate values to V7700 and V7702 on
page 10–9.
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
10–7
Chapter 10: F0-08DAH-2 8-Ch. Analog Voltage Output
DL06 Data Formatting
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
10–8
Special V–memory locations are assigned to the four option slots of the DL06 PLC. The table
below shows these V-memory locations which can be used to setup the F0–08DAH–2.
Analog Output Module
DL06 Special V-memory Locations
Slot No.
Data Type and Number of Channels
Output Pointer
1
V700
V702
2
V710
V712
3
V720
V722
4
V730
V732
Data Type and Number of Active Channels Setup
System memory locations V700, 710, 720, and 730 are
used to set the data format either to BCD or binary and
to set the number of channels that will be active.
For example, loading a constant of 0008 (BCD) into
V700 sets eight channels active and causes the output
data value to be read from pointer-designated
V–memory as a BCD number.
Alternatively, loading a constant of 0088 (BCD) into
V700 sets eight channels active and causes the output
data value to be read from pointer-designated
V–memory as a binary number.
V7700 BCD setup
MSB
LSB
1 1 1 1 1 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
5 4 3 2 1 0
V7700 binary setup
MSB
LSB
1 1 1 1 1 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
5 4 3 2 1 0
Storage Pointer Setup
V–memory locations 702, 712, 722 and 732 are special locations used as storage pointers. A
V–memory address is loaded into this location as an octal number identifying the first user
V–memory location for the analog output data. This V–memory location is user selectable. For
example, loading O2100 causes the pointer to write Ch 1’s data value to V2100 – 2101, Ch 2’s
data value to V2102 – 2103, Ch 3’s data value to V2104 – 2105, Ch 4’s data value to V2106 –
2107, Ch 5’s data value to V2110 – 2111, Ch 6’s data value to V2112 – 2113, Ch 7’s data value
to V2114 – 2115, and Ch 8’s data value to V2116 – 2117.
You will find an example program that loads appropriate values to V700 and V702 beginning
on page 10–10.
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
Chapter 10: F0-08DAH-2 8-Ch. Analog Voltage Output
Using the Pointer in Your Control Program
DL05 Pointer Method Using Conventional Ladder Logic
The proper use of the DL05 pointer requires that the V–memory address be written to the special memory
location on the first scan only. Use the SP0 bit as a permissive contact when using the code shown below.
The example program below shows how to setup the special V–memory locations. This rung
can be placed anywhere in the ladder program or in the initial stage if you are using stage
programming instructions.
This is all that is required to read the analog output data from V-memory locations. In the
example, V2100 is used, but you can use any user V-memory location.
SP0
LD
K8
Loads a constant that specifies the number of channels to scan and the
data format. The lower byte selects the data format (i.e. 0=BCD, 8=Binary)
and the number of channels (up to 8 for the F0-08DAH-2).
- or LD
K88
The binary format is used for displaying data on some operator
interface units. The DL05 PLCs support binary math functions.
OUT
V7700
Special V-memory location assigned to the option slot contains the
data format and the number of channels to scan.
LDA
O2100
This loads an octal value for the first V-memory location that will hold the data
to send to the output module. For example, the O2100 entered here would
designate the following addresses:
Ch1 – V2100-2101, Ch2 – V2102-V2103, Ch3 – V2104-V2105, Ch 4 – V2106-2107
Ch 5 – V2110-2111, Ch 6 – V2112-V2113, Ch 7 – V2114-V2115, Ch 8 – V2116-V2117.
OUT
V7702
The octal address (O2100) is stored here. V7702 is assigned to the option slot
and acts as a pointer, which means the CPU will use the octal value in this location
to determine exaclty where to get the data to send to the output module.
DL05 Pointer Method Using the IBox Instruction Available in DirectSOFT5
The following logic accomplishes the same thing as the previous ladder example, but it uses
the IBox instruction ANLGOUT.
Analog Output Module Pointer Setup
ANLGOUT
No permissive contact or input logic
is used with this instruction.
Base # (K0 - Local)
Slot #
Number of Output Channels
Output Data Format (0 - BCD 1 - BIN)
Output Data Address
IB-461
K0
K1
K8
K0
V2100
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
10–9
Chapter 10: F0-08DAH-2 8-Ch. Analog Voltage Output
DL06 Pointer Method Using Conventional Ladder Logic
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
10–10
The proper use of the DL06 pointer requires that the V–memory address be written to the special memory
location on the first scan only. Use the SP0 bit as a permissive contact when using the code shown below.
Use the special V–memory table below as a guide to setup the storage pointer in the following
example for the DL06. Slot 1 is the left most option slot.
Analog Output Module
DL06 Special V-memory Locations
Slot No.
No. of Channels
Output Pointer
1
V700
V702
2
V710
V712
3
V720
V722
4
V730
V732
The F0–08DAH–2 can be installed in any available DL06 option slot. The ladder diagram
below shows how to setup these locations with the module installed in slot 1 of the DL06. Use
the above table to determine the pointer values if locating the module in any of the other slot
locations. Place this rung anywhere in the ladder program or in the initial stage if you are using
stage programming instructions.
This logic is all that is required to write the analog output data from V-memory locations. In
the example, V2100 is used, but you can use any user V-memory location.
SP0
LD
K8
Loads a constant that specifies the number of channels to scan and the
data format. The lower byte selects the data format (i.e. 0=BCD, 8=Binary)
and the number of channels (up to 8 for the F0-08DAH-2).
- or LD
K88
The binary format is used for displaying data on some operator
interface units and the DL06 display. The DL06 PLCs support
binary math functions.
OUT
V700
Special V-memory location assigned to the first option slot contains the
data format and the number of channels to scan.
LDA
O2100
This loads an octal value for the first V-memory location that will hold the data
to send to the output module. For example, the O2100 entered here would
designate the following addresses:
Ch1 – V2100-2101, Ch2 – V2102-V2103, Ch3 – V2104-V2105, Ch 4 – V2106-2107
Ch 5 – V2110-2111, Ch 6 – V2112-V2113, Ch 7 – V2114-V2115, Ch 8 – V2116-V2117.
OUT
V702
The octal address (O2100) is stored here. V702 is assigned to the first option slot
and acts as a pointer, which means the CPU will use the octal value in this location
to determine exaclty where to get the data to send to the output module.
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
Chapter 10: F0-08DAH-2 8-Ch. Analog Voltage Output
DL06 Pointer Method Using the IBox Instruction Available in DirectSOFT5
The following logic accomplishes the same thing as the previous ladder example, but it uses
the IBox instruction ANLGOUT.
Analog Output Module Pointer Setup
IB-461
ANLGOUT
No permissive contact or input logic
is used with this instruction.
Base # (K0 - Local)
Slot #
Number of Output Channels
Output Data Format (0 - BCD 1 - BIN)
Output Data Address
K0
K1
K8
K0
V2100
Output Scale Conversion
Calculating the Digital Output Value
Your program has to calculate the digital value to
–L
send to the analog output module. Most A = U
65535
H–L
applications use measurements in engineering
units, so it is usually necessary to convert from U = Engineering units to output
engineering units to a suitable output value. The H = High limit of the engineering
conversion to an output value can be accomplished
unit range
by using the conversion formula shown.
L = Low limit of the engineering
unit range
You will need to substitute the engineering units for
your scale into the formula to the right.
A = Analog value (0 – 65535)
For example, if you want to output pressure (PSI)
between 0.0 and 100.0, you may multiply the
pressure value by 10 to store in a V-memory location and eliminate the decimal point. Notice
how the calculations differ when you use the multiplier.
The following example demonstrates how to output 49.4 PSI.
Example without multiplier
Example with multiplier
A=
U–L
H–L
65535
A=
U–L
H–L
A=
49 – 0
100 – 0
65535
A=
494 – 0
1000 – 0
A = 32112
65535
65535
A = 32374
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
10–11
Chapter 10: F0-08DAH-2 8-Ch. Analog Voltage Output
The Conversion Program in Standard Ladder Logic
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
10–12
The following example shows how you would write the program to perform the engineering
unit conversion. This example assumes you have BCD data loaded into the appropriate Vmemory locations using instructions that apply for the model of CPU you are using.
_First Scan
SP0
LDD
K100
Loads the constant 100 to the accumulator.
OUTD
V3000
Copies the constant 100 from the accumulator
to the memory location V3000 and V3001.
LDD
K65535
Loads the constant 65535 to the accumulator.
OUTD
V3002
Copies the content of V2000 from the accumulator
to the memory location V3002 and V3003.
LDD
V2200
Loads data from V2200 and V2201.
MULD
V3002
Multiplies the accumulator value by 65535
(previously loaded into V3002 and V3003).
DIVD
V3000
Divides the accumulator value by 100
(previously loaded into V3000 and V3001).
OUTD
V2100
Copies the content of the accumulator to the memory
location V2100 and V2101.
_On
SP1
V2200/2201
V2100/2101
49
32112
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
Chapter 10: F0-08DAH-2 8-Ch. Analog Voltage Output
Analog and Digital Value Conversions
Sometimes it is useful to convert between the signal levels and the digital values. This is
especially helpful during machine startup or troubleshooting. The following table provides
formulas to make this conversion easier.
The formulas in the table show the relationship between A, the analog value, and D, the
digital value.
Range
0 to 10VDC
If you know the digital value
A=
10
. D
65535
For example, if you need a 6VDC signal to
achieve the desired result, you can use the
formula to determine the digital value that
should be used.
If you know the analog signal level
D=
D = 65535
10
D = 65535
10
D = 39321
65535 .
A
10
A
6V
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
10–13
Chapter 10: F0-08DAH-2 8-Ch. Analog Voltage Output
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Module Resolution
Analog Data Bits
Two 16-bit words are reserved for the analog data whether you are using BCD or binary data
formatting. The 16 bits in the low word represent the analog data in binary format.
BCD Example
V2001
MSB
LSB
MSB
V2000
LSB
3 2 1 0 3 2 1 0 3 2 1 0 3 2 1 0
3 2 1 0
Binary Example
V2001
MSB
LSB
1 1 1 1 1 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
5 4 3 2 1 0
MSB
V2000
LSB
1 1 1 1 1 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
5 4 3 2 1 0
= data bits
Resolution Details
10–14
Since the module has 16-bit resolution, the analog signal is converted into 65,536 counts
ranging from 0 - 65,535 (216). A 0VDC signal would be 0 and a 10VDC signal would be
65535. This is equivalent to a binary value of 0000 0000 0000 0000 to 1111 1111 1111 1111,
or 000 to FFFF hexadecimal.
Each count can also be expressed in terms of the signal level by using the following equation:
0 – 10V
10V
Resolution =
H–L
65535
H = high limit of the signal range
L = low limit of the signal range
0V
0
65535
The following table shows the smallest detectable signal change that will result in one LSB
change in the data value for each increment of the signal change.
VDC Range
0 to 10VDC
Signal Span
(H – L)
Divide By
Smallest Detectable
Change
10 VDC
65535
153μV
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
F0-4AD2DA-1 4-CH.
IN/2-CH. OUT ANALOG
CURRENT COMBINATION
CHAPTER
11
In This Chapter...
Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11–2
Setting the Module Jumper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11–4
Connecting and Disconnecting the Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11–5
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11–6
Module Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11–7
Special V-memory Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11–8
Using the Pointer in Your Control Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11–11
Scale Conversions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11–13
Module Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11–16
Analog Input Ladder Logic Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11–17
Chapter 11: F0-4AD2DA-1 4-Ch. In/2-Ch. Out Analog Current Combination
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Module Specifications
11–2
The F0-4AD2DA-1 Analog Combination
module offers the following features:
• The analog input and output channels are
updated in one scan.
• The removable terminal block makes it possible
to remove the module without disconnecting the
field wiring.
• Analog inputs can be used as process variables for
the four (4) PID loops in the DL05 and the eight
(8) PID loops in the DL06 CPUs.
• On-board active analog filtering and RISC-like
microcontroller provide digital signal processing
to maintain precise analog measurements in noisy
environments.
R
PW
N
RU
U
CP
TX1
1
RX
TX2
2
RX
NOTE: The DL05 CPU’s analog feature for this module requires DirectSOFT32 Version 3.0c (or later) and
firmware version 3.30 (or later). The DL06 requires DirectSOFT32 version V4.0, build 16 (or later) and
firmware version 1.00 (or later). See our website for more information: www.automationdirect.com.
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
Chapter 11: F0-4AD2DA-1 4-Ch. In/2-Ch. Out Analog Current Combination
The following tables provide the specifications for the F0–4AD2DA–1 Analog Combination
Module. Review these specifications to make sure the module meets your application
requirements.
Input Specifications
Number of Channels
Input Range
Resolution
Step Response
Crosstalk
Active Low-pass Filtering
Input Impedance
Absolute Maximum Ratings
Converter type
Linearity Error (End to End)
Input Stability
Full Scale Calibration Error
(Offset error not included)
Offset Calibration Error
4, single ended (one common)
0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA (jumper selectable)
12 bit (1 in 4096) for 0-20mA, scaled for 4-20mA
25.0 mS (typ) to 95% of full step change
-80 dB, 1/2 count maximum *
-3 dB at 40Hz (-12 dB per octave)
125 Ohm _0.1%, 1/8 W current input
-30 mA to +30 mA current input
Successive approximation
±2 counts
± 1 count *
± 10 counts maximum @ 20mA current input*
± 5 counts maximum @ 0mA current input *
±.4% @ 25°C (77°F)
Maximum Inaccuracy
±.85% 0 to 60°C (32 to 140°F)
±100 ppm typical full scale calibration
Accuracy vs. Temperature
(including maximum offset change)
Recommended Fuse (external)
0.032 A Series 217 fast-acting, current inputs
*One count in the specification table is equal to one least significant bit of the analog data value (1 in 4096).
Output Specifications
Number of Channels
Output Range
Output Type
Resolution
Maximum Loop Voltage
Load (ohms)/Loop Power Supply
Linearity Error (end to end)
Conversion Settling Time
Full Scale Calibration Error
Note: Error depends on the load from
source terminal to ground.
2, single ended (one common)
4 to 20 mA or 0 to 20 mA (jumper selectable)
Current sourcing
12 bit (1 in 4096) for 0 to 20 mA, scaled for 4 to 20 mA
30 VDC
0-300/18-30V
± 2 counts (± 0.050% of full scale) maximum *
400µS max. full scale change
± 26 counts max. @ 300⏲ load
± 18 counts max. @ 250⏲ load
± 12 counts max. @ 125⏲ load
± 10 counts max. @ 300⏲ load
± 8 counts max @ 250⏲ load
Offset Calibration Error
± 6 counts max. @ 125⏲ load
300⏲ load 0.4% @ 60°C
Max. Full Scale Inaccuracy
250⏲ load 0 3%@60°C
(% of full scale) all errors included
125⏲ load 0.2% @ 60°C
* One count in the specification tables is equal to one least significant bit of the analog data value (1 in 4096).
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
11–3
Chapter 11: F0-4AD2DA-1 4-Ch. In/2-Ch. Out Analog Current Combination
General Specifications
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
the Module Jumper
8 SettingThe
position of the J2 jumper determines the input and output signal level. You can choose
between 0–20mA and 4–20mA signal levels. The module ships without the jumper connecting
9
the pins (pins not jumpered). In this position, the input and output signal level is 4–20mA. To
select 0–20mA signal level, install the jumper, connecting the pins.
10
11
12
The J2 jumper is shown in the 4–20mA
position (not installed). Install the jumper
13
for the 0–20mA position.
14
A
WARNING: Before removing the analog module or the terminal block on the face of the module,
B
disconnect power to the PLC and all field devices. Failure to disconnect power can result in damage to
the PLC and/or field devices.
C
D
PLC Update Rate
4 input channels per scan, 2 output channels per scan
16-bit Data Word
12 binary data bits
Operating Temperature
0 to 60°C (32 to 140°F)
Storage Temperature
-20 to 70°C (-4 to 158°F)
Relative Humidity
5 to 95% (non-condensing)
Environmental Air
No corrosive gases permitted
Vibration
MIL STD 810C 514.2
Shock
MIL STD 810C 516.2
Noise Immunity
NEMA ICS3-304
Power Budget Requirement
100 mA @ 5VDC (supplied by base)
Connector
Phoenix Mecano, Inc., Part No. AK1550/8-3.5 - green
Connector Wire Size
28 - 16 AWG
Connector Screw Torque
0.4 Nm
Connector Screwdriver Size
DN-SS1 (recommended)
J2
C14
11–4
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
Chapter 11: F0-4AD2DA-1 4-Ch. In/2-Ch. Out Analog Current Combination
Connecting and Disconnecting the Field Wiring
Wiring Guidelines
Your company may have guidelines for wiring and cable installation. If so, you should check
those before you begin the installation. Here are some general things to consider:
• Use the shortest wiring route whenever possible.
• Use shielded wiring and ground the shield at the transmitter source. Do not ground the shield at both
the module and the source.
• Do not run the signal wiring next to large motors, high current switches, or transformers. This may
cause noise problems.
• Route the wiring through an approved cable housing to minimize the risk of accidental damage.
Check local and national codes to choose the correct method for your application.
A separate transmitter power supply may be required, depending on the type of transmitter
being used.
This module has a removable connector to make wiring and module removal easier. To remove
the terminal block, disconnect power to the PLC and the field devices. Pull the terminal block
firmly until the connector separates from the module.
The analog module can be removed from the PLC by folding out the retaining tabs at the top
and bottom of the module. As the retaining tabs pivot upward and outward, the module’s
connector is lifted out of the PLC socket. Once the connector is free, you can lift the module
out of its slot.
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
11–5
Chapter 11: F0-4AD2DA-1 4-Ch. In/2-Ch. Out Analog Current Combination
11–6
Use the following diagram to connect the field wiring. If necessary, the terminal block can be
removed to make removal of the module possible without disturbing field wiring.
Typical User Wiring
Internal
Module
Wiring
See NOTE 1
–
–
CH1
2–wire
Current
Transmitter
+
CH2
2–wire
Current
Transmitter
+
CH3
4–wire
Current
+
Transmitter
A n a l o g In/Out
4–In/2–Out
0–20mA
4–20mA
IN
–
1
2
+
4
+
CH4
3–wire
+
Current
–
Transmitter
0V
1
CH 1 load
1
A to D
Converter
2
3
4
0V
1
maximum
Resistance
2
CH 2 load
24V
2
+V
OUT
F0–4AD2DA–1
maximum
Resistance
OUT
–
NOTE 1: Shields should be grounded at the signal
source.
NOTE 2: Connect all external power supply commons.
IN
3
–
Analog Switch
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Wiring Diagram
+
OV
Transmitter
Power Supply
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
Chapter 11: F0-4AD2DA-1 4-Ch. In/2-Ch. Out Analog Current Combination
Module Operation
Input/Output Channel Update Sequence
The DL05 and DL06 will read four channels of input data and two channels of output data
during each scan. Each CPU supports special V-memory locations that are used to manage the
data transfer. This is discussed in more detail beginning on the next page, “Special V–memory
Locations”.
Scan
DL05/DL06 PLC
Read Inputs
Execute Application Program
Read the data
Store data
Scan N
Ch 1, 2, 3, 4 IN; Ch 1,2 OUT
Scan N+1
Ch 1, 2, 3, 4 IN; Ch 1,2 OUT
Scan N+2
Ch 1, 2, 3, 4 IN; Ch 1,2 OUT
Scan N+3
Ch 1, 2, 3, 4 IN; Ch 1,2 OUT
Scan N+4
Ch 1, 2, 3, 4 IN; Ch 1,2 OUT
Write to Outputs
Analog Module Updates
Even though the channel updates to the CPU are synchronous with the CPU scan, the module
asynchronously monitors the analog transmitter signals and converts each signal into a 12-bit
binary representation. This enables the module to continuously provide accurate measurements
without slowing down the discrete control logic in the RLL program.
The module takes approximately 25 milliseconds to sense 95% of the change in the analog
signal. For the vast majority of applications, the process changes are much slower than these
updates.
NOTE: If you are comparing other manufacturers’ update times (step responses) with ours, please be aware
that some manufacturers refer to the time it takes to convert the analog signal to a digital value. Our analog
to digital conversion takes only a few microseconds. It is the settling time of the filter that is critical in
determining the full update time. Our update time specification includes the filter settling time.
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
11–7
Chapter 11: F0-4AD2DA-1 4-Ch. In/2-Ch. Out Analog Current Combination
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Special V-memory Locations
11–8
Formatting theModule Data
The DL05 and DL06 PLCs have three special V-memory locations assigned to their respective
option slots. These V-memory locations allow you to:
• specify the data format (binary or BCD)
• specify the number of input and output channels to scan.
• specify the V-memory locations to store the input data
• specify the V-memory locations to store the output data
DL05 Data Formatting
The table below shows the special V-memory locations used by the DL05 PLC for the analog
combination module.
Analog Combination Module
DL05 Special V-memory Locations
Data Type and Number of I/O Channels
Input Storage Pointer
Output Storage Pointer
V7700
V7701
V7702
Structure of V7700
V–memory location 7700 is used for identifying the number of output channels, the number
of input channels and the data type (binary or BCD). The low byte equals the number of output
channels and the high byte equals the number of input channels. Enter a 1 through 4 to select
the number of input channels and a 1 through 2 to select the number of output channels to be
used. A zero (0) entered for channel selection will cause the channel, either input or output, to
be inoperative.
Loading a constant of 402 into V7700 identifies
MSB
LSB
four input and two output analog channels, and
LOW BYTE
sets the I/O data type to BCD.
Loading a constant of 8482 into V7700 identifies
MSB
LSB
four input and two output analog channels, and
sets the I/O data type to binary.
HIGH BYTE
Structure of V7701
V7701 is a system parameter that points to a V-memory location used for storing analog input
data. The V–memory location loaded in V7701 is an octal number identifying the first Vmemory location for the analog input data. This V–memory location is user selectable. For
example, loading O2000 causes the pointer to write Ch 1’s data value to V2000, Ch 2’s data
value to V2001, CH 3’s data value to V2002 and Ch 4’s data value to V2003.
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
Chapter 11: F0-4AD2DA-1 4-Ch. In/2-Ch. Out Analog Current Combination
Structure of V7702
V7702 is a system parameter that points to a V-memory location used for storing analog output
data. The V–memory location loaded in V7702 is an octal number identifying the first Vmemory location for the analog output data. This V–memory location is user selectable. For
example, loading O2010 causes the pointer to read Ch 1’s data value at V2010 and Ch 2’s data
value at V2011.
You will find an example program that loads appropriate values to V7700, V7701and V7702
on page 11–11.
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
11–9
Chapter 11: F0-4AD2DA-1 4-Ch. In/2-Ch. Out Analog Current Combination
DL06 Data Formatting
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Special V-memory locations are assigned to the four option module slots of the DL06 PLC. The
table below shows these V–memory locations which can be used by the F0–4AD2DA–1.
Analog Combination Module
DL06 Special V-memory Locations
Slot No.
Data Type and Number of Channels
Input Storage Pointer
Output Storage Pointer
1
V700
V701
V702
2
V710
V711
V712
3
V720
V721
V722
4
V730
V731
V732
Setup Data Type and Number of Channels
V–memory locations 700, 710, 720 and 730 are used to set the number of output channels, the
number of input channels and the data type (binary or BCD). The low byte equals the number
of output channels and the high byte equals the number of input channels. Enter a 1 through
4 to select the number of input channels and a 1 through 2 to select the number of output
channels to be used. A zero (0) entered for channel selection will cause the channel, either input
or output, to be inoperative.
Consider the F0–4AD2DA–1 to be installed in
MSB
LSB
slot 2 . Loading a constant of 402 into V710
identifies four input and two output analog
LOW BYTE
channels, and sets the I/O data type to BCD.
MSB
LSB
Loading a constant of 8482 into V710 identifies
four input and two output analog channels, and
HIGH BYTE
sets the I/O data type to binary.
Input Storage Pointer Setup
V–memory locations 701, 711, 721 and 731 are special locations used as a storage pointer for
the analog input data. With the analog module installed in slot 2, the V–memory location
loaded in V711 is an octal number identifying the first user V-memory location to write the
analog input data to. This V–memory location is userselectable. For example, loading O2000
causes the pointer to write Ch 1’s data value to V2000, Ch 2’s data value to V2001, CH 3’s data
value to V2002 and Ch 4’s data value to V2003.
Output Storage Pointer Setup
11–10
V–memory locations 702, 712, 722 and 732 are special locations used as a storage pointer for
the analog output data. With the analog module installed in slot 2, the V–memory location
loaded in V712 is an octal number identifying the first user V-memory location to read the
analog output data from. This V–memory location is user selectable. For example, loading
O2010 causes the pointer to read Ch 1’s data value at V2010 and Ch 2’s data value at V2011.
You will find an example program that loads appropriate values to V710, V711 and V712 on
page 11–12.
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
Chapter 11: F0-4AD2DA-1 4-Ch. In/2-Ch. Out Analog Current Combination
Using the Pointer in Your Control Program
DL05 Pointer Method
The DL05 CPU examines the pointer values (the memory locations identified in V7700,
V7701 and V7702) on the first scan only.
The example program below shows how to setup these locations for 4 input channels and 2
output cahneels. This rung can be placed anywhere in the ladder program or in the initial stage
if you are using stage programming instructions.
This is all that is required to read the analog input and output data into V-memory locations.
Once the data is in V-memory you can perform math on the data, compare the data against
preset values, and so forth. V2000 and V2010 are used in the example, the V-memory locations
are user selectable.
SP0
LD
K402
- or LD
K8482
Loads a constant that specifies the number of channels to scan and the
data format. The upper byte selects the input data format (i.e. 0=BCD,
8=Binary) and the number of input channels (set to 4). The lower byte
selects the output data format (i.e. 0=BCD, 8=Binary) and the number
of output channels (set to 2).
The binary format is used for displaying data on some operator
interface units. The DL05 PLCs support binary math functions.
OUT
V7700
Special V-memory location assigned to the option slot contains the
data format and the number of channels to scan.
LDA
O2000
This loads an octal value for the first V-memory location that will be used
to store the incoming data. For example, the O2000 entered here would
designate the following addresses:
Ch1 – V2000, Ch2 – V2001, Ch3 – V2002, Ch4 – V2003
OUT
V7701
The octal address (O2000) is stored here. V7701 is assigned to the
option slot and acts as a pointer, which means the CPU will use the
octal value in this location to determine exactly where to store the
incoming data.
LDA
O2010
This loads an octal value for the first V-memory location that will be used
to store the output data. For example, the O2010 entered here would
designate the following addresses:
Ch1 – V2010, Ch2 – V2011
OUT
V7702
The octal address (O2010) is stored here. V7702 is assigned to the
option slot and acts as a pointer, which means the CPU will use the
octal value in this location to determine exactly where to get the output
data.
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
11–11
Chapter 11: F0-4AD2DA-1 4-Ch. In/2-Ch. Out Analog Current Combination
DL06 Pointer Method
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
11–12
Use the special V–memory table as a guide to setup the pointer values in the following example
for the DL06. Slot 1 is the left most option slot. The CPU will examine the pointer values at
these locations only after a mode transition, first scan only.
Analog Combination Module
DL06 Special V-memory Locations
Slot No.
No. of Channels
Input Pointer
Output Pointer
1
V700
V701
V702
2
V710
V711
V712
3
V720
V721
V722
4
V730
V731
V732
The F0–4AD2DA–1 can be installed in any available DL06 option slot. Using the example
program from the previous page, but changing the V–memory addresses, the ladder diagram
below shows how to setup these locations for 4 input channels and 2 output channels with the
module installed in slot 2 of the DL06. Use the above table to determine the pointer values if
locating the module in any of the other slot locations. Place this rung anywhere in the ladder
program or in the initial stage if you are using stage programming instructions.
Like the DL05 example, this logic is all that is required to read the analog input data into Vmemory locations. Once the data is in V-memory you can perform mathmatical calculations
with the data, compare the data against preset values, and so forth. V2000 and V2010 is used
in the example but you can use any user V-memory location.
SP0
LD
K402
- or LD
K8482
OUT
V710
LDA
O2000
OUT
V711
LDA
O2010
OUT
V712
Loads a constant that specifies the number of channels to scan and the
data format. The upper byte selects the input data format (i.e. 0=BCD,
8=Binary) and the number of input channels (set to 4). The lower byte
selects the output data format (i.e. 0=BCD, 8=Binary) and the number
of output channels (set to 2).
The binary format can be used for displaying data on some
operator interface units and on the DL06 LCD display. The DL06
PLCs support binary math functions.
Special V-memory location, V710, assigned to the option slot
contains the data format and the number of channels to scan.
This loads an octal value for the first V-memory location that will be used
to store the incoming data. For example, the O2000 entered here would
designate the following addresses:
Ch1 – V2000, Ch2 – V2001, Ch3 – V2002, Ch4 – V2003
The octal address (O2000) is stored here. V711 is assigned to the
option slot and acts as a pointer, which means the CPU will use the
octal value in this location to determine exactly where to store the
incoming data.
This loads an octal value for the first V-memory location that will be used
to store the output data. For example, the O2010 entered here would
designate the following addresses:
Ch1 – V2010, Ch2 – V2011
The octal address (O2010) is stored here. V712 is assigned to the
option slot and acts as a pointer, which means the CPU will use the
octal value in this location to determine exactly where to get the output
data.
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
Chapter 11: F0-4AD2DA-1 4-Ch. In/2-Ch. Out Analog Current Combination
Scale Conversions
Scaling the Input Data
Many applications call for measurements in
engineering units, which can be more meaningful
than raw data. Convert to engineering units using
the formula shown to the right.
You may have to make adjustments to the formula
depending on the scale you choose for the
engineering units.
Units = A H – L + L
65535
H = High limit of the engineering
unit range
L = Low limit of the engineering
unit range
A = Analog value (0 – 65535)
For example, if you wanted to measure pressure (PSI) from 0.0 to 100.0 then you would have
to multiply the analog value by 10 in order to imply a decimal place when you view the value
with the programming software or a handheld programmer. Notice how the calculations differ
when you use the multiplier.
Analog Value of 2024, slightly less than half scale, should yield 49.4 PSI
Example without multiplier
Units = A
H–L +L
65535
Units = 32375
Units = 49
100 – 0 + 0
65535
Example with multiplier
Units = 10 A H – L + L
65535
Units = 323750 100 – 0 + 0
65535
Units = 494
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
11–13
Chapter 11: F0-4AD2DA-1 4-Ch. In/2-Ch. Out Analog Current Combination
The Conversion Program
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
The following example shows how you would write the program to perform the engineering
unit conversion from input data formats 0–4095. This example assumes the raw input data read
at V2000 is in BCD format.
Note: this example uses SP1, which is always on. You could also use an X, C, etc. permissive
contact.
SP1
LD
V2000
When SP1 is on, load channel 1 data to the accumulator (for
a range of 0–1000).
MUL
K1000
Multiply the accumulator by 1000.
DIV
K4095
Divide the accumulator by 4095 (the module resolution).
OUT
V2100
Store the result in V2100.
Output Conversion Program
11–14
The following example program shows how you would write the program to perform the
engineering unit conversion to output data formats 0–4095. This example assumes you have
calculated or loaded the engineering unit values between 0–1000 in BCD format and stored
them in V2300 and V2301 for channels 1 and 2 respectively. Both the DL05 and DL06 offer
instructions that allow you to perform math operations using BCD format. It is usually easier
to perform any math calculations in BCD and then convert the value to binary before you send
the data to the module.
SP1
SP1
LD
V2300
The LD instruction loads the engineering units used with channel 1 into
the accumulator. This example assumes the numbers are BCD. Since
SP1 is used, this rung automatically executes on every scan. You could
also use an X, C, etc. permissive contact.
MUL
K4095
Multiply the accumulator by 4095.
DIV
K1000
Divide the accumulator by 1000 (this is the maximum value of
V2300).
OUT
V2010
Store the BCD result in V2010; the V–memory location set up to
send the data to Ch 1 output.
LD
V2301
The LD instruction loads the engineering units used with Ch 2 into the
accumulator. This example assumes the numbers are BCD. Since SP1 is
used, this rung automatically executes on every scan. You could also use
an X, C, etc. permissive contact.
MUL
K4095
DIV
K1000
OUT
V2011
Multiply the accumulator by 4095.
Divide the accumulator by 1000 (this is the maximum value of
V2301).
Store the BCD result in V2011; the V–memory location set up to send
the data to Ch 2 output.
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
Chapter 11: F0-4AD2DA-1 4-Ch. In/2-Ch. Out Analog Current Combination
Analog and Digital Value Conversions
Sometimes it is useful to convert between the signal levels and the digital values. This is
especially helpful during machine startup or troubleshooting. The following tables provide
formulas to make this conversion easier.
Range
4 to 20mA
If you know the digital value
A = 16D + 4
4095
For example, if you have measured the signal as 10mA,
you can use the formula to determine the digital value
(D) that will be stored in the V-memory location that
contains the data.
Range
0 to 20mA
If you know the digital value
A = 20D
4095
If you know the analog signal level
D = 4095 (A - 4)
16
D = 4095 (A – 4)
16
4095
D=
(10mA – 4)
16
D = (255.93) (6)
D = 1536
If you know the analog signal level
D = 4095 (A)
20
4095
This example shows the result for the 0 to 20mA range. D = 20 (A)
D = 4095 (10mA)
20
D = (204.75) (10)
D = 2047.5
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
11–15
Chapter 11: F0-4AD2DA-1 4-Ch. In/2-Ch. Out Analog Current Combination
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Module Resolution
Analog Data Bits
The first twelve bits represent the analog data in binary format.
Bit
0
1
2
3
4
5
Value
1
2
4
8
16
32
Bit
6
7
8
9
10
11
Value
64
128
256
512
1024
2048
MSB
LSB
1 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 0
= data bits
Resolution Details
11–16
Since the module has 12-bit resolution, the analog signal is converted from 4096 counts ranging
from 0–4095 (212). For example, a 4mA signal would be 0 and 20mA signal would be 4095.
This is equivalent to a binary value of 0000 0000 0000 to 1111 1111 1111, or 000 to FFF
hexadecimal. The diagrams below show how this relates to the two signal ranges.
4 – 20mA
20mA
Resolution = H – L
4095
H = high limit of the signal range
L = low limit of the signal range
4mA
0 Counts
4095
16mA / 4095 = 3.907μA per count
0 – 20mA
20mA
20mA / 4095 = 4.884μA per count
0mA
0 Counts
4095
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
Chapter 11: F0-4AD2DA-1 4-Ch. In/2-Ch. Out Analog Current Combination
Analog Input Ladder Logic Filter
PID Loops / Filtering:
Please refer to the “PID Loop Operation” chapter in the DL06 or DL05 User Manual for
information on the built-in PV filter (DL05/06) and the ladder logic filter (DL06 only) shown
below. A filter must be used to smooth the analog input value when auto tuning PID loops to
prevent giving a false indication of loop characteristics.
Smoothing the Input Signal (DL06 only):
The filter logic can also be used in the same way to smooth the analog input signal to help
stabilize PID loop operation or to stabilize the analog input signal value for use with an operator
interface display, etc.
Warning: The built-in and logic filters are not intended to smooth or filter noise generated by improper
field device wiring or grounding. Small amounts of electrical noise can cause the input signal to bounce
considerably. Proper field device wiring and grounding must be done before attempting to use the filters
to smooth the analog input signal.
Using Binary Data Format
SP1
LDD
V2000
Loads the analog signal, which is in binary format
and has been loaded from V–memory location
V2000 – 2001, into the accumulator. Contact SP1
is always on.
BTOR
Converts the binary value in the accumulator
to a real number.
SUBR
V1400
Subtracts the real number stored in location
V1400 from the real number in the accumulator,
and stores the result in the accumulator. V1400
is the designated workspace in this example.
MULR
R0.2
Multiplies the real number in the accumulator by
0.2 (the filter factor), and stores the result in the
accumulator. This is the filtered value. The filter
range is 0.1 to 0.9. Smaller filter factors
increase filtering. (1.0 eliminates filtering.)
ADDR
V1400
Adds the real number stored in location V1400
to the real number filtered value in the
accumulator, and stores the result in the accumulator.
OUTD
V1400
Copies the value in the accumulator to
location V1400.
RTOB
Converts the real number in the
accumulator to a binary value, and
stores the result in the accumulator.
OUT
V2100
Loads the binary number filtered value from
the accumulator into location V2100 to use in
your application or PID loop.
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
11–17
Chapter 11: F0-4AD2DA-1 4-Ch. In/2-Ch. Out Analog Current Combination
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
NOTE: Be careful not to do a multiple number conversion on a value. For example, if you are using the pointer
method in BCD format to get the analog value, it must be converted to binary (BIN) as shown below. If you
are using the pointer method in Binary format, the conversion to binary (BIN) instruction is not needed.
SP1
LD
V2000
Loads the analog signal, which is in BCD format
and has been loaded from V–memory location
V2000, into the accumulator. Contact SP1
is always on.
BIN
Converts the BCD value in the accumulator
to binary.
BTOR
Converts the binary value in the accumulator
to a real number.
SUBR
V1400
Subtracts the real number stored in location
V1400 from the real number in the accumulator,
and stores the result in the accumulator. V1400
is the designated workspace in this example.
MULR
R0.2
Multiplies the real number in the accumulator by
0.2 (the filter factor), and stores the result in the
accumulator. This is the filtered value. The filter
range is 0.1 to 0.9. Smaller filter factors
increase filtering. (1.0 eliminates filtering.)
ADDR
V1400
Adds the real number stored in location V1400
to the real number filtered value in the
accumulator, and stores the result in the accumulator.
OUTD
V1400
Copies the value in the accumulator to
location V1400.
RTOB
Converts the real number in the
accumulator to a binary value, and
stores the result in the accumulator.
BCD
Converts the binary value in the accumulator
to a BCD number. Note: The BCD instruction
is not needed to PID loop PV (loop PV is a
binary number).
OUT
V1402
Loads the BCD number filtered value from
the accumulator into location V1402 to use in
your application or PID loop.
Using BCD Data Format
11–18
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
F0-2AD2DA-2 2-CH.
IN/2-CH. OUT ANALOG
VOLTAGE COMBINATION
CHAPTER
12
In This Chapter...
Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12–2
Setting the Module Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12–4
Connecting and Disconnecting the Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12–5
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12–5
Module Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12–6
Special V-memory Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12–7
Using the Pointer in Your Control Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12–10
Scale Conversions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12–12
Module Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12–15
Analog Input Ladder Logic Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12–16
Chapter 12: F0-2AD2DA-2 2-Ch. In/2-Ch. Out Analog Voltage Combination
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Module Specifications
12–2
The F0-2AD2DA-2 Analog Combination module
offers the following features: The analog input and
output channels are updated in one scan.
• The module has a removable terminal block which
makes it possible to remove the module without
disconnecting the field wiring.
• Analog inputs can be used as process variables for the
four (4) PID loops in the DL05 and the eight (8) PID
loops in the DL06 CPUs.
• On-board active analog filtering and RISC-like
microcontroller provide digital signal processing to
maintain precise analog measurements in noisy
environments.
NOTE: The DL05 CPU’s analog feature for this module requires DirectSOFT32 Version 3.0c (or later) and
firmware version 3.30 (or later). The DL06 requires DirectSOFT32 version V4.0, build 16 (or later) and
firmware version 1.00 (or later). See our website for more information: www.automationdirect.com.
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
Chapter 12: F0-2AD2DA-2 2-Ch. In/2-Ch. Out Analog Voltage Combination
The following tables provide the specifications for the F0–2AD2DA–2 Analog Voltage
Combination Module. Review these specifications to make sure the module meets your
application requirements.
Input Specifications
Number of Channels
Input Range
Resolution
Step Response
Crosstalk
Active Low-pass Filtering
Input Impedance
Absolute Maximum Ratings
Linearity Error (End to End)
Input Stability
Gain Error
Offset Error
Maximum Inaccuracy
Accuracy vs. Temperature
2, single ended (one common)
0 to 5 VDC or 0 to 10 VDC (jumper selectable)
12 bit (1 in 4096)
10.0 mS to 95% of full step change
1/2 count maximum (-80db)*
-3 dB at 300Hz (-12 dB per octave)
Greater than 20K⏲
± 15V
±2 counts (0.025% of full scale) maximum*
± 1 count *
± 6 counts *
± 2 counts *
0.3% @ 25°C (77°F)
0.6% 0 to 60°C (32 to 140°F)
±100 ppm/°C typical
Output Specifications
Number of Channels
2, single ended (one common)
Output Range
0 to 5 VDC or 0 to 10 VDC (jumper selectable)
Resolution
12 bit (1 in 4096)
Conversion Settling Time
50µS for full scale change
Crosstalk
1/2 count maximum (-80db) *
Peak Output Voltage
± 15 VDC (power supply limited)
Offset Error
0.1% of range
Gain Error
0.4% of range
Linearity Error (end to end)
±1 count (0.075% of full scale) maximum*
Output Stability
± 2 counts*
2K⏲ minimum
Load Impedance
Load Capacitance
0.01 µF maximum
Accuracy vs. Temperature
±50 ppm/°C typical
* One count in the specification table is equal to one least significant bit of the analog data value (1 in 4096).
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
12–3
Chapter 12: F0-2AD2DA-2 2-Ch. In/2-Ch. Out Analog Voltage Combination
General Specifications
2 input channels per scan
2 output channels per scan
12 binary data bits
0 to 60° C (32 to 140° F)
-20 to 70° C (-4 to 158° F)
5 to 95% (non-condensing)
No corrosive gases permitted
MIL STD 810C 514.2
MIL STD 810C 516.2
NEMA ICS3-304
50 mA @ 5 VDC (supplied by base)
30 mA, 24 VDC ±10%
Phoenix Mecano, Inc. Part No. AK1550/8-3.5 - green
28 - 16 AWG
0.4 Nm
DN-SS1 (recommended)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
the Module Jumpers
8 SettingThe
position of the J2 jumpers determines the input and output signal levels. You can choose
between 0–5 VDC or 0–10 VDC. The module ships with the jumpers connecting the pins. In
9
this position, the input and output signal level is 0–5 VDC. To select 0–10 VDC signals, use
the jumper setting chart located on the module. One or more channels can be selected for 0–10
VDC input and output signal level by removing the jumper from the connecting pins of the
10
appropriate channel. This will allow you to have one channel selected for a 0–5 VDC signal and
another channel selected for a 0–10 VDC signal.
11
12
13
14
A
B
WARNING: Before removing the analog module or the terminal block on the face of the module,
disconnect power to the PLC and all field devices. Failure to disconnect power can result in damage to
the PLC and/or field devices.
C
D
PLC Update Rate
16-bit Data Word
Operating Temperature
Storage Temperature
Relative Humidity
Environmental Air
Vibration
Shock
Noise Immunity
Power Budget Requirement
External Power Supply
Connector
Connector Wire Size
Connector Screw Torque
Connector Screwdriver Size
J2, jumpers shown below, are
configured as, CH1 INPUT and
CH2 OUTPUT both set for 10V.
CH2 INPUT and CH1 OUTPUT
both set for 5V.
J2 (JUMPERS)
F0–2AD2DA–2
C20
CH1
CH2
CH1
12–4
OUT
CH2
Refer to jumper setting chart.
ON=5V
INPUT
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
Chapter 12: F0-2AD2DA-2 2-Ch. In/2-Ch. Out Analog Voltage Combination
Connecting and Disconnecting the Field Wiring
Wiring Guidelines
Your company may have guidelines for wiring and cable installation. If so, you should check
those before you begin the installation. Here are some general things to consider:
• Use the shortest wiring route whenever possible.
• Use shielded wiring and ground the shield at the transmitter source. Do not ground the shield at both
the module and the source.
• Do not run the signal wiring next to large motors, high current switches, or transformers. This may
cause noise problems.
• Route the wiring through an approved cable housing to minimize the risk of accidental damage.
Check local and national codes to choose the correct method for your application.
The F0–2AD2DA–2 will require an external power supply with a rating of 18.0–26.4VDC at
30 mA.
To remove the terminal block, disconnect power to the PLC and the field devices. Pull the
terminal block firmly until the connector separates from the module.
You can remove the analog module from the PLC by folding out the retaining tabs at the top
and bottom of the module. As the retaining tabs pivot upward and outward, the module’s
connector is lifted out of the PLC socket. Once the connector is free, you can lift the module
out of its slot.
Wiring Diagram
Use the following diagram to connect the field wiring. If necessary, the F0–2AD2DA–2
terminal block can be removed to make removal of the module possible without disturbing field
wiring.
Typical User Wiring
Transmitter
Power Supply
+
–
Internal
Module
Wiring
See NOTE 1
–
+
CH1
4–wire
Voltage
Transmitter
CH2
2–wire
Voltage
Transmitter
+
–
1
+
IN
2
–
0V
A n a l o g In/Out
2–In/2–Out
0–5V
0–10V
Analog Switch
1
OUT
2
CH 1 load
2k ohms
minimum
Resistance
0V
CH 2 load
2k ohms
minimum
Resistance
A to D
Converter
1
IN
2
0V
1
OUT
2
0V
V+
24V
0V
V+
24V
0V
F0–2AD2DA–2
NOTE 1: Shields should be grounded at the signal
source.
NOTE 2: Connect all external power supply commons.
–
+
18.0–26.4VDC
Power Supply
OV
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Module Supply
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
12–5
Chapter 12: F0-2AD2DA-2 2-Ch. In/2-Ch. Out Analog Voltage Combination
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Module Operation
12–6
Input/Output Channel Scanning Sequence
The DL05 and DL06 read two channels of input and two channels of output data during each
scan. The CPU supports special V-memory locations that are used to manage the data transfer.
This is discussed in more detail on the following page, “Special V–memory Locations”.
Scan
DL05/DL06 PLC
Read Inputs
Execute Application Program
Read the data
Store data
Scan N
Ch 1, 2 IN; Ch 1,2 OUT
Scan N+1
Ch 1, 2 IN; Ch 1,2 OUT
Scan N+2
Ch 1, 2 IN; Ch 1,2 OUT
Scan N+3
Ch 1, 2 IN; Ch 1,2 OUT
Scan N+4
Ch 1, 2 IN; Ch 1,2 OUT
Write to Outputs
Analog Module Updates
Even though the channel updates to the CPU are synchronous with the CPU scan, the module
asynchronously monitors the analog transmitter signals and converts each signal into a 12-bit
binary representation. This enables the module to continuously provide accurate measurements
without slowing down the discrete control logic in the RLL program.
The module takes approximately 10 milliseconds to sense 95% of the change in the analog
signal. For the vast majority of applications, the process changes are much slower than these
updates.
NOTE: If you are comparing other manufacturers’ update times (step responses) with ours, please be aware
that some manufacturers refer to the time it takes to convert the analog signal to a digital value. Our analog
to digital conversion takes only a few microseconds. It is the settling time of the filter that is critical in
determining the full update time. Our update time specification includes the filter settling time.
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
Chapter 12: F0-2AD2DA-2 2-Ch. In/2-Ch. Out Analog Voltage Combination
Special V-memory Locations
Formatting the Module Data
The DL05 and DL06 PLCs have three special V-memory locations assigned to their respective
option slots These V-memory locations allow you to:
• specify the data format (binary or BCD)
• specify the number of I/O channels to scan (2 input and 2 output channels for the F0–2AD2DA–2)
• specify the V-memory locations to store the input data
• specify the V-memory locations to store the output data
DL05 Data Formatting
The table below shows the special V-memory locations used by the DL05 PLC for the analog
combination modules.
Analog Combination Module
DL05 Special V-memory Locations
Data Type and Number of I/O Channels
Input Storage Pointer
Output Storage Pointer
V7700
V7701
V7702
Structure of V7700
V–memory location 7700 is used for identifying the number of output channels, the number
of input channels and the data type (binary or BCD). The low byte equals the number of output
channels and the high byte equals the number of input channels. Either a 1 or a 2 will be
entered to select the number of input and output channels to be used. A zero (0) entered for
channel selection will cause the channel, either input or output, to be inoperative.
Loading a constant of 202 into V7700 identifies
MSB
LSB
two input and two output analog channels, and
LOW BYTE
sets the I/O data type to BCD.
Loading a constant of 8282 into V7700
MSB
LSB
identifies two input and two output analog
channels, and sets the I/O data type to binary.
HIGH BYTE
Structure of V7701
V7701 is a system parameter that points to a V-memory location used for storing analog input
data. The V–memory location loaded in V7701 is an octal number identifying the first Vmemory location for the analog input data. This V–memory location is user selectable. For
example, loading O2000, using the LDA instruction,causes the pointer to write Ch 1’s data
value to V2000 and Ch 2’s data value to V2001.
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
12–7
Chapter 12: F0-2AD2DA-2 2-Ch. In/2-Ch. Out Analog Voltage Combination
Structure of V7702
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
12–8
V7702 is a system parameter that points to a V-memory location used for storing analog output
data. The V–memory location loaded in V7702 is an octal number identifying the first Vmemory location for the analog output data. This V–memory location is user selectable. For
example, loading O2010, using the LDA instruction, causes the pointer to write Ch 1’s
datavalue from V2010 and Ch 2’s data value from V2011.
You will find an example program that loads appropriate values to V7700, V7701 and V7702
on page 12–10.
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
Chapter 12: F0-2AD2DA-2 2-Ch. In/2-Ch. Out Analog Voltage Combination
DL06 Data Formatting
Special V–memory locations are assigned to the four option module slots of the DL06 PLC.
The table below shows these V–memory locations which can be used by the F0–2AD2DA–2.
Analog Combination Module
DL06 Special V-memory Locations
Slot No.
Number of Channels
Input Pointer
Output Pointer
1
V700
V701
V702
2
V710
V711
V712
3
V720
V721
V722
4
V730
V731
V732
Setup Data Type and Number of Channels
V–memory locations 700, 710, 720 and 730 are used for identifying the number of output
channels, the number of input channels and the data type (binary or BCD). The low byte equals
the number of output channels and the high byte equals the number of input channels. Enter
a 1 or 2 to select the number of input and output channels to be used. A zero (0) entered for
channel selection will cause the channel, either input or output, to be inoperative.
For example, with a module installed in slot 1 by
MSB
LSB
loading a constant of 202 into V700 identifies two
LOW BYTE
input and two output analog channels, and sets the
I/O data type to BCD.
MSB
LSB
And, loading a constant of 8282 into V700
identifies two input and two output analog
HIGH BYTE
channels, and sets the I/O data type to binary.
Input Storage Pointer
V–memory locations 701, 711, 721 and 731 are special locations used as a storage pointers for
the analog input data. With the analog module installed in slot 1, the V–memory location
loaded in V701 is an octal number identifying the first user V-memory location to read the
analog input data. This V–memory location is user selectable. For example, loading O2000,
using the LDA instruction, causes the pointer to write Ch 1’s data value to V2000 and Ch 2’s
data value to V2001.
Output Storage Pointer
V–memory locations 702, 712, 722 and 732 are special locations used as storage pointer for the
analog output data. With the analog module installed in slot 1, the V–memory location loaded
in V702 is an octal number identifying the first user V-memory location to write the analog
output data to. This V–memory location is user selectable. For example, loading O2010, using
the LDA instruction, causes the pointer to write Ch 1’s data value from V2010 and Ch 2’s data
value from V2011.
You will find an example program that loads appropriate values to V700, V701 and V702 on
page 12–11.
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
12–9
Chapter 12: F0-2AD2DA-2 2-Ch. In/2-Ch. Out Analog Voltage Combination
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Using the Pointer in Your Control Program
DL05 Pointer Method
12–10
The DL05 CPU examines the pointer values (the memory locations identified in V7700,
V7701 and V7702) on the first scan only.
The example program below shows how to setup these locations for 2 input channels and 2
output channels. This rung can be placed anywhere in the ladder program or in the initial stage
if you are using stage programming instructions.
This is all that is required to read the analog input data into V-memory locations. Once the data
is in V-memory you can perform mathematical calculations with the data, compare the data
against preset values, and so forth. V2000 and V2010 is used in the example but you can use
any user V-memory location.
SP0
LD
K202
- or LD
K8282
Load a constant that specifies the number of channels to scan and the
data format. The upper byte selects the input data format (i.e. 0=BCD,
8=Binary) and the number of input channels (set to either 1 or 2 for the
F0–2AD2DA–2). The lower byte selects the output data format (i.e.
0=BCD, 8=Binary) and the number of output channels (set to either 1
or 2).
The binary format is used for displaying data on some operator
interface units. The DL05 PLCs support binary math functions.
OUT
V7700
Special V-memory location assigned to the option slot contains the data
format and the number of channels to scan.
LDA
O2000
This loads an octal value for the first V-memory location that will be used
to store the incoming data. For example, the O2000 entered here using
the LDA instruction would designate the following addresses: Ch1 –
V2000, Ch2 – V2001
OUT
V7701
LDA
O2010
OUT
V7702
The octal address (O2000) is stored here. V7701 is assigned to the
option slot and acts as a pointer, which means the CPU will use the
octal value in this location to determine exactly where to store the
incoming data.
This loads an octal value for the first V-memory location that will be used
to store the output data. For example, the O2010 entered here using the
LDA instruction would designate the following addresses: Ch1 – V2010,
Ch2 – V2011
The octal address (O2010) is stored here. V7702 is assigned to the
option slot and acts as a pointer , which means the CPU will use the
octal value in this location to determine exactly where to store the output
data.
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
Chapter 12: F0-2AD2DA-2 2-Ch. In/2-Ch. Out Analog Voltage Combination
DL06 Pointer Method
Use the special V–memory table as a guide to setup the pointer values in the following example
for the DL06. Slot 1 is the left most option slot. The CPU will examine the pointer values at
these locations only after a mode transition, first scan only.
Analog Combination Module
DL06 Special V-memory Locations
Slot No.
Number of Channels
Input Pointer
Output Pointer
1
V700
V701
V702
2
V710
V711
V712
3
V720
V721
V722
4
V730
V731
V732
The F0–2AD2DA–2 can be installed in any available DL06 option slot. Using the example
program from the previous page, but changing the V–memory addresses, the ladder diagram
below shows how to setup these locations for 2 input channels and 2 output channels with the
module installed in slot1 of the DL06. Use the above table to determine the pointer values if
locating the module in any of the other slot locations. Place this rung anywhere in the ladder
program or in the initial stage if you are using stage programming instructions.
Like the DL05 example, this logic is all that is required to read the analog input data into Vmemory locations. Once the data is in V-memory you can perform mathmatical calculations
with the data, compare the data against preset values, and so forth. V2000 and V2010 is used
in the example but you can use any user V-memory location.
SP0
LD
K202
- or LD
K8282
Loads a constant that specifies the number of channels to scan and the
data format. The upper byte selects the input data format (i.e. 0=BCD,
8=Binary) and the number of input channels (set to either 1 or 2 for the
F0–2AD2DA–2). The lower byte selects the output data format (i.e.
0=BCD, 8=Binary) and the number of output channels (set to either 1
or 2).
The binary format can be used for displaying data on some
operator interface units and on the DL06 LCD display. The DL06
PLCs support binary math functions.
OUT
V700
Special V-memory location assigned to the first option slot contains the
data format and the number of channels to scan.
LDA
O2000
This loads an octal value for the first V-memory location that will be used
to store the incoming data. For example, O2000 entered here using the
LDA instruction would designate the following addresses: Ch1 – V2000,
Ch2 – V2001
OUT
V701
LDA
O2010
OUT
V702
The octal address (O2000) is stored here. V701 is assigned to the first
option slot and acts as a pointer, which means the CPU will use the
octal value in this location to determine exactly where to store the incoming data.
This loads an octal value for the first V-memory location that will be used
to store the output data. For example, O2010 entered here using the
LDA instruction would designate the following addresses: Ch1 – V2010,
Ch2 – V2011
The octal address (O2010) is stored here. V702 is assigned to the first
first slot and acts as a pointer , which means the CPU will use the
octal value in this location to determine exactly where to store the output
data.
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
12–11
Chapter 12: F0-2AD2DA-2 2-Ch. In/2-Ch. Out Analog Voltage Combination
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Scale Conversions
Scaling the Input Data
12–12
Many applications call for measurements in
engineering units, which can be more meaningful than
raw data. Convert to engineering units using the
formula shown to the right.
You may have to make adjustments to the formula
depending on the scale you choose for the engineering
units.
Units = A H – L + L
4095
H = High limit of the engineering
unit range
L = Low limit of the engineering
unit range
A = Analog value (0 – 4095)
For example, if you wanted to measure pressure (PSI) from 0.0 to 100.0 then you would have
to multiply the analog value by 10 in order to imply a decimal place when you view the value
with the programming software or a handheld programmer. Notice how the calculations differ
when you use the multiplier.
Analog Value of 2024, slightly less than half scale, should yield 49.4 PSI.
Example without multiplier
Example with multiplier
Units = A H – L + L
4095
Units = 10 A H – L + L
4095
Units = 2024 100 – 0 + 0
4095
Units = 20240 100 – 0 + 0
4095
Units = 49
Units = 494
Handheld Display
Handheld Display
V 2001 V 2000
0000 0049
V 2001 V 2000
0000 0494
This value is more accurate
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
Chapter 12: F0-2AD2DA-2 2-Ch. In/2-Ch. Out Analog Voltage Combination
The Conversion Program
The following example shows how you would write the program to perform the engineering
unit conversion from the input data format 0–4095. This example assumes the raw input data
read at V2000 is in BCD format.
Note: this example uses SP1, which is always on. You
could also use an X, C, etc. permissive contact.
SP1
LD
V2000
When SP1 is on, load Ch 1 data to the accumulator.
MUL
K1000
Multiply the accumulator by 1000 (for the range of 0–1000).
DIV
K4095
Divide the accumulator by 4095(the module resolution).
OUT
V2100
Store the result in V2100.
Output Conversion Program
The following example program shows how you would write the program to convert the
engineering unit to the output data format 0–4095. This example assumes you have calculated
or loaded the engineering unit values between 0–1000 in BCD format and stored them in
V2300 and V2301 for channels 1 and 2 respectively. Both the DL05 and DL06 offer
instructions that allow you to perform math operations using BCD format. It is usually easier
to perform any math calculations in BCD and then convert the value to binary before you send
the data to the module.
SP1
SP1
LD
V2300
The LD instruction loads the engineering units used with channel 1 into
the accumulator. This example assumes the numbers are BCD. Since
SP1 is used, this rung automatically executes on every scan. You could
also use an X, C, etc. permissive contact.
MUL
K4095
Multiply the accumulator by 4095.
DIV
K1000
Divide the accumulator by 1000 (this is the maximum value of
V2300).
OUT
V2010
Store the BCD result in V2010; the V–memory location set up to
send the data to Ch 1 output.
LD
V2301
The LD instruction loads the engineering units used with Ch 2 into the
accumulator. This example assumes the numbers are BCD. Since SP1 is
used, this rung automatically executes on every scan. You could also use
an X, C, etc. permissive contact.
MUL
K4095
DIV
K1000
OUT
V2011
Multiply the accumulator by 4095.
Divide the accumulator by 1000 (this is the maximum value of
V2301).
Store the BCD result in V2011; the V–memory location set up to send
the data to Ch 2 output.
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
12–13
Chapter 12: F0-2AD2DA-2 2-Ch. In/2-Ch. Out Analog Voltage Combination
Analog and Digital Value Conversions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
12–14
Sometimes it is useful to convert between the signal levels and the digital values. This is
especially helpful during machine startup or troubleshooting. The following table provides
formulas to make this conversion easier.
Range
If you know the digital value
If you know the analog signal level
0 to 5V
A = 5D
4095
D = 4095 (A)
5
0 to 10V
A = 10D
4095
D = 4095 (A)
10
For example, if you are using the 0–10V range and
you need a 6V signal level, use this formula to
determine the digital value (D) that will be stored in
the V-memory location that contains the data.
D = 4095 (A)
10
4095
(6V)
D=
10
D = (409.5) (6)
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
D = 2457
Chapter 12: F0-2AD2DA-2 2-Ch. In/2-Ch. Out Analog Voltage Combination
Module Resolution
Analog Data Bits
The first twelve bits represent the analog data for both inputs and outputs in binary format.
Bit
0
1
2
3
4
5
Value
1
2
4
8
16
32
Bit
6
7
8
9
10
11
Value
64
128
256
512
1024
2048
MSB
LSB
1 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 0
= data bits
Resolution Details
Since the module has 12-bit resolution for both inputs and outputs, the analog signal is either
converted into 4096 counts or a count value will produce a proportional analog output. In
either situation the count range will be from 0–4095 (212). For example, with an output range
of 0 to 10V, send a 0 to get a 0V signal, and send 4095 to get a 10V signal. This is equivalent
to a binary value of 0000 0000 0000 to 1111 1111 1111, or 000 to FFF hexadecimal.
Each count can also be expressed in terms of the signal level by using the following equation:
0 – 10V
10V
Resolution = H – L
4095
H = high limit of the signal range
L = low limit of the signal range
0V
0
4095
The following table shows the smallest detectable signal change that will result in one LSB
change in the data or the amount of change in the output signal that each increment of the
count value will produce.
Voltage Range
0 to 5V
0 to 10V
Signal Span
Divide By
Smallest detectable
or Produced Change
5 volts
10 volts
4095
4095
1.22 mV
2.44 mV
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
12–15
Chapter 12: F0-2AD2DA-2 2-Ch. In/2-Ch. Out Analog Voltage Combination
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Analog Input Ladder Logic Filter
PID Loops / Filtering:
Please refer to the “PID Loop Operation” chapter in the DL06 or DL05 User Manual for
information on the built-in PV filter (DL05/06) and the ladder logic filter (DL06 only) shown
below. A filter must be used to smooth the analog input value when auto tuning PID loops to
prevent giving a false indication of loop characteristics.
Smoothing the Input Signal (DL06 only):
The filter logic can also be used in the same way to smooth the analog input signal to help
stabilize PID loop operation or to stabilize the analog input signal value for use with an operator
interface display, etc.
Warning: The built-in and logic filters are not intended to smooth or filter noise generated by improper
field device wiring or grounding. Small amounts of electrical noise can cause the input signal to bounce
considerably. Proper field device wiring and grounding must be done before attempting to use the filters
to smooth the analog input signal.
Using Binary Data Format
12–16
SP1
LD
V2000
Loads the analog signal, which is in binary format
and has been loaded from V-memory location
V2000, into the accumulator. Contact SP1 is
always on.
BTOR
Converts the binary value in the accumulator
to a real number.
SUBR
V1400
Subtracts the real number stored in location
V1400 from the real number in the accumulator,
and stores the result in the accumulator. V1400
is the designated workspace in this example.
MULR
R0.2
Multiplies the real number in the accumulator by
0.2 (the filter factor), and stores the result in the
accumulator. This is the filtered value. The filter
range is 0.1 to 0.9. Smaller filter factors
increases filtering. (1.0 eliminates filtering).
ADDR
V1400
Adds the real number stored in
location V1400 to the real number
filtered value in the accumulator, and
stores the result in the accumulator.
OUTD
V1400
Copies the value in the accumulator to
location V1400.
RTOB
Converts the real number in the
accumulator to a binary value, and
stores the result in the accumulator.
OUT
V1402
Loads the binary number filtered value from
the accumulator into location V1402 to use in
your application or PID loop.
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
Chapter 12: F0-2AD2DA-2 2-Ch. In/2-Ch. Out Analog Voltage Combination
NOTE: Be careful not to do a multiple number conversion on a value. For example, if you are using the pointer
method in BCD format to get the analog value, it must be converted to binary (BIN) as shown below. If you
are using the pointer method in Binary format, the conversion to binary (BIN) instruction is not needed.
Using BCD Data Format
SP1
LDD
V2000
Loads the analog signal, which is in BCD format
and has been loaded from V-memory location
V2000, into the accumulator. Contact SP1 is
always on.
BIN
Converts a BCD value in the accumulator to
binary.
BTOR
Converts the binary value in the accumulator
to a real number.
SUBR
V1400
Subtracts the real number stored in location
V1400 from the real number in the accumulator,
and stores the result in the accumulator. V1400
is the designated workspace in this example.
MULR
R0.2
Multiplies the real number in the accumulator by
0.2 (the filter factor), and stores the result in the
accumulator. This is the filtered value. The filter
range is 0.1 to 0.9. Smaller filter factors
increases filtering. (1.0 eliminates filtering).
ADDR
V1400
Adds the real number stored in
location V1400 to the real number
filtered value in the accumulator, and
stores the result in the accumulator.
OUTD
V1400
Copies the value in the accumulator to
location V1400.
RTOB
Converts the real number in the
accumulator to a binary value, and
stores the result in the accumulator.
BCD
OUTD
V1402
Converts the binary value in the accumulator
to a BCD number. Note: The BCD instruction
is not needed for PID loop PV (loop PV is a
binary number).
Loads the BCD number filtered value from
the accumulator into location V1402 to use in
your application or PID loop.
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
12–17
F0-4AD2DA-2 4-CH.
IN/2-CH. OUT ANALOG
VOLTAGE COMBINATION
CHAPTER
13
In This Chapter...
Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13–2
Setting the Module Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13–4
Connecting and Disconnecting the Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13–5
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13–5
Module Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13–6
Special V-memory Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13–7
Using the Pointer in Your Control Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13–10
Scale Conversions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13–12
Module Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13–15
Analog Input Ladder Logic Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13–16
Chapter 13: F0-4AD2DA-2 4-Ch. In/2 Ch. Out Analog Voltage Combination
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Module Specifications
13–2
The F0-4AD2DA-2 Analog Combination module
offers the following features:
• The analog input and output channels are updated in
one scan.
• The removable terminal block makes it possible to
remove the module without disconnecting the field
wiring.
• Analog inputs can be used as process variables for the
four (4) PID loops in the DL05 CPU and the eight (8)
PID loops in the DL06 CPUs.
• On-board active analog filtering and RISC-like
microcontroller provide digital signal processing to
maintain precise analog measurements in noisy
environments.
NOTE: The DL05 CPU’s analog feature for this module requires DirectSOFT32 Version 3.0c (or later) and
firmware version 3.30 (or later). The DL06 requires DirectSOFT32 version V4.0, build 16 (or later) and
firmware version 1.00 (or later). See our website for more information: www.automationdirect.com.
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
Chapter 13: F0-4AD2DA-2 4-Ch. In/2 Ch. Out Analog Voltage Combination
The following tables provide the specifications for the F0–4AD2DA–2 Analog Combination
Module. Review these specifications to make sure the module meets your application
requirements.
Input Specifications
Number of Channels
Input Range
Resolution
Step Response
Crosstalk
Active Low-pass Filtering
Input Impedance
Absolute Maximum Ratings
Linearity Error (End to End)
Input Stability
Gain Error
Offset Error
Maximum Inaccuracy
Accuracy vs. Temperature
4, single ended (one common)
0 to 5 VDC or 0 to 10 VDC (jumper selectable)
12 bit (1 in 4096)
10.0 mS to 95% of full step change
-80 dB, 1/2 count maximum*
-3 dB at 300Hz (-12 dB per octave)
Greater than 20K⏲
± 15V
± 2 counts maximum*
± 1 count *
± 6 counts maximum *
± 2 counts maximum*
±0.3% @ 25°C (77°F)
±0.6% 0 to 60°C (32 to 140°F)
±100 ppm/°C typical
Output Specifications
Number of Channels
2, single ended (one common)
Output Range
0 to 5 VDC or 0 to 10 VDC (jumper selectable)
Resolution
12 bit (1 in 4096)
Conversion Settling Time
50µS for full scale change
Crosstalk
-80 db, 1/2 count maximum*
Peak Output Voltage
± 15 VDC (power supply limited)
Offset Error
0.1% of range
Gain Error
0.4% of range
Linearity Error (end to end)
±1 count (0.075% of full scale) maximum*
Output Stability
± 2 counts*
2K⏲ maximum
Load Impedance
Load Capacitance
0.01 µF maximum
Accuracy vs. Temperature
±50 ppm/°C typical
* One count in the specification table is equal to one least significant bit of the analog data value (1 in 4096).
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
13–3
Chapter 13: F0-4AD2DA-2 4-Ch. In/2 Ch. Out Analog Voltage Combination
General Specifications
4 input channels per scan
2 output channels per scan
12 binary data bits
0 to 60° C (32 to 140° F)
-20 to 70° C (-4 to 158° F)
5 to 95% (non-condensing)
No corrosive gases permitted
MIL STD 810C 514.2
MIL STD 810C 516.2
NEMA ICS3-304
100 mA @ 5 VDC (supplied by base)
Phoenix Mecano, Inc. Part No. AK1550/8-3.5 - green
28 - 16 AWG
0.4 Nm
DN-SS1 (recommended)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7 Setting the Module Jumpers
The position of the J2 jumpers determines the input and output signal levels. You can choose
8
between 0–5VDC or 0–10VDC. The module ships with the jumpers installed connecting the
pins. In this position, the input and output signal level is 0–5VDC. To select 0–10VDC signals,
9
use the jumper selection chart located on the module. One or more channels can be selected for
0–10 VDC input and output signal level by removing the jumper from the connecting pin of
the appropriate channel. This will allow you to have one channel selected for a 0–5 VDC signal
10
and another channel selected for a 0–10 VDC signal.
11
12
13
14
A
B
WARNING: Before removing the analog module or the terminal block on the face of the module,
disconnect power to the PLC and all field devices. Failure to disconnect power can result in damage to
the PLC and/or field devices.
C
D
PLC Update Rate
16-bit Data Word
Operating Temperature
Storage Temperature
Relative Humidity
Environmental Air
Vibration
Shock
Noise Immunity
Power Budget Requirement
Connector
Connector Wire Size
Connector Screw Torque
Connector Screwdriver Size
J2, jumpers shown below, are
configured as, CH1 and CH4
INPUTs and CH2 OUTPUT set
for 10V. CH2 and CH3 INPUTs
and CH1 OUTPUT set for 5V.
J2
CH1
CH2
CH3 INPUTS
CH4
CH1
CH2 OUTPUTS
Refer to jumper selection chart.
ON=0–5V
RANGE
C14
13–4
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
Chapter 13: F0-4AD2DA-2 4-Ch. In/2 Ch. Out Analog Voltage Combination
Connecting and Disconnecting the Field Wiring
Wiring Guidelines
Your company may have guidelines for wiring and cable installation. If so, you should check
those before you begin the installation. Here are some general things to consider:
• Use the shortest wiring route whenever possible.
• Use shielded wiring and ground the shield at the transmitter source. Do not ground the shield at both
the module and the source.
• Do not run the signal wiring next to large motors, high current switches, or transformers. This may
cause noise problems.
• Route the wiring through an approved cable housing to minimize the risk of accidental damage.
Check local and national codes to choose the correct method for your application.
A separate transmitter power supply may be required, depending on the type of transmitter
being used. This module has a removable connector to make wiring and module removal easier.
To remove the terminal block, disconnect power to the PLC and the field devices. Pull the
terminal block firmly until the connector separates from the module.
The analog module can be removed from the PLC by folding out the retaining tabs at the top
and bottom of the module. As the retaining tabs pivot upward and outward, the module’s
connector is lifted out of the PLC socket. Once the connector is free, you can lift the module
out of its slot.
Wiring Diagram
Use the following diagram to connect the field wiring. If necessary, the terminal block can be
removed to make removal of the module possible without disturbing field wiring.
Typical User Wiring
Internal
Module
Wiring
See NOTE 1
–
CH1
2–wire
Voltage
Transmitter
CH2
2–wire
Voltage
Transmitter
–
+
CH4
3–wire
Voltage
Transmitter
–
1
+
2
+
IN
3
–
+
4
+
–
0V
1
CH 1 load
2k ohms
minimum
Resistance
1
A to D
Converter
2
3
4
0V
1
2
2
0V
CH 2 load
2k ohms
minimum
Resistance
0V
OUT
F0–4AD2DA–2
OUT
–
NOTE 1: Shields should be grounded at the signal
source.
NOTE 2: Connect all external power supply commons.
A n a l o g In/Out
4–In/2–Out
0–5V
0–10V
IN
Analog Switch
CH3
4–wire
Voltage
Transmitter
+
+
OV
Transmitter
Power Supply
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
13–5
Chapter 13: F0-4AD2DA-2 4-Ch. In/2 Ch. Out Analog Voltage Combination
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Module Operation
13–6
Input/Output Channel Update Sequence
The DL05 and DL06 read four channels of input data and two channels of output data during
each scan. The CPU supports special V-memory locations that are used to manage the data
transfer. This is discussed in more detail on the next page, “Special V–memory Locations”.
Scan
DL05/DL06 PLC
Read Inputs
Execute Application Program
Read the data
Store data
Scan N
Ch 1, 2, 3, 4 IN; Ch 1,2 OUT
Scan N+1
Ch 1, 2, 3, 4 IN; Ch 1,2 OUT
Scan N+2
Ch 1, 2, 3, 4 IN; Ch 1,2 OUT
Scan N+3
Ch 1, 2, 3, 4 IN; Ch 1,2 OUT
Scan N+4
Ch 1, 2, 3, 4 IN; Ch 1,2 OUT
Write to Outputs
Analog Module Updates
Even though the channel updates to the CPU are synchronous with the CPU scan, the module
asynchronously monitors the analog transmitter signals and converts each signal into a 12-bit
binary representation. This enables the module to continuously provide accurate measurements
without slowing down the discrete control logic in the RLL program.
The module takes approximately 10 milliseconds to sense 95% of the change in the analog
signal. For the vast majority of applications, the process changes are much slower than these
updates.
NOTE: If you are comparing other manufacturers’ update times (step responses) with ours, please be aware
that some manufacturers refer to the time it takes to convert the analog signal to a digital value. Our analog
to digital conversion takes only a few microseconds. It is the settling time of the filter that is critical in
determining the full update time. Our update time specification includes the filter settling time.
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
Chapter 13: F0-4AD2DA-2 4-Ch. In/2 Ch. Out Analog Voltage Combination
Special V-memory Locations
Formatting the Module Data
The DL05 and DL06 PLCs have three special V-memory locations assigned to their respective
option slots. These V-memory locations allow you to:
• specify the data format (binary or BCD)
• specify the number of input and output channels to scan.
• specify the V-memory locations to store the input data
• specify the V-memory locations to store the output data
DL05 Data Formatting
The table below shows the special V-memory locations which are used by the DL05 PLC for the
F0–4AD2DA–2.
Analog Combination Module
DL05 Special V-memory Locations
Data Type and Number of I/O Channels
Input Storage Pointer
Output Storage Pointer
V7700
V7701
V7702
Structure of V7700
V–memory location 7700 is used for identifying the number of output channels, the number
of input channels and the data type (binary or BCD). The low byte equals the number of output
channels and the high byte equals the number of input channels. Enter a 1 through 4 to select
the number of input channels and a 1 through 2 to select the number of output channels to be
used. A zero (0) entered for channel selection will cause the channel, either input or output, to
be inoperative.
Loading a constant of 402 into V7700 identifies four
MSB
LSB
input and two output analog channels, and sets the I/O
LOW BYTE
data type to BCD.
Loading a constant of 8482 into V7700 identifies four
MSB
LSB
input and two output analog channels, and sets the I/O
data type to binary.
HIGH BYTE
Structure of V7701
V7701 is a system parameter that points to a V-memory location used for storing analog input
data. The V–memory location loaded in V7701 is an octal number identifying the first Vmemory location for the analog input data. This V–memory location is user selectable. For
example, loading O2000 using the LDA instruction causes the pointer to write Ch 1’s data
value to V2000, Ch 2’s data value to V2001, CH 3’s data value to V2002 and Ch 4’s data value
to V2003.
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
13–7
Chapter 13: F0-4AD2DA-2 4-Ch. In/2 Ch. Out Analog Voltage Combination
Structure of V7702
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
13–8
V7702 is a system parameter that points to a V-memory location used for storing analog output
data. The V–memory location loaded in V7702 is an octal number identifying the first Vmemory location for the analog output data. This V–memory location is user selectable. For
example, loading O2010 using the LDA instruction causes the pointer to read Ch 1’s data value
at V2010 and Ch 2’s data value at V2011.
You will find an example program that loads appropriate values to V7700, V7701 and V7702
on page 13–10.
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
Chapter 13: F0-4AD2DA-2 4-Ch. In/2 Ch. Out Analog Voltage Combination
DL06 Data Formatting
Special V–memory locations are assigned to the four option module slots of the DL06 PLC.
The table below shows these V–memory locations which can be used for the F0–4AD2DA–2.
Analog Combination Module
DL06 Special V-memory Locations
Slot No.
Number of Channels
Input Pointer
Output Pointer
1
V700
V701
V702
2
V710
V711
V712
3
V720
V721
V722
4
V730
V731
V732
Setup Data Type and Number of Channels
V–memory location 700, 710, 720 and 730 are used for identifying the number of output
channels, the number of input channels and the data type (binary or BCD). The low byte equals
the number of output channels and the high byte equals the number of input channels. Enter
a 1 through 4 to select the number of input channels and a 1 or 2 to select the number of output
channels to be used. A zero (0) entered for channel selection will cause the channel, either input
or output, to be inoperative.
For example, with a module installed in slot 4 by
MSB
LSB
loading a constant of 402 into V730 identifies four
input and two output analog channels, and sets the
LOW BYTE
I/O data type to BCD.
MSB
LSB
Or, loading a constant of 8482 into V730 identifies
four input and two output analog channels, and
HIGH BYTE
sets the I/O data type to binary.
Input Storage Pointer Setup
V-memory locations 701, 711, 721 and 731 are special locations used as storage pointers for the
analog input data. With the analog module installed in slot 4, the V–memory location loaded
in V731, for instance, is an octal number identifying the first user V-memory location to read
the analog input data. This V–memory location is user selectable. For example, loading O2000
using the LDA instruction causes the pointer to write Ch 1’s data value to V2000, Ch 2’s data
value to V2001, CH 3’s data value to V2002 and Ch 4’s data value to V2003.
Output Storage Pointer Setup
V-memory locations 702, 712, 722 and 732 are special locations used as storage pointers for the
analog output data. With the analog module installed in slot 4, the V–memory location loaded
in V732 is an octal number identifying the first user V-memory location to write the analog
output data to. This V–memory location is user selectable. For example, loading O2010 using
the LDA instruction causes the pointer to read Ch 1’s data value at V2010 and Ch 2’s data value
at V2011.
You will find an example program that loads appropriate values to V700, V701 and V702 on
page 13–11.
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
13–9
Chapter 13: F0-4AD2DA-2 4-Ch. In/2 Ch. Out Analog Voltage Combination
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Using the Pointer in Your Control Program
DL05 Pointer Method
13–10
The DL05 CPU examines the pointer values (the memory locations identified in V7700,
V7701 and V7702) on the first scan only.
The example program below shows how to setup these locations for 4 input channels and 2
output channels. This rung can be placed anywhere in the ladder program or in the initial stage
if you are using stage programming instructions.
This is all that is required to read the analog input data into V-memory locations. Once the data
is in V-memory you can perform math on the data, compare the data against preset values, and
so forth. V2000 and V2010 is used in the example but you can use any user V-memory location.
SP0
LD
K402
- or LD
K8482
Loads a constant that specifies the number of channels to scan and the
data format. The upper byte selects the input data format (i.e. 0=BCD,
8=Binary) and the number of input channels (set to 4). The lower byte
selects the output data format (i.e. 0=BCD, 8=Binary) and the number
of output channels (set to 2).
The binary format is used for displaying data on some operator
interface units. The DL05 PLCs support binary math functions.
OUT
V7700
Special V-memory location assigned to the option slot contains the
data format and the number of channels to scan.
LDA
O2000
This loads an octal value for the first V-memory location that will be used
to store the incoming data. For example, the O2000 entered here would
designate the following addresses:
Ch1 – V2000, Ch2 – V2001, Ch3 – V2002, Ch4 – V2003
OUT
V7701
The octal address (O2000) is stored here. V7701 is assigned to the
option slot and acts as a pointer , which means the CPU will use the
octal value in this location to determine exactly where to store the
incoming data.
LDA
O2010
This loads an octal value for the first V-memory location that will be used
to store the output data. For example, the O2010 entered here would
designate the following addresses:
Ch1 – V2010, Ch2 – V2011
OUT
V7702
The octal address (O2010) is stored here. V7702 is assigned to the
option slot and acts as a pointer , which means the CPU will use the
octal value in this location to determine exactly where to get the output
data.
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
Chapter 13: F0-4AD2DA-2 4-Ch. In/2 Ch. Out Analog Voltage Combination
DL06 Pointer Method
Use the special V–memory table as a guide to setup the pointer values in the following example
for the DL06. Slot 1 is the left most option slot. The CPU will examine the pointer values at
these locations only after a mode transition, first scan only.
Analog Combination Module
DL06 Special V-memory Locations
Slot No.
Number of Channels
Input Pointer
Output Pointer
1
V700
V701
V702
2
V710
V711
V712
3
V720
V721
V722
4
V730
V731
V732
The F0–4AD2DA–2 can be installed in any available DL06 option slot. Using the example
program from the previous page, but changing the V–memory addresses, the ladder diagram
below shows how to setup these locations for 4 input channels and 2 output channels with the
module installed in slot1 of the DL06. Use the above table to determine the pointer values if
locating the module in any of the other slot locations. Place this rung anywhere in the ladder
program or in the initial stage if you are using stage programming instructions.
Like the DL05 example, this logic is all that is required to read the analog input data into Vmemory locations. Once the data is in V-memory you can perform mathmatical calculations
with the data, compare the data against preset values, and so forth. V2000 and V2010 is used
in the example but you can use any user V-memory location.
SP0
LD
K402
- or LD
K8482
Loads a constant that specifies the number of channels to scan and the
data format. The upper byte selects the input data format (i.e. 0=BCD,
8=Binary) and the number of input channels (set to 4). The lower byte
selects the output data format (i.e. 0=BCD, 8=Binary) and the number
of output channels (set to 2).
The binary format can be used for displaying data on some
operator interface units and on the DL06 LCD display. The DL06
PLCs support binary math functions.
OUT
V700
Special V-memory location assigned to the first option slot contains the
data format and the number of channels to scan.
LDA
O2000
This loads an octal value for the first V-memory location that will be used
to store the incoming data. For example, O2000 entered here using the
LDA instruction would designate the following addresses: Ch1 – V2000,
Ch2 – V2001, Ch3 – V2002, Ch4 – V2003
OUT
V701
LDA
O2010
OUT
V702
The octal address (O2000) is stored here. V701 is assigned to the first
option slot and acts as a pointer, which means the CPU will use the
octal value in this location to determine exactly where to store the incoming data.
This loads an octal value for the first V-memory location that will be used
to store the output data. For example, O2010 entered here using the
LDA instruction would designate the following addresses: Ch1 – V2010,
Ch2 – V2011
The octal address (O2010) is stored here. V702 is assigned to the first
option slot and acts as a pointer, which means the CPU will use the
octal value in this location to determine exactly where to store the output
data.
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
13–11
Chapter 13: F0-4AD2DA-2 4-Ch. In/2 Ch. Out Analog Voltage Combination
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Scale Conversions
Scaling the Input Data
13–12
Many applications call for measurements in
engineering units, which can be more meaningful
than raw data. Convert to engineering units using the
formula shown to the right.
You may have to make adjustments to the formula
depending on the scale you choose for the engineering
units.
Units = A H – L + L
4095
H = High limit of the engineering
unit range
L = Low limit of the engineering
unit range
A = Analog value (0 – 4095)
For example, if you wanted to measure pressure (PSI) from 0.0 to 100.0 then you would have
to multiply the analog value by 10 in order to imply a decimal place when you view the value
with the programming software or a handheld programmer. Notice how the calculations differ
when you use the multiplier.
Analog Value of 2024, slightly less than half scale, should yield 49.4 PSI
Example without multiplier
Example with multiplier
Units = A H – L + L
4095
Units = 10 A H – L + L
4095
Units = 2024 100 – 0 + 0
4095
Units = 20240 100 – 0 + 0
4095
Units = 49
Units = 494
Handheld Display
Handheld Display
V 2001 V 2000
0000 0049
V 2001 V 2000
0000 0494
This value is more accurate
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
Chapter 13: F0-4AD2DA-2 4-Ch. In/2 Ch. Out Analog Voltage Combination
The Conversion Program
The following example shows how you would write the program to perform the engineering
unit conversion from input data formats 0–4095. This example assumes the raw input data read
at V2000 is in BCD format.
Note: this example uses SP1, which is always on. You could also use an X, C, etc. permissive
contact.
SP1
LD
V2000
When SP1 is on, load channel 1 data to the accumulator (for
a range of 0–1000).
MUL
K1000
Multiply the accumulator by 1000.
DIV
K4095
Divide the accumulator by 4095 (the module resolution).
Store the result in V2100.
OUT
V2100
Output Conversion Program
The following example program shows how you would write the program to perform the
engineering unit conversion to output data formats 0–4095. This example assumes you have
calculated or loaded the engineering unit values between 0–1000 in BCD format and stored
them in V2300 and V2301 for channels 1 and 2 respectively. The DL05 and DL06 offer
instructions that allow you to perform math operations using BCD format. It is usually easier
to perform any math calculations in BCD and then convert the value to binary before you send
the data to the module.
SP1
SP1
LD
V2300
The LD instruction loads the engineering units used with channel 1 into
the accumulator. This example assumes the numbers are BCD. Since
SP1 is used, this rung automatically executes on every scan. You could
also use an X, C, etc. permissive contact.
MUL
K4095
Multiply the accumulator by 4095.
DIV
K1000
Divide the accumulator by 1000 (this is the maximum value of
V2300).
OUT
V2010
Store the BCD result in V2010; the V–memory location set up to
send the data to Ch 1 output.
LD
V2301
The LD instruction loads the engineering units used with Ch 2 into the
accumulator. This example assumes the numbers are BCD. Since SP1 is
used, this rung automatically executes on every scan. You could also use
an X, C, etc. permissive contact.
MUL
K4095
DIV
K1000
OUT
V2011
Multiply the accumulator by 4095.
Divide the accumulator by 1000 (this is the maximum value of
V2301).
Store the BCD result in V2011; the V–memory location set up to send
the data to Ch 2 output.
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
13–13
Chapter 13: F0-4AD2DA-2 4-Ch. In/2 Ch. Out Analog Voltage Combination
Analog and Digital Value Conversions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
13–14
Sometimes it is useful to convert between the signal levels and the digital values. This is
especially helpful during machine startup or troubleshooting. The following table provides
formulas to make this conversion easier.
Range
If you know the digital value
If you know the analog signal level
0 to 5V
A = 5D
4095
D = 4095 (A)
5
0 to 10V
A = 10D
4095
D = 4095 (A)
10
For example, if you are using the 0–10V range and you D = 4095 (A)
10
need a 6V signal level, use this formula to determine the
4095
digital value (D) that will be stored in the V-memory D =
(6V)
10
location that contains the data.
D = (409.5) (6)
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
D = 2457
Chapter 13: F0-4AD2DA-2 4-Ch. In/2 Ch. Out Analog Voltage Combination
Module Resolution
Analog Data Bits
The first twelve bits represent the analog data for both inputs and outputs in binary format.
Bit
0
1
2
3
4
5
Value
1
2
4
8
16
32
Bit
6
7
8
9
10
11
Value
64
128
256
512
1024
2048
MSB
LSB
1 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 0
= data bits
Resolution Details
Since the module has 12-bit resolution for both inputs and outputs, the analog signal is either
converted into 4096 counts or a count value will produce a proportional analog output. In
either situation the count range will be from 0–4095 (212). For example, with an output range
of 0 to 10V, send a 0 to get a 0V signal, and send 4095 to get a 10V signal. This is equivalent
to a binary value of 0000 0000 0000 to 1111 1111 1111, or 000 to FFF hexadecimal.
Each count can also be expressed in terms of the signal level by using the following equation:
0 – 10V
Resolution = H – L
4095
10V
H = high limit of the signal range
L = low limit of the signal range
0V
0
4095
The following table shows the smallest detectable signal change that will result in one LSB
change in the data or the amount of change in the output signal that each increment of the
count value will produce.
Signal Span
Divide By
Smallest Detectable
or Produced Change
0 to 5V
5 volts
4095
1.22 mV
0 to 10V
10 volts
4095
2.44 mV
Voltage Range
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
13–15
Chapter 13: F0-4AD2DA-2 4-Ch. In/2 Ch. Out Analog Voltage Combination
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Analog Input Ladder Logic Filter
PID Loops / Filtering:
Please refer to the “PID Loop Operation” chapter in the DL06 or DL05 User Manual for
information on the built-in PV filter (DL05/06) and the ladder logic filter (DL06 only) shown
below. A filter must be used to smooth the analog input value when auto tuning PID loops to
prevent giving a false indication of loop characteristics.
Smoothing the Input Signal (DL06 only):
The filter logic can also be used in the same way to smooth the analog input signal to help
stabilize PID loop operation or to stabilize the analog input signal value for use with an operator
interface display, etc.
Warning: The built-in and logic filters are not intended to smooth or filter noise generated by improper
field device wiring or grounding. Small amounts of electrical noise can cause the input signal to bounce
considerably. Proper field device wiring and grounding must be done before attempting to use the filters
to smooth the analog input signal.
Using Binary Data Format
13–16
SP1
LD
V2000
Loads the analog signal, which is in binary format
and has been loaded from V-memory location
V2000, into the accumulator. Contact SP1 is
always on.
BTOR
Converts the binary value in the accumulator
to a real number.
SUBR
V1400
Subtracts the real number stored in location
V1400 from the real number in the accumulator,
and stores the result in the accumulator. V1400
is the designated workspace in this example.
MULR
R0.2
Multiplies the real number in the accumulator by
0.2 (the filter factor), and stores the result in the
accumulator. This is the filtered value. The filter
range is 0.1 to 0.9. Smaller filter factors
increases filtering. (1.0 eliminates filtering).
ADDR
V1400
Adds the real number stored in
location V1400 to the real number
filtered value in the accumulator, and
stores the result in the accumulator.
OUTD
V1400
Copies the value in the accumulator to
location V1400.
RTOB
Converts the real number in the
accumulator to a binary value, and
stores the result in the accumulator.
OUT
V1402
Loads the binary number filtered value from
the accumulator into location V1402 to use in
your application or PID loop.
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
Chapter 13: F0-4AD2DA-2 4-Ch. In/2 Ch. Out Analog Voltage Combination
NOTE: Be careful not to do a multiple number conversion on a value. For example, if you are using the pointer
method in BCD format to get the analog value, it must be converted to binary (BIN) as shown below. If you
are using the pointer method in Binary format, the conversion to binary (BIN) instruction is not needed.
Using BCD Data Format
SP1
LDD
V2000
Loads the analog signal, which is in BCD format
and has been loaded from V-memory location
V2000, into the accumulator. Contact SP1 is
always on.
BIN
Converts a BCD value in the accumulator to
binary.
BTOR
Converts the binary value in the accumulator
to a real number.
SUBR
V1400
Subtracts the real number stored in location
V1400 from the real number in the accumulator,
and stores the result in the accumulator. V1400
is the designated workspace in this example.
MULR
R0.2
Multiplies the real number in the accumulator by
0.2 (the filter factor), and stores the result in the
accumulator. This is the filtered value. The filter
range is 0.1 to 0.9. Smaller filter factors
increases filtering. (1.0 eliminates filtering).
ADDR
V1400
Adds the real number stored in
location V1400 to the real number
filtered value in the accumulator, and
stores the result in the accumulator.
OUTD
V1400
Copies the value in the accumulator to
location V1400.
RTOB
Converts the real number in the
accumulator to a binary value, and
stores the result in the accumulator.
BCD
OUTD
V1402
Converts the binary value in the accumulator
to a BCD number. Note: The BCD instruction
is not needed for PID loop PV (loop PV is a
binary number).
Loads the BCD number filtered value from
the accumulator into location V1402 to use in
your application or PID loop.
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
13–17
F0-04RTD 4-CHANNEL
RTD INPUT
CHAPTER
14
In This Chapter...
Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14–2
Connecting and Disconnecting the Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14–4
Module Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14–6
Special V-memory Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14–7
Configuring the Module in Your Control Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14–11
Negative Temperature Readings with Magnitude Plus Sign . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14–15
Analog Input Ladder Logic Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14–18
RTD Burnout Detection Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14–20
Chapter 14: F0-04RTD 4-Channel RTD Input
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Module Specifications
14–2
The F0-04RTD 4-Channel Resistive Temperature
Detector Input Module provides the following features
and benefits:
• Provides four RTD input channels with 0.1 °C/°F
temperature resolution.
• Automatically converts type Pt100, jPt100, Pt1000,
10 Cu, 25 Cu, 120 Ni RTD signals into direct
temperature readings. No extra scaling or complex
conversion is required.
• Temperature data can be expressed in °F or °C, and as
magnitude plus sign or 2’s complement.
• Precision lead wire resistance compensation by dual
matched current sources and ratiometric measurements.
Works with three wire and four wire RTDs.
• The temperature calculation and linearization are based
on data provided by the National Institute of Standards
and Technology (NIST).
• Diagnostic features include detection of short circuits and
input disconnection.
R
PW
N
RU
U
CP
TX1
1
RX
TX2
2
RX
NOTE: The DL05 CPU’s analog feature for this module requires DirectSOFT32 Version 3.0c (or later) and
firmware version 4.70 (or later). The DL06 requires DirectSOFT32 version V4.0, build 16 (or later) and
firmware version 1.50 (or later). See our website for more information: www.automationdirect.com.
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
Chapter 14: F0-04RTD 4-Channel RTD Input
Module Calibration
The module automatically re-calibrates every five seconds to remove any offset and gain errors.
The F0-04RTD module requires no user calibration. However, if your process requires
calibration, it is possible to correct the RTD tolerance using ladder logic. You can subtract or
add a constant to the actual reading for that particular RTD. The actual reading can also be
scaled to obtain the desired value using ladder logic.
Input Specifications
The following table provide the specifications for the F0-04RTD Input Module. Review these
specifications to make sure the module meets your application requirements.
Input Specifications
Number of Channels
Input Ranges
4
Pt100:
PT1000:
jPt100:
10 Cu:
25 Cu:
120 Ni:
Resolution
Display Resolution
Absolute Maximum Ratings
Converter Type
Sampling Rate
Linearity Error (End to End)
PLC Update Rate
Temperature Drift
Maximum Inaccuracy
RTD Excitation Current
Common Mode Range
Notch Filter (Common Mode Rejection)
Digital Input Points Required
Power Budget Requirements
Operating Temperature
Storage Temperature
Relative Humidity
Environmental Air
Vibration
Shock
Noise Immunity
Replacement Terminal Block
Wire Size Range & Connector Screw Torque
16 bit (1 in 65535)
±0.1 °C, ±0.1 °F (±3276.7)
Fault Protected Inputs to ±50VDC
Charge Balancing, 24 bit
140ms per channel
±0.05 °C maximum, ±0.01 °C typical
4 channels/scan
15 ppm / °C maximum
±1 °C
200µA
0-5VDC
>50 db notches at 50/60Hz
None; uses special V-memory locations based on slot
70 mA @ 5VDC (supplied by base)
0 to 60° C (32 to 140° F)
-20 to 70° C (-4 to 158° F)
5 to 95% (non-condensing)
No corrosive gases permitted
MIL STD 810C 514.2
MIL STD 810C 516.2
NEMA ICS3-304
D0-ACC-4
28 - 16 AWG; 0.4Nm; DN-SS1 Screwdriver Recommended
-200.0 °C to 850.0 °C (-328 °F to 1562 °F)
-200.0 °C to 595.0 °C (-328 °F to 1103 °F)
-38.0 °C to 450.0 °C (-36 °F to 842 °F)
-200.0 °C to 260.0 °C (-328 °F to 500 °F)
-200.0 °C to 260.0 °C (-328 °F to 500 °F)
-80.0 °C to 260.0 °C (-112 °F to 500 °F)
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
14–3
Chapter 14: F0-04RTD 4-Channel RTD Input
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Connecting and Disconnecting the Field Wiring
14–4
Wiring Guidelines
Your company may have guidelines for wiring and cable installation. If so, you should check
those before you begin the installation. Here are some general things to consider:
• Use the shortest wiring route whenever possible.
• Use shielded wiring and ground the shield at the transmitter source. Do not ground the shield at both
the module and the source.
• Unused channels require shorting wires (jumpers) installed from terminals CH+ to CH– to COM.
• Do not run the signal wiring next to large motors, high current switches, or transformers. This may
cause noise problems.
• Route the wiring through an approved cable housing to minimize the risk of accidental damage.
Check local and national codes to choose the correct method for your application.
To remove the terminal block, disconnect power to the PLC and the field devices. Pull the
terminal block firmly until the connector separates from the module.
You can remove the RTD module from the PLC by folding out the retaining tabs at the top and
bottom of the module. As the retaining tabs pivot upward and outward, the module’s connector
is lifted out of the PLC socket. Once the connector is free, you can lift the module out of its slot.
Use the following diagram to connect the field wiring. If necessary, the F0–04RTD terminal
block can be removed to make removal of the module possible without disturbing field wiring.
RTD - Resistance Temperature Detector
Use shielded RTDs whenever possible to minimize noise on the input signal. Ground the shield
wire at one end only, preferably at the RTD source.
Lead Configuration for RTD Sensors
The suggested three-lead configuration shown below provides one lead to the CH+ terminal,
one lead to the CH– terminal, and one lead to the common terminal. Compensation circuitry
nulls out the lead length for accurate temperature measurements.
Some sensors have four leads. When making connections, do not connect the second lead to the
CH+ input; leave that lead unconnected.
Do not use configurations that lack the use of the same color lead to both the CH– and COM
terminals. There is no compensation and temperature readings will be inaccurate.
This module has low RTD excitation current, worst-case dissipation with 100 RTDs
connected is only 0.016mW.
Wiring Connections For Typical RTD Sensor
Black
Black
To CH–
To COM
Sensor
Red
Red
(if applicable)
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
To CH+
No Connection
(if sensor has 4 leads, only
connect one lead to CH+)
Chapter 14: F0-04RTD 4-Channel RTD Input
Ambient Variations in Temperature
The F0-04RTD module has been designed to operate within the ambient temperature range of
0 °C to 60 °C.
Precision analog measurement with no long term temperature drift is assured by a chopper
stabilized programmable gain amplifier, ratiometric referencing, and automatic offset and gain
calibration.
Wiring Diagram
Use the following diagram to connect the field wiring. If necessary, the F0-04RTD terminal
block can be removed to make removal of the module possible without disturbing field wiring.
Note 1
Note 3
x
COM
COM
200 A
Current
Source
ANALOG MULTIPLEXER
Note 2
CH1+
CH1COM
CH2+
CH2COM
CH3+
CH3COM
CH4+
CH4-
RTD
COM
Ref.
Adj.
COM
+
- A/D
200 A
Current
Source
COM
COM
COM
F0-04RTD
Notes:
1. The three wires connecting the RTD to the module must be the same type and length.
Do not use the shield or drain wire for the third connection.
2. Unused channels require shorting wires (jumpers) installed from terminals CH+ to CH–
to COM to prevent possible noise from influencing active channels. This should be done
even if the unused channel is not enabled in the V-memory configuration.
3. If a RTD sensor has four wires, the plus sense wire should be left unconnected as shown.
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
14–5
Chapter 14: F0-04RTD 4-Channel RTD Input
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Module Operation
14–6
Channel Scanning Sequence
The DL05 and DL06 read all four input channels data during each scan. The CPUs support
special V-memory locations that are used to manage the data transfer. This is discussed in more
detail on the following page, “Special V–memory Locations”.
Scan
DL05/DL06 PLC
Read Inputs
Execute Application Program
Read the data
Store data
Scan N
Ch 1, 2, 3, 4
Scan N+1
Ch 1, 2, 3, 4
Scan N+2
Ch 1, 2, 3, 4
Scan N+3
Ch 1, 2, 3, 4
Scan N+4
Ch 1, 2, 3, 4
Write to Outputs
Analog Module Update
Even though the channel updates to the CPU are synchronous with the CPU scan, the module
asynchronously monitors the analog transmitter signal and converts the signal to a 16-bit binary
representation. This enables the module to continuously provide accurate measurements
without slowing down the discrete control logic in the RLL program.
The time required to sense the temperature and copy the value to V-memory is 140 milliseconds
minimum to 560 milliseconds plus 1 scan time maximum (number of channels x 140
milliseconds + 1 scan time).
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
Chapter 14: F0-04RTD 4-Channel RTD Input
Special V-memory Locations
The DL05 and DL06 PLCs have special V-memory locations assigned to their respective option
slots. These V-memory locations allow you to:
• specify the number of input channels enabled and BCD/Binary data format
• specify the input pointer address
• specify the RTD input type
• specify the units code – temperature scale and data format
• specify burnout data value at burnout
• read module setup diagnostics
Module Configuration Registers
The table below shows the special V-memory locations used by the DL05 and DL06 PLCs for
the F0–04RTD module.
Module Configuration
Parameters
A: Number of Channels
Enabled / Data Format
B: Input Pointer
C: RTD Type
D: Units Code
E: RTD Burnout
Data Value
F: Diagnostic Error
DL05 and DL06 Option Slot
DL05
Slot
DL06
Slot 1
DL06
Slot 2
DL06
Slot 3
DL06
Slot 4
V7700
V700
V710
V720
V730
V7701
V7703
V7704
V701
V703
V704
V711
V713
V714
V721
V723
V724
V731
V733
V734
V7706
V706
V716
V726
V736
V7707
V707
V717
V727
V737
A: Number of Channels Enabled/Data Format Register
This V–memory location is used to define the number of input channels to be enabled and to
set the channel data to BCD or binary format.
Number of
Channel Data in Channel Data in
Channels Enabled BCD Format
Binary Format
1 Channel
2 Channels
3 Channels
4 Channels
K100
K200
K300
K400
K8100
K8200
K8300
K8400
MSB
LSB
Data Format
Number of channels
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
14–7
Chapter 14: F0-04RTD 4-Channel RTD Input
B: Input Pointer Register
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
14–8
This is a system parameter that points to a V-memory location used for storing module channel
input data. The V–memory location loaded in the input pointer V–memory location is an octal
number identifying the first V-memory location for the input data. This V–memory location is
user defined, but must use available consecutive V-memory locations. For example, loading
O2000 causes the pointer to write Ch 1’s data value to V2000/2001, Ch 2’s data value to
V2002/2003, CH 3’s data value to V2004/2005 and Ch 4’s data value to V2006/2007.
Note: Each channel’s data value occupies two (2) consecutive V-memory locations. This allows for more
than four (4) digits to be displayed if a BCD format for channel data is selected. For example: 1234.5 °F.
A binary format for either a 15-bit magnitude plus sign or 16-bit 2’s complement value will occupy the first
V-memory location of the two V-memory locations assigned for the slected channel.
Refer to the specific PLC’s user manual being used for available user V-memory locations.
C: RTD Type Selection Register
This V–memory register must be set to match the type of RTD being used. Use the table to
determine your settings.
The module can be used with many types of RTDs. All channels of the module must be the
same RTD type.
The default setting from the factory is Pt100. This selects the DIN 43760 European type
RTD. European curve type RTDs are calibrated to DIN 43760, BS1905, or IEC751
specifications which is .00385 //°C (100 °C = 138.5).
The jPt100 type is used for the American curve (.00392 //°C), platinum 100 RTDs.
The 10 and 25 RTD settings are used with copper RTDs.
RTD
Type
Input
Selection
Pt100 (European curve w/TCR = .00385)
Cu10
Cu25
jPt100 (American curve w/TCR = .00392)
Pt1000
Ni120
K0
K1
K2
K3
K4
K5
MSB
LSB
Input Type
Selection
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
Chapter 14: F0-04RTD 4-Channel RTD Input
D: Units Code Register
All RTD types are converted into a direct temperature reading in either Fahrenheit or Celsius.
The data contains one implied decimal place. For example, a value in V-memory of 1002
would be 100.2 °C or °F.
All RTD ranges can include negative temperatures, therefore the display resolution is from
–3276.7 to +3276.7.
Negative temperatures can be represented in either 2’s complement or magnitude plus sign
form. If the temperature is negative, the most significant bit in the V-memory location is set.
The 2’s complement data format may be required to correctly display bipolar data on some
operator interfaces. This data format could also be used to simplify averaging a bipolar signal.
To view this data format in DirectSoft32, select Signed Decimal.
The bipolar input ranges may be converted to a 15-bit magnitude plus sign or a 16-bit 2’s
complement value.
Bit 0 = Temperature Scale
0 = Temp in degrees F
1 = Temp in degrees C
Bit 1 = Data Format
0 = Magnitude plus sign bit format
1 = 2’s Complement format
Unit Code Register - Truth Table
Temperature Scale
Data Format
Bit 1
Bit 0
Value
°F
Magnitude + sign bit
0
0
K0
°C
Magnitude + sign bit
0
1
K1
°F
2’s Complement
1
0
K2
°C
2’s Complement
1
1
K3
Temp scale
MSB
LSB
Data Format
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
14–9
Chapter 14: F0-04RTD 4-Channel RTD Input
E: RTD Burnout Data Value Register
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
This register is used to define either up scale or down scale channel values when a channel RTD
burnout occurs.
Bit 0 = Up scale/down scale value at Burnout
0 = Up scale value at Burnout, 7FFFH (BCD/HEX) or 32767 (Binary)
written to CH register
1 = Down scale value at Burnout: 0000H (BCD/HEX) or 0 (Binary)
written to CH register
MSB
LSB
Up scale/down scale Burnout value
F: Diagnostics Error Register
14–10
This register is used to determine whether the configuration of the module is valid or not.
Bit 0 = Diagnostic bit:
0 = Module setup is valid
1 = Module setup is not valid
MSB
LSB
Diagnostics bit
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
Chapter 14: F0-04RTD 4-Channel RTD Input
Configuring the Module in Your Control Program
DL05 Example 1
The example program below shows how to setup the F0–04RTD for 4 input channels enabled,
use of a type Pt100 RTD on all 4 input channels, BCD channel data format, ºF temperature
scale, magnitude plus sign bit format, and with an up scale burnout value specified. Place this
rung anywhere in the ladder program or in the initial stage if you are using stage programming
instructions.
This is all that is required to read the temperature or voltage input data into V-memory
locations. Once the data is in V-memory you can perform mathematical calculations with the
data, compare the data against preset values, etc. V2000 is used in the example but you can use
any user V-memory location.
SP0
LD
K0400
-or -
LD
K8400
Loads a constant that specifies the number of input channels to scan
and the data format. The upper byte, most significant nibble (MSN)
selects the data format (0 = BCD, 8 = binary). The LSN selects the
number of channels (1, 2, 3 or 4).
The binary format is used for displaying data on some operator
interface units. K8400 enables 4 channels in binary format.
OUT
V7700
Special V-memory location assigned to the option slot that specifies
the data format and the number of channels to scan.
LDA
O2000
This loads an octal value for the first V-memory location that will be used
to store the incoming data. For example, the O2000 entered here using
the LDA instruction would designate the following addresses:
Ch1 – V2000/2001, Ch2 – V2002/2003, Ch3 – V2004/2005,
Ch4 – V2006/2007. See note on page 8-8.
OUT
V7701
The octal address (O2000) is stored here. Special V–memory location
V7701 is assigned to the option slot and acts as a pointer, which
means the CPU will use the octal value in this location to determine
exactly where to store the incoming data.
LD
K0
Loads a 0 into the accumulator to set the following parameters in
(V7703 – V7706).
OUT
V7703
Special V–memory location assigned to the option slot that specifies
the RTD Input Type. K0 selects a type Pt100 RTD.
See table on page 8-8 for selections.
OUT
V7704
Special V–memory location assigned to the option slot that specifies
the Units Code (temperature scale and data format) selections.
K0 selects a º F temperature scale and magnitude plus sign bit format.
See truth table on page 8-9 for selections.
OUT
V7706
Special V–memory location assigned to the option slot that specifies
the RTD up scale/down scale burnout value. K0 selects an up
scale burnout value of 7FFFh (BCD/HEX) or 32,767 (Binary). The value
is written to the channel input register when a RTD burnout occurs.
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
14–11
Chapter 14: F0-04RTD 4-Channel RTD Input
DL05 Example 2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
14–12
The example program below shows how to setup the F0–04RTD for 2 input channels enabled,
use of a type Cu10 RTD on the first 2 input channels, BCD channel data format, ºC
temperature scale, 2’s complement format, and with a down scale burnout value specified.
Again, place this rung in the ladder program or in the initial stage if you are using stage
programming instructions.
SP0
LD
K0200
-or -
LD
K8200
Loads a constant that specifies the number of input channels to scan
and the data format. The upper byte, most significant nibble (MSN)
selects the data format (0 = BCD, 8 = binary). The LSN selects the
number of channels (1, 2, 3 or 4).
The binary format is used for displaying data on some operator
interface units. K8200 enables 2 channels in binary format.
OUT
V7700
Special V-memory location assigned to the option slot that specifies
the data format and the number of channels to scan.
LDA
O2000
This loads an octal value for the first V-memory location that will be used
to store the incoming data. For example, the O2000 entered here using
the LDA instruction would designate the following addresses:
Ch1 – V2000/2001, Ch2 – V2002/2003
See note on page 8-8.
OUT
V7701
The octal address (O2000) is stored here. Special V–memory location
V7701 is assigned to the option slot and acts as a pointer, which
means the CPU will use the octal value in this location to determine
exactly where to store the incoming data.
LD
K1
Loads a constant that specifies the RTD input type. K1 selects a type
Cu10 RTD. Enter a K0–K5 to specify the RTD Input Type.
See table on page 8-8 for selections.
OUT
V7703
Special V–memory location assigned to the option slot that specifies
the RTD input type.
LD
K3
Loads a constant that specifies the Units Code (temperature scale and
data format). K3 selects º C and 2’s complement data format.
See truth table on page 8-9 for selections.
OUT
V7704
Special V–memory location assigned to the option slot that specifies
the temperature scale and data format selections.
LD
K1
Loads a constant that specifies the RTD burnout data value at burnout.
K1 specifies a down scale value of 0000h (BCD/HEX) or 0 (Binary) to
be written to the channel input register when a RTD burnout occurs.
OUT
V7706
Special V–memory location assigned to the option slot that specifies
the RTD up scale/down scale burnout value. The value is written
to the channel input register when a RTD burnout occurs.
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
Chapter 14: F0-04RTD 4-Channel RTD Input
DL06 Example 1
The example program below shows how to setup the F0–04RTD in option slot 1 for 4 input
channels enabled, use of a type Pt100 RTD on all 4 input channels, BCD channel data format,
ºF temperature scale, magnitude plus sign bit format, and with an up scale burnout value
specified. Use the table shown on page 14–7 to determine the pointer values if locating the
module in any of the other slots. Place this rung anywhere in the ladder program or in the initial
stage if you are using stage programming instructions.
This is all that is required to read the temperature or voltage input data into V-memory
locations. Once the data is in V-memory you can perform mathematical calculations with the
data, compare the data against preset values, etc. V2000 is used in the example but you can use
any user V-memory location.
SP0
LD
K0400
-or -
LD
K8400
Loads a constant that specifies the number of input channels to scan
and the data format. The upper byte, most significant nibble (MSN)
selects the data format (0 = BCD, 8 = binary). The LSN selects the
number of channels (1, 2, 3 or 4).
The binary format is used for displaying data on some operator
interface units. K8400 enables 4 channels in binary format.
OUT
V700
Special V-memory location assigned to option slot 1 that specifies
the data format and the number of channels to scan.
LDA
O2000
This loads an octal value for the first V-memory location that will be used
to store the incoming data. For example, the O2000 entered here using
the LDA instruction would designate the following addresses:
Ch1 – V2000/2001, Ch2 – V2002/2003, Ch3 – V2004/2005,
Ch4 – V2006/2007. See note on page 8-8.
OUT
V701
The octal address (O2000) is stored here. Special V–memory location
V701 is assigned to option slot 1 and acts as a pointer, which means
the CPU will use the octal value in this location to determine exactly
where to store the incoming data.
LD
K0
Loads a 0 into the accumulator to set the following parameters in
(V703 – V706).
OUT
V703
Special V–memory location assigned to option slot 1 that specifies
the RTD Input Type. K0 selects a type Pt100 RTD.
See table on page 8-8 for selections.
OUT
V704
Special V–memory location assigned to option slot 1 that specifies
the Units Code (temperature scale and data format) selections.
K0 selects a º F temperature scale and magnitude plus sign bit format.
See truth table on page 8-9 for selections.
OUT
V706
Special V–memory location assigned to option slot 1 that specifies the
RTD up scale/down scale burnout value. K0 selects an up scale
burnout value of 7FFFh (BCD/HEX) or 32,767 (Binary). The value
is written to the channel input register when a RTD burnout occurs.
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
14–13
Chapter 14: F0-04RTD 4-Channel RTD Input
DL06 Example 2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
14–14
The example program below shows how to setup the F0–04RTD in option slot 2 for 2 input
channels enabled, use of a type Cu10 RTD on the first 2 input channels, BCD channel data
format, ºC temperature scale, 2’s complement format, and with a down scale burnout value
specified. Use the table shown on page 14–7 to determine the pointer values if locating the
module in any of the other slots. V-memory location V3000 is shown in the example, but you
can use any available user V-memory location. Again, place this rung anywhere in the ladder
program or in the initial stage if you are using stage programming instructions.
SP0
LD
K0200
-or -
LD
K8200
Loads a constant that specifies the number of input channels to scan
and the data format. The upper byte, most significant nibble (MSN)
selects the data format (0 = BCD, 8 = binary). The LSN selects the
number of channels (1, 2, 3 or 4).
The binary format is used for displaying data on some operator
interface units. K8200 enables 2 channels in binary format.
OUT
V710
Special V-memory location assigned to option slot 2 that specifies
the data format and the number of channels to scan.
LDA
O3000
This loads an octal value for the first V-memory location that will be used
to store the incoming data. For example, the O3000 entered here using
the LDA instruction would designate the following addresses:
Ch1 – V3000/3001, Ch2 – V3002/3003
See note on page 8-8.
OUT
V711
The octal address (O3000) is stored here. Special V–memory location
V711 is assigned to option slot 2 and acts as a pointer, which
means the CPU will use the octal value in this location to determine
exactly where to store the incoming data.
LD
K1
Loads a constant that specifies the RTD input type. K1 selects a type
Cu10 RTD. Enter a K0–K5 to specify the RTD Input Type.
See table on page 8-8 for selections.
OUT
V713
Special V–memory location assigned to option slot 2 that specifies
the RTD input type.
LD
K3
Loads a constant that specifies the Units Code (temperature scale and
data format). K3 selects º C and 2’s complement data format.
See truth table on page 8-9 for selections.
OUT
V714
Special V–memory location assigned to option slot 2 that specifies
the temperature scale and data format selections.
LD
K1
Loads a constant that specifies the RTD burnout data value at burnout.
K1 specifies a down scale value of 0000h (BCD/HEX) or 0 (Binary) to
be written to the channel input register when a RTD burnout occurs.
OUT
V716
Special V–memory location assigned to option slot 2 that specifies
the RTD up scale/down scale burnout value. The value is written
to the channel input register when a RTD burnout occurs.
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
Chapter 14: F0-04RTD 4-Channel RTD Input
Negative Temperature Readings with Magnitude Plus Sign
With bipolar ranges, you need some additional logic to determine whether the value being
returned represents a positive temperature or a negative temperature. There is a simple solution:
• If you are using bipolar ranges and you get a value greater than or equal to 8000H, the value is
negative.
• If you get a value less than or equal to 7FFFH, the value is positive.
The sign bit is the most significant bit, which combines 8000H to the data value. If the value is
greater than or equal to 8000H, you only have to mask the most significant bit and the active
channel bits to determine the actual data value.
The following two programs show how you can accomplish this. The first example uses
magnitude plus sign (binary) and the second example uses magnitude plus sign (BCD).
Since you always want to know when a value is negative, these rungs should be placed before
any other operations that use the data, such as math instructions, scaling operations, and so
forth. Also, if you are using stage programming instructions, these rungs should be in a stage
that is always active. Note: you only need this logic for each channel that is using bipolar input
signals. The examples only show two channels.
Magnitude Plus Sign (Binary)
Check Channel 1
SP1
V2000
LD
V2000
Load channel 1 data from V-memory into the
accumulator. Contact SP1 is always on.
AND
K7FFF
This instruction masks the sign bit of the binary data, if
it is set. Without this step, negative values will not be
correct so do not forget to include it.
OUT
V2010
Put the actual signal value in V2010. Now you can use
the data normally.
K8000
Check Channel 2
SP1
V2002
K8000
C1
OUT
Channel 1 data is negative when C1 is on (a value of
–1.0 reads as 8010, –2.0 is 8020, etc.).
LD
V2002
Load channel 2 from V-memory into the accumulator.
Contact SP1 is always on.
AND
K7FFF
This instruction masks the sign bit of the binary data, if
it is set. Without this step, negative values will not be
correct so do not forget to include it.
OUT
V2012
Put the actual signal value in V2012. Now you can use
the data normally.
C2
OUT
Channel 2 data is negative when C2 is on (a value of
–1.0 reads as 8010, –2.0 is 8020, etc.).
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
14–15
Chapter 14: F0-04RTD 4-Channel RTD Input
Magnitude Plus Sign (BCD)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
14–16
Check Channel 1
SP1
V2001
LDD
V2000
Load channel 1 data from V-memory into the
accumulator. Remember, the data can be negative.
Contact SP1 is always on.
ANDD
K7FFFFFFF
This instruction masks the sign bit of the BCD data, if it
is set. Without this step, negative values will not be
correct so do not forget to include it.
OUTD
V2010
Put the actual signal value in V2010. Now you can use
the data normally.
K8000
C1
OUT
Check Channel 2
SP1
V2003
K8000
Channel 1 data is negative when C1 is on (a value of
–1.0 reads as 8000 0010, –2.0 is 8000 0020, etc.).
LDD
V2002
Load channel 2 from V-memory into the accumulator.
Remember, the data can be negative. Contact SP1 is
always on.
ANDD
K7FFFFFFF
This instruction masks the sign bit of the BCD data, if it
is set. Without this step, negative values will not be
correct so do not forget to include it.
OUTD
V2012
Put the actual signal value in V2012. Now you can use
the data normally.
C2
OUT
Channel 2 data is negative when C2 is on (a value of
–1.0 reads as 8000 0010, –2.0 is 8000 0020, etc.).
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
Chapter 14: F0-04RTD 4-Channel RTD Input
Negative Temperatures 2’s Complement (Binary/Pointer Method)
You can use the 2’s complement mode for negative temperature display purposes, while at the
same time using the magnitude plus sign of the temperature in your control program. The
DirectSOFT32 element Signed Decimal is used to display negative numbers in 2’s complement
form. To find the absolute value of a negative number in 2’s complement, invert the number
and add 1 as shown in the following example:
V2000
K8000
LD
V2000
INV
Load negative value into the accumulator so we
can convert it to a positive value.
Invert the binary pattern in the accumulator.
ADDD
K1
Add 1.
OUT
V2010
Save Channel 1 data at V2010.
Repeat for other channels as required.
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
14–17
Chapter 14: F0-04RTD 4-Channel RTD Input
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Analog Input Ladder Logic Filter
PID Loops / Filtering:
Please refer to the “PID Loop Operation” chapter in the DL06 or DL05 User Manual for
information on the built-in PV filter (DL05/06) and the ladder logic filter (DL06 only) shown
below. A filter must be used to smooth the analog input value when auto tuning PID loops to
prevent giving a false indication of loop characteristics.
Smoothing the Input Signal (DL06 only):
The filter logic can also be used in the same way to smooth the analog input signal to help
stabilize PID loop operation or to stabilize the analog input signal value for use with an operator
interface display, etc.
Warning: The built-in and logic filters are not intended to smooth or filter noise generated by improper
field device wiring or grounding. Small amounts of electrical noise can cause the input signal to bounce
considerably. Proper field device wiring and grounding must be done before attempting to use the filters
to smooth the analog input signal.
Using Binary Data Format
14–18
SP1
LD
V2000
Loads the analog signal, which is in binary format
and has been loaded from V-memory location
V2000, into the accumulator. Contact SP1 is
always on.
BTOR
Converts the binary value in the accumulator
to a real number.
SUBR
V1400
Subtracts the real number stored in location
V1400 from the real number in the accumulator,
and stores the result in the accumulator. V1400
is the designated workspace in this example.
MULR
R0.2
Multiplies the real number in the accumulator by
0.2 (the filter factor), and stores the result in the
accumulator. This is the filtered value. The filter
range is 0.1 to 0.9. Smaller filter factors
increases filtering. (1.0 eliminates filtering).
ADDR
V1400
Adds the real number stored in
location V1400 to the real number
filtered value in the accumulator, and
stores the result in the accumulator.
OUTD
V1400
Copies the value in the accumulator to
location V1400.
RTOB
Converts the real number in the
accumulator to a binary value, and
stores the result in the accumulator.
OUT
V1402
Loads the binary number filtered value from
the accumulator into location V1402 to use in
your application or PID loop.
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
Chapter 14: F0-04RTD 4-Channel RTD Input
NOTE: Be careful not to do a multiple number conversion on a value. For example, if you are using the pointer
method in BCD format to get the analog value, it must be converted to binary (BIN) as shown below. If you
are using the pointer method in Binary format, the conversion to binary (BIN) instruction is not needed.
Using BCD Data Format
SP1
LDD
V2000
Loads the analog signal, which is in BCD format
and has been loaded from V-memory location
V2000, into the accumulator. Contact SP1 is
always on.
BIN
Converts a BCD value in the accumulator to
binary.
BTOR
Converts the binary value in the accumulator
to a real number.
SUBR
V1400
Subtracts the real number stored in location
V1400 from the real number in the accumulator,
and stores the result in the accumulator. V1400
is the designated workspace in this example.
MULR
R0.2
Multiplies the real number in the accumulator by
0.2 (the filter factor), and stores the result in the
accumulator. This is the filtered value. The filter
range is 0.1 to 0.9. Smaller filter factors
increases filtering. (1.0 eliminates filtering).
ADDR
V1400
Adds the real number stored in
location V1400 to the real number
filtered value in the accumulator, and
stores the result in the accumulator.
OUTD
V1400
Copies the value in the accumulator to
location V1400.
RTOB
Converts the real number in the
accumulator to a binary value, and
stores the result in the accumulator.
BCD
OUTD
V1402
Converts the binary value in the accumulator
to a BCD number. Note: The BCD instruction
is not needed for PID loop PV (loop PV is a
binary number).
Loads the BCD number filtered value from
the accumulator into location V1402 to use in
your application or PID loop.
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
14–19
Chapter 14: F0-04RTD 4-Channel RTD Input
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
RTD Burnout Detection Bits
Special Relays Corresponding to RTD Burnouts
14–20
The following Special Relay (SP) bits can be used in your program to monitor for RTD
burnout.
SP bit :
0 = RTD OK
1 = RTD burnout
DL05 and DL06 Option Slot
Module Channel
DL05
Slot
DL06
Slot 1
DL06
Slot 2
DL06
Slot 3
DL06
Slot 4
Channel 1
SP600
SP140
SP240
SP340
SP440
Channel 2
SP601
SP141
SP241
SP341
SP441
Channel 3
SP602
SP142
SP242
SP342
SP442
Channel 4
SP603
SP143
SP243
SP343
SP443
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
F0-04THM 4-CHANNEL
THERMOCOUPLE INPUT
CHAPTER
15
In This Chapter...
Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15–2
Connecting and Disconnecting the Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15–4
Module Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15–7
Special V-memory Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15–8
Configuring the Module in Your Control Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15–12
Negative Temperature Readings with Magnitude Plus Sign . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15–16
Module Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15–18
Analog Input Ladder Logic Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15–19
Thermocouple Burnout Detection Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15–21
Chapter 15: F0-04THM 4-Channel Thermocouple Input
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
B
C
D
Module Specifications
15–2
The F0-04THM 4-Channel Thermocouple Input Module
provides the following features and benefits:
• Four thermocouple input channels with 16-bit voltage
resolution or 0.1 °C/°F temperature resolution.
• Automatically converts type E, J, K, R, S, T, B, N, or C
thermocouple signals into direct temperature readings. No
extra scaling or complex conversion is required.
• Temperature data can be expressed in °F or °C.
• Module can be configured as 0–39.0625mVDC,
±39.0625mVDC,
±78.125mVDC,
0–156.25mV,
±156.25mVDC and 0–1.25VDC input and will convert
volts and millivolt signal levels into 16-bit digital (0–65535)
values.
• Signal processing features include automatic cold junction
compensation (CJC), thermocouple linearization, and digital
filtering.
• The temperature calculation and linearization are based on
data provided by the National Institute of Standards and
Technology (NIST).
• Diagnostic features include detection of thermocouple
burnout or disconnection.
R
PW
N
RU
U
CP
TX1
1
RX
TX2
2
RX
NOTE: The DL05 CPU’s analog feature for this module requires DirectSOFT32 Version 3.0c (or later) and
firmware version 4.60 (or later). The DL06 requires DirectSOFT32 version V4.0, build 16 (or later) and
firmware version 1.40 (or later). See our website for more information: www.automationdirect.com.
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
Chapter 15: F0-04THM 4-Channel Thermocouple Input
The following tables provide the specifications for the F0-04THM Analog Input Module.
Review these specifications to make sure the module meets your application requirements.
General Specifications
Number of Channels
Common Mode Range
Conversion Time
Common Mode Rejection
Input Impedance
Absolute Maximum Ratings
Accuracy vs. Temperature
Max. full scale error (including offset)
PLC Update Rate
Power Budget Requirement
Operating Temperature
Storage Temperature
Relative Humidity
Environmental Air
Vibration
Shock
Noise Immunity
Replacement Terminal Block
Wire Size Range & Connector Screw Torque
4, differential inputs, voltage or thermocouple
-1.3VDC to +3.8VDC
270ms / channel
> 100dB @ 50/60Hz.
5M⏲ min.
Fault-protected inputs to ±50 VDC
±15 ppm / ºC maximum;
0 - 1.25V ±35ppm / ºC maximum
4 channels per scan
30mA @ 5VDC (supplied by base)
0 to 60 ºC (32 to 140 ºF)
-20 to 70 ºC (-4 to 158 ºF)
5 to 95% (non-condensing)
No corrosive gases permitted
MIL STD 810C 514.2
MIL STD 810C 516.2
NEMA ICS3-304
F0-IOCON-THM (comes with CJC)
22 - 16 AWG; 0.192Nm; DN-SS1 Screwdriver Recommended
Thermocouple Specifications
Input Ranges
Type J -190 to 760 ºC (-310 to 1400 ºF)
Type K -150 to 1372 ºC (-238 to 2502 ºF)
Type E -210 to 1000 ºC (-346 to 1832 ºF)
Type R 65 to 1768 ºC (149 to 3214 ºF)
Type S 65 to 1768 ºC (149 to 3214 ºF)
Type T -230 to 400 ºC (-382 to 752 ºF)
Type B 529 to 1820 ºC (984 to 3308 ºF)
Type N -70 to 1300 ºC (-94 to 2372 ºF)
Type C 65 to 2320 ºC (149 to 4208 ºF)
±0.1 ºC or ±0.1 ºF
Automatic
30 minutes typically ± 1 ºC repeatability
±1 ºC maximum, ±0.5 ºC typical
±3 ºC (excluding thermocouple error)
Display Resolution
Cold Junction Compensation
Warm-Up Time
Linearity Error (End to End)
Maximum Inaccuracy
Voltage Input Specifications
Voltage Ranges
Resolution
Max. Offset Error (All Input Ranges)
Linearity Error (All Input Ranges)
Maximum Inaccuracy
0-39.0625mVDC, ±39.0625mVDC, ±78.125mVDC,
0-156.25mVDC, ±156.25mVDC, 0-1.25VDC
16 bit (1 in 65535)
0.05% @ 0-60 ºC; Typical: 0.04% @ 25 ºC
0.05% @ 0-60 ºC; Typical: 0.03% @ 25 ºC
0-39.0625mVDC, ±39.0625mVDC, ±78.125mVDC ranges:
0.1% @ 0-60ºC; Typical: 0.04% @ 25ºC
0-156.25mVDC, ±156.25mVDC, 0-1.25VDC ranges:
0.05% @ 0-60ºC; Typical: 0.04% @ 25ºC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
B
C
D
All percentages are calculated as a percent of 216 (65536) counts. (0.025% max error => 0.025 * 65536/100 = 16 counts max error)
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
15–3
Chapter 15: F0-04THM 4-Channel Thermocouple Input
Wiring Guidelines
Your company may have guidelines for wiring and cable installation. If so, you should check
those before you begin the installation. Here are some general things to consider:
• Use the shortest wiring route whenever possible.
• Use shielded wiring and ground the shield at the PLC power source. Do not ground the shield at both
the transmitter and the PLC power source.
• Use thermocouple extension wire that is the same as the thermocouple type when extending the
length.
• Do not run the signal wiring next to large motors, high current switches, or transformers. This may
cause noise problems.
• Route the wiring through an approved cable housing to minimize the risk of accidental damage.
Check local and national codes to choose the correct method for your application.
To remove the terminal block, disconnect power to the PLC and the field devices. Pull the
terminal block firmly until the connector separates from the module.
You can remove the thermocouple module from the PLC by folding out the retaining tabs at the
top and bottom of the module. As the retaining tabs pivot upward and outward, the module’s
connector is lifted out of the PLC socket. Once the connector is free, you can lift the module
out of its slot.
Use the following diagram to connect the field wiring. If necessary, the F0–04THM terminal
block can be removed to make removal of the module possible without disturbing field wiring.
Thermocouple Input Wiring Diagram
All of the module’s CH– terminals must be connected together. This will help eliminate ground
potential differences between the input channels that could cause damage to the module. The
two unlabeled terminals are internally connected and may be used for convenience to connect
the CH– terminals together as shown below.
Notes:
1. Shields should be grounded at the PLC power source only.
2. All CH- terminals must be connected together.
3. Unused channels should have a shorting wire (jumper) installed
from CH+ to CH-.
See NOTE 1
CH1+
CH1–
See NOTE 2
CH2+
CJC
LM35
CJC
CJC
ADC
15–4
CH2–
MUX
The LM35
shown in the
diagram is the
CJC
internal
connection
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
B
C
D
Connecting and Disconnecting the Field Wiring
CH3+
CH3–
The CJC comes installed
on the terminal strip
CH4+
See NOTE 3
CH4–
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
Chapter 15: F0-04THM 4-Channel Thermocouple Input
Thermocouples
Use shielded thermocouples whenever possible to minimize the presence of noise on the
thermocouple wire. Ground the shield wire at one end only. For both grounded and ungrounded
thermocouples, connect the shield to the 0V (common) terminal of the PLC power supply.
Grounded Thermocouple Assembly
A grounded thermocouple provides better response time than an ungrounded thermocouple
because the tip of the thermocouple junction is in direct contact with the protective case.
Ungrounded Thermocouple Assembly
An ungrounded thermocouple is electrically isolated from the protective case. If the case is
electrically grounded it provides a low-impedance path for electrical noise to travel. The
ungrounded thermocouple provides a more stable and accurate measurement in a noisy
environment. To avoid exceeding the common mode specifications, be sure that the machine
assembly is properly bonded together.
Exposed Grounded Thermocouple
The thermocouple does not have a protective case and is directly connected to a device with a
higher potential. Grounding the thermocouple assures that the thermocouple remains within the
common mode specifications. Because a thermocouple is essentially a wire, it provides a lowimpedance path for electrical noise. The noise filter has a response of >100dB @ 50/60 Hz.
WARNING: A thermocouple can become shorted to a high voltage potential. Because common terminals
are internally connected together, whatever voltage potential exists on one thermocouple will exist on the
other channels.
Ambient Variations in Temperature
The F0-04THM module has been designed to operate within the ambient temperature range
of 0 °C to 60 °C.
The cold junction compensation is calibrated to operate in a still-air environment. If the
module is used in an application that has forced convection cooling, an error of 2–3 °C may be
introduced. To compensate for this you can use ladder logic to correct the values.
When configuring the system design it is best to locate any heat-producing devices above and
away from the PLC chassis because the heat will affect the temperature readings. For example,
heat introduced at one end of the terminal block can cause a channel-to-channel variation.
When exposing the F0-04THM module to abrupt ambient temperature changes it will take
several minutes for the cold junction compensation and terminal block to stabilize. Errors
introduced by abrupt ambient temperature changes will be less than 4 °C.
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
B
C
D
15–5
Chapter 15: F0-04THM 4-Channel Thermocouple Input
Voltage Input Wiring Diagram
All of the module’s CH– terminals must be connected together as shown below. This will help
eliminate ground potential differences between the input channels that could cause damage to
the module. The two unlabeled terminals are internally connected and may be used for
convenience to connect the CH– terminals together as shown below.
Notes: 1. Shields should be grounded at the PLC power source.
2. All CH– terminals must be connected together.
3. Unused channels should have a shorting wire (jumper) installed from CH+ to CH–.
4. CJC functionality is automatically disabled when a Voltage input is selected.
–
Transmitter
Supply
+
CH1+
Voltage
Transmitter
CH1–
CH2+
See NOTE 3
CH2–
CJC
LM35
CJC
Self-powered
Voltage
Transmitter
See NOTE 1
+
–
CH3+
CH3–
See NOTE 2
+
CH4+
Voltage
Transmitter
15–6
+
–
CH4–
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
ADC
CJC
MUX
The LM35 shown
in the diagram is
the CJC
internal
connection
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
B
C
D
The CJC
comes
installed on
the terminal
strip.
See NOTE 4
Chapter 15: F0-04THM 4-Channel Thermocouple Input
Module Operation
Channel Scanning Sequence
The DL05 and DL06 read the data from all four input channels during each scan. The CPUs
support special V-memory locations that are used to manage the data transfer. This is discussed
in more detail on the following page, “Special V–memory Locations”.
Scan
DL05/DL06 PLC
Read Inputs
Execute Application Program
Read the data
Store data
Scan N
Ch 1, 2, 3, 4
Scan N+1
Ch 1, 2, 3, 4
Scan N+2
Ch 1, 2, 3, 4
Scan N+3
Ch 1, 2, 3, 4
Scan N+4
Ch 1, 2, 3, 4
Write to Outputs
Analog Module Update
Even though the channel updates to the CPU are synchronous with the CPU scan, the module
asynchronously monitors the analog transmitter signal and converts the signal to a 16-bit binary
representation. This enables the module to continuously provide accurate measurements
without slowing down the discrete control logic in the RLL program.
The time required to sense the temperature and copy the value to V-memory is 270 milliseconds
minimum to 1080 milliseconds plus 1 scan time maximum (number of channels x 270
milliseconds + 1 scan time).
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
B
C
D
15–7
Chapter 15: F0-04THM 4-Channel Thermocouple Input
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
B
C
D
Special V-memory Locations
The DL05 and DL06 PLCs have special V-memory locations assigned to their respective option
slots. These V-memory locations allow you to:
• specify the number of input channels enabled and BCD/Binary data format
• specify the input pointer address
• specify the thermocouple or voltage input type
• specify the units code – temperature scale and data format
• enable/disable thermocouple burnout detection
• specify burnout data value at burnout
• read module setup diagnostics
Module Configuration Registers
The table below shows the special V-memory locations used by the DL05 and DL06 PLCs for
the F0–04THM module.
Module Configuration
Parameters
DL05 and DL06 Option Slot
DL05
Slot
DL06
Slot 1
DL06
Slot 2
DL06
Slot 3
DL06
Slot 4
V7700
V700
V710
V720
V730
V7701
V7703
V7704
V701
V703
V704
V711
V713
V714
V721
V723
V724
V731
V733
V734
V7705
V705
V715
V725
V735
F: Thermocouple Burnout
Data Value
V7706
V706
V716
V726
V736
G: Diagnostic Error
V7707
V707
V717
V727
V737
A: Number of Channels
Enabled / Data Format
B: Input Pointer
C: Input Type
D: Units Code
E: Thermocouple Burnout
Detection Enable
A: Number of Channels Enabled/Data Format Register
This V–memory location is used to define the number of input channels to be enabled and to
set the channel data to BCD or binary format.
Number of
Channel Data in Channel Data in
Channels Enabled BCD Format
Binary Format
1 Channel
2 Channels
3 Channels
4 Channels
K100
K200
K300
K400
K8100
K8200
K8300
K8400
MSB
LSB
Data Format
Number of channels
15–8
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
Chapter 15: F0-04THM 4-Channel Thermocouple Input
B: Input Pointer Register
This is a system parameter that points to a V-memory location used for storing module channel
input data. The V–memory location loaded in the input pointer V–memory location is an octal
number identifying the first V-memory location for the input data. This V–memory location is
user defined, but must use available consecutive V-memory locations. For example, loading
O2000 causes the pointer to write Ch 1’s data value to V2000/2001, Ch 2’s data value to
V2002/2003, CH 3’s data value to V2004/2005 and Ch 4’s data value to V2006/2007.
Note: Each channel’s data value occupies two (2) consecutive V-memory locations. This allows for more
than four (4) digits to be displayed if a BCD format for channel data is selected. For example: 1234.5 °F.
A binary format for either a 15-bit magnitude plus sign or 16-bit 2’s complement value will occupy the first
V-memory location of the two V-memory locations assigned for the slected channel.
Refer to the specific PLC’s user manual being used for available user V-memory locations.
C: Input Type Selection Register
This V–memory register must be set to match the type of thermocouple being used or the input
voltage level. Use the table to determine your settings.
Thermocouple/
Voltage Input Type
Input
Selection
Temperature
Range °C
Temperature
Range °F
J
K
E
R
S
T
B
N
C
0-39.0625mVDC
±39.0625mVDC
±78.125mVDC
0-156.25mVDC
±156.25mVDC
0-1.25VDC
K0
K1
K2
K3
K4
K5
K6
K7
K8
K9
KA
KB
KC
KD
KE
-190 to 760
-150 to 1372
-210 to 1000
65 to 1768
65 to 1768
-230 to 400
529 to 1820
-70 to 1300
65 to 2320
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
-310 to 1400
-238 to 2502
-346 to 1832
149 to 3214
149 to 3214
-382 to 752
984 to 3308
-94 to 2372
149 to 4208
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
MSB
LSB
Input Type
Selection
NOTE: The CJC functionality is automatically disabled when a Voltage input is selected.
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
B
C
D
15–9
Chapter 15: F0-04THM 4-Channel Thermocouple Input
D: Units Code Register
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
B
C
D
15–10
All thermocouple types are converted into a direct temperature reading in either Fahrenheit or
Celsius. The data contains one implied decimal place. For example, a value in V-memory of
1002 would be 100.2 °C or °F.
For thermocouple ranges which include negative temperatures (J,E,K,T,N), the display
resolution is from –3276.7 to +3276.7. For positive-only thermocouple ranges (R,S,B,C), the
display resolution is 0 to 6553.5.
Negative temperatures can be represented in either 2’s complement or magnitude plus sign
form. If the temperature is negative, the most significant bit in the V-memory location is set.
The 2’s complement data format may be required to correctly display bipolar data on some
operator interfaces. This data format could also be used to simplify averaging a bipolar signal.
To view this data format in DirectSoft32, select Signed Decimal.
For unipolar thermocouple ranges (R,S,B,C), it does not matter if magnitude plus sign or 2’s
complement is selected.
The bipolar voltage input ranges may be converted to a 15-bit magnitude plus sign or a 16-bit
2’s complement value.
Bit 0 = Temperature Scale
(ignored if Voltage input is selected)
0 = Temp in degrees F
1 = Temp in degrees C
Bit 1 = Data Format
0 = Magnitude plus sign bit format
1 = 2’s Complement format
Unit Code Register - Truth Table
Temperature Scale
Data Format
Bit 1
Bit 0
Value
°F
Magnitude + sign bit
0
0
K0
°C
Magnitude + sign bit
0
1
K1
°F
2’s Complement
1
0
K2
°C
2’s Complement
1
1
K3
Temp scale
MSB
LSB
Data Format
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
Chapter 15: F0-04THM 4-Channel Thermocouple Input
E: Thermocouple Burnout Detection Enable Register
This register is used to enable/disable the thermocouple burnout function. Be sure to disable the
burnout detection function when checking the module calibration.
Bit 0 = Thermocouple Burnout Detection Enable/Disable
0 = Burnout detection is enabled
1 = Burnout detection is disabled
MSB
LSB
Burnout
Function
F: Thermocouple Burnout Data Value Register
This register is used to define either up scale or down scale channel values when a channel
thermocouple burnout occurs.
Bit 0 = Up scale/down scale value at Burnout
0 = Up scale value at Burnout:
Unipolar input type: FFFFH (BCD/HEX) or 65535 (Binary)
written to CH register
Bipolar input type: 7FFFH (BCD/HEX) or 32767 (Binary)
written to CH register
1 = Down scale value at Burnout:
0000H (BCD/HEX) or 0 (Binary) written to CH register
MSB
LSB
Up scale/down scale Burnout value
G: Diagnostics Error Register
This register is used to determine whether the configuration of the module is valid or not. It is
controlled by the PLC and is read only.
Bit 0 = Diagnostic bit:
0 = Module setup is valid
1 = Module setup is not valid
MSB
LSB
Diagnostics bit
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
B
C
D
15–11
Chapter 15: F0-04THM 4-Channel Thermocouple Input
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
B
C
D
Configuring the Module in Your Control Program
DL05 Example 1
15–12
The example program below shows how to setup the F0–04THM for 4 input channels enabled,
J type thermocouple on all 4 input channels, BCD channel data format, ºF temperature scale,
magnitude plus sign bit format, and burnout detection enabled with an up scale burnout
specified. Place this rung anywhere in the ladder program or in the initial stage if you are using
stage programming instructions.
This is all that is required to read the temperature or voltage input data into V-memory
locations. Once the data is in V-memory you can perform mathematical calculations with the
data, compare the data against preset values, etc. V2000 is used in the example but you can use
any user V-memory location.
SP0
LD
K0400
-or -
LD
K8400
Loads a constant that specifies the number of input channels to scan
and the data format. The upper byte, most significant nibble (MSN)
selects the data format (0 = BCD, 8 = binary). The LSN selects the
number of channels (1, 2, 3 or 4).
The binary format is used for displaying data on some operator
interface units. K8400 enables 4 channels in binary format.
OUT
V7700
Special V-memory location assigned to the option slot that specifies
the data format and the number of channels to scan.
LDA
O2000
This loads an octal value for the first V-memory location that will be used
to store the incoming data. For example, the O2000 entered here using
the LDA instruction would designate the following addresses:
Ch1 – V2000/2001, Ch2 – V2002/2003, Ch3 – V2004/2005,
Ch4 – V2006/2007. See note on page 9-9.
OUT
V7701
The octal address (O2000) is stored here. Special V–memory location
V7701 is assigned to the option slot and acts as a pointer, which
means the CPU will use the octal value in this location to determine
exactly where to store the incoming data.
LD
K0
Loads a 0 into the accumulator to set the following parameters in
(V7703 – V7706).
OUT
V7703
Special V–memory location assigned to the option slot that specifies the
thermocouple input type or voltage range selection. CJC is disabled with
voltage selected. K0 selects J type thermocouple with CJC enabled.
See table on page 8-9 for selections.
OUT
V7704
Special V–memory location assigned to the option slot that specifies
the Units Code (temperature scale and data format) selections.
K0 selects º F temperature scale and magnitude plus sign bit format.
See truth table on page 8-10 for selections.
OUT
V7705
Special V–memory location assigned to the option slot that specifies
the thermocouple burnout detection enable/disable.
K0 selects burnout detection enabled.
OUT
V7706
Special V–memory location assigned to the option slot that specifies
the thermocouple up scale/down scale burnout value. K0 selects an
up scale value at burnout. FFFFh for unipolar inputs and 7FFFh for
bipolar inputs at burnout. The value is written to the channel input
register when a thermocouple burnout occurs.
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
Chapter 15: F0-04THM 4-Channel Thermocouple Input
DL05 Example 2
The example program below shows how to setup the F0–04THM for 2 input channels enabled,
use of a K type thermocouple on the first 2 input channels, BCD channel data format, ºC
temperature scale, 2’s complement format, and burnout detection enabled with a down scale
burnout specified. Again, place this rung in the ladder program or in the intial stage if you are
using stage programming instructions.
SP0
LD
K0200
-or -
LD
K8200
Loads a constant that specifies the number of input channels to scan
and the data format. The upper byte, most significant nibble (MSN)
selects the data format (0 = BCD, 8 = binary). The LSN selects the
number of channels (1, 2, 3 or 4).
The binary format is used for displaying data on some operator
interface units. K8200 enables 2 channels in binary format.
OUT
V7700
Special V-memory location assigned to the option slot that specifies
the data format and the number of channels to scan.
LDA
O2000
This loads an octal value for the first V-memory location that will be used
to store the incoming data. For example, the O2000 entered here using
the LDA instruction would designate the following addresses:
Ch1 – V2000/2001, Ch2 – V2002/2003
See note on page 9-9.
OUT
V7701
The octal address (O2000) is stored here. Special V–memory location
V7701 is assigned to the option slot and acts as a pointer, which
means the CPU will use the octal value in this location to determine
exactly where to store the incoming data.
LD
K1
Loads a constant that specifies the input type. K1 selects K type
thermocouple with CJC enabled. Enter a K0–K14 to specify the input
type. See table on page 8-9 for selections.
OUT
V7703
Special V–memory location assigned to the option slot that specifies
the thermocouple input type or voltage range selection. CJC is
disabled when voltage is selected.
LD
K3
Loads a constant that specifies the Units Code (temperature scale and
data format). K3 selects º C and 2’s complement data format.
See truth table on page 8-10 for selections.
OUT
V7704
Special V–memory location assigned to the option slot that specifies
the temperature scale and data format selections.
LD
K0
Loads a constant that enables/disables the thermocouple burnout
detection function. K0 selects burnout function enabled.
OUT
V7705
Special V–memory location assigned to the option slot that specifies
the thermocouple burnout detection enable/disable.
LD
K1
Loads a constant that specifies the thermocouple burnout data value at
burnout. K1 specifies a down scale value of 0000h to be written to the
channel input register when a thermocouple burnout occurs.
OUT
V7706
Special V–memory location assigned to the option slot that specifies the
thermocouple up scale/down scale burnout value. The value is written
to the channel input register when a thermocouple burnout occurs.
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
B
C
D
15–13
Chapter 15: F0-04THM 4-Channel Thermocouple Input
DL06 Example 1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
B
C
D
15–14
The example program below shows how to setup the F0–04THM in option slot 1 for 4 input
channels enabled, use of a J type thermocouple on all 4 input channels, BCD channel data
format, ºF temperature scale and magnitude plus sign bit format, and burnout detection
enabled with an up scale burnout specified. Use the table shown on page 15–8 to determine the
pointer values if locating the module in any of the other slots. Place this rung anywhere in the
ladder program or in the initial stage if you are using stage programming instructions.
This is all that is required to read the temperature or voltage input data into V-memory
locations. Once the data is in V-memory you can perform mathematical calculations with the
data, compare the data against preset values, etc. V2000 is used in the example but you can use
any user V-memory location.
SP0
LD
K0400
-or -
LD
K8400
Loads a constant that specifies the number of input channels to scan
and the data format. The upper byte, most significant nibble (MSN)
selects the data format (0 = BCD, 8 = binary). The LSN selects the
number of channels (1, 2, 3 or 4).
The binary format is used for displaying data on some operator
interface units. K8400 enables 4 channels in binary format.
OUT
V700
Special V-memory location assigned to option slot 1 that specifies
the data format and the number of channels to scan.
LDA
O2000
This loads an octal value for the first V-memory location that will be used
to store the incoming data. For example, the O2000 entered here using
the LDA instruction would designate the following addresses:
Ch1 – V2000/2001, Ch2 – V2002/2003, Ch3 – V2004/2005,
Ch4 – V2006/2007. See note on page 9-9.
OUT
V701
The octal address (O2000) is stored here. Special V–memory location
V701 is assigned to option slot 1 and acts as a pointer, which means
the CPU will use the octal value in this location to determine exactly
where to store the incoming data.
LD
K0
Loads a 0 into the accumulator to set the following parameters in
(V703 – V706).
OUT
V703
Special V–memory location assigned to option slot 1 that specifies the
thermocouple input type or voltage range selection. CJC is disabled with
voltage selected. K0 selects J type thermocouple and CJC enabled.
See table on page 8-9 for selections.
OUT
V704
Special V–memory location assigned to option slot 1 that specifies
the Units Code (temperature scale and data format) selections.
K0 selects º F temperature scale and magnitude plus sign bit format.
See truth table on page 8-10 for selections.
OUT
V705
Special V–memory location assigned to option slot 1 that specifies
the thermocouple burnout detection enable/disable.
K0 selects burnout detection enabled.
OUT
V706
Special V–memory location assigned to option slot 1 that specifies the
thermocouple up scale/down scale burnout value at burnout. K0
selects an up scale value at burnout. FFFFh for unipolar inputs and
7FFFh for bipolar inputs. The value is written to the channel input
register when a thermocouple burnout occurs.
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
Chapter 15: F0-04THM 4-Channel Thermocouple Input
DL06 Example 2
The example program below shows how to setup the F0–04THM in option slot 2 for 2 input
channels enabled, use of a K type thermocouple on the first 2 input channels, BCD channel
data format, ºC temperature scale, 2’s complement format, and burnout detection enabled
with a down scale burnout specified. Use the table shown on page 15–8 to determine the
pointer values if locating the module in any of the other slots. V-memory location V3000 is
shown in the example, but you can use any available user V-memory location. Again, place this
rung anywhere in the ladder program or in the initial stage if you are using stage programming
instructions.
SP0
LD
K0200
- or -
LD
K8200
Loads a constant that specifies the number of input channels to scan
and the data format. The upper byte, most significant nibble (MSN)
selects the data format (0 = BCD, 8 = binary). The LSN selects the
number of channels (1, 2, 3 or 4).
The binary format is used for displaying data on some operator
interface units. K8200 enables 2 channels in binary format.
OUT
V710
Special V-memory location assigned to option slot 2 that specifies
the data format and the number of channels to scan.
LDA
O3000
This loads an octal value for the first V-memory location that will be used
to store the incoming data. For example, the O3000 entered here using
the LDA instruction would designate the following addresses:
Ch1 – V3000/3001, Ch2 – V3002/3003
See note on page 9-9.
OUT
V711
The octal address (O3000) is stored here. Special V–memory location
V711 is assigned to option slot 2 and acts as a pointer, which
means the CPU will use the octal value in this location to determine
exactly where to store the incoming data.
LD
K1
Loads a constant that specifies the input type. K1 selects K type
thermocouple with CJC enabled. Enter a K0–K14 to specify the input
type. See table on page 8-9 for selections.
OUT
V713
Special V–memory location assigned to option slot 2 that specifies
the thermocouple input type or voltage range selection. CJC is
disabled when voltage is selected.
LD
K3
Loads a constant that specifies the Units Code (temperature scale and
data format). K3 selects º C and 2’s complement data format.
See truth table on page 8-10 for selections.
OUT
V714
Special V–memory location assigned to option slot 2 that specifies
the temperature scale and data format selections.
LD
K0
Loads a constant that enables/disables the thermocouple burnout
detection function. K0 selects burnout function enabled.
OUT
V715
Special V–memory location assigned to option slot 2 that specifies
the thermocouple burnout detection enable/disable.
LD
K1
Loads a constant that specifies the thermocouple burnout data value.
K1 specifies a down scale value of 0000h to be written to the channel
input register when a thermocouple burnout occurs.
OUT
V716
Special V–memory location assigned to option slot 2 that specifies the
thermocouple up scale/down scale burnout value. The value is written
to the channel input register when a thermocouple burnout occurs.
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
B
C
D
15–15
Chapter 15: F0-04THM 4-Channel Thermocouple Input
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
B
C
D
Negative Temperature Readings with Magnitude Plus Sign
With bipolar ranges, you need some additional logic to determine whether the value being
returned represents a positive temperature/voltage or a negative temperature/voltage. There is a
simple solution:
• If you are using bipolar ranges and you get a value greater than or equal to 8000H, the value is
negative.
• If you get a value less than or equal to 7FFFH, the value is positive.
The sign bit is the most significant bit, which combines 8000H to the data value. If the value is
greater than or equal to 8000H, you only have to mask the most significant bit and the active
channel bits to determine the actual data value.
The following two programs show how you can accomplish this. The first example uses
magnitude plus sign (binary) and the second example uses magnitude plus sign (BCD).
Since you always want to know when a value is negative, these rungs should be placed before
any other operations that use the data, such as math instructions, scaling operations, and so
forth. Also, if you are using stage programming instructions, these rungs should be in a stage
that is always active. Note: you only need this logic for each channel that is using bipolar input
signals. The examples only show two channels.
Magnitude Plus Sign (Binary)
15–16
Check Channel 1
SP1
V2000
LD
V2000
Load channel 1 data from V-memory into the
accumulator. Contact SP1 is always on.
AND
K7FFF
This instruction masks the sign bit of the binary data, if
it is set. Without this step, negative values will not be
correct so do not forget to include it.
OUT
V2010
Put the actual signal value in V2010. Now you can use
the data normally.
K8000
욷
Check Channel 2
SP1
V2002
K8000
욷
C1
OUT
Channel 1 data is negative when C1 is on (a value of
–1.0 reads as 8010, –2.0 is 8020, etc.).
LD
V2002
Load channel 2 from V-memory into the accumulator.
Contact SP1 is always on.
AND
K7FFF
This instruction masks the sign bit of the binary data, if
it is set. Without this step, negative values will not be
correct so do not forget to include it.
OUT
V2012
Put the actual signal value in V2012. Now you can use
the data normally.
C2
OUT
Channel 2 data is negative when C2 is on (a value of
–1.0 reads as 8010, –2.0 is 8020, etc.).
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
Chapter 15: F0-04THM 4-Channel Thermocouple Input
Magnitude Plus Sign (BCD)
Check Channel 1
SP1
V2001
LDD
V2000
Load channel 1 data from V-memory into the
accumulator. Remember, the data can be negative.
Contact SP1 is always on.
ANDD
K7FFFFFFF
This instruction masks the sign bit of the BCD data, if it
is set. Without this step, negative values will not be
correct so do not forget to include it.
OUTD
V2010
Put the actual signal value in V2010. Now you can use
the data normally.
K8000
C1
욷
OUT
Check Channel 2
SP1
V2003
K8000
욷
Channel 1 data is negative when C1 is on (a value of
–1.0 reads as 8000 0010, –2.0 is 8000 0020, etc.).
LDD
V2002
Load channel 2 from V-memory into the accumulator.
Remember, the data can be negative. Contact SP1 is
always on.
ANDD
K7FFFFFFF
This instruction masks the sign bit of the BCD data, if it
is set. Without this step, negative values will not be
correct so do not forget to include it.
OUTD
V2012
Put the actual signal value in V2012. Now you can use
the data normally.
C2
OUT
Channel 2 data is negative when C2 is on (a value of
–1.0 reads as 8000 0010, –2.0 is 8000 0020, etc.).
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
B
C
D
15–17
Chapter 15: F0-04THM 4-Channel Thermocouple Input
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
B
C
D
Module Resolution
Module Resolution 16-Bit (Unipolar Voltage Input)
Unipolar analog signals are converted
into 65536 (216) counts ranging from 0
to 65535. For example, with a 0 to
156.25mVDC signal range, 78mVDC
would be 32767. A value of 65535
represents the upper limit of the range.
Unipolar Resolution =
5VDC
156.25
mVDC
2.5VDC
78
mVDC
0VDC
0 VDC
H–L
65535
H or L = high or low limit of the range
0
32767
65535
Counts
Module Resolution 15-Bit Plus Sign (Bipolar Voltage Input)
15–18
The module has 16-bit unipolar or 15bit + sign bipolar resolution. Bipolar
analog signals are converted into 32768
(215) counts ranging from 0 to 32767.
For example, with a –156.25mVDC to
156.25mVDC input signal range,
156.25mVDC would be 32767. The
bipolar ranges utilize a sign bit to
provide 16-bit resolution. A value of
32767 can represent the upper limit of
either side of the range. Use the sign bit
to determine negative values.
156.25
mVDC
5 VDC
0 VDC
0 VDC
–156.25 –5 VDC
mVDC
32767
(sign bit = 1)
0
Counts
Bipolar Resolution =
H–L
32767
H or L = high or low limit of the range
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
32767
(sign bit = 0)
Chapter 15: F0-04THM 4-Channel Thermocouple Input
Analog Input Ladder Logic Filter
PID Loops / Filtering:
Please refer to the “PID Loop Operation” chapter in the DL06 or DL05 User Manual for
information on the built-in PV filter (DL05/06) and the ladder logic filter (DL06 only) shown
below. A filter must be used to smooth the analog input value when auto tuning PID loops to
prevent giving a false indication of loop characteristics.
Smoothing the Input Signal (DL06 only):
The filter logic can also be used in the same way to smooth the analog input signal to help
stabilize PID loop operation or to stabilize the analog input signal value for use with an operator
interface display, etc.
Warning: The built-in and logic filters are not intended to smooth or filter noise generated by improper
field device wiring or grounding. Small amounts of electrical noise can cause the input signal to bounce
considerably. Proper field device wiring and grounding must be done before attempting to use the filters
to smooth the analog input signal.
Using Binary Data Format
SP1
LD
V2000
Loads the analog signal, which is in binary format
and has been loaded from V-memory location
V2000, into the accumulator. Contact SP1 is
always on.
BTOR
Converts the binary value in the accumulator
to a real number.
SUBR
V1400
Subtracts the real number stored in location
V1400 from the real number in the accumulator,
and stores the result in the accumulator. V1400
is the designated workspace in this example.
MULR
R0.2
Multiplies the real number in the accumulator by
0.2 (the filter factor), and stores the result in the
accumulator. This is the filtered value. The filter
range is 0.1 to 0.9. Smaller filter factors
increases filtering. (1.0 eliminates filtering).
ADDR
V1400
Adds the real number stored in
location V1400 to the real number
filtered value in the accumulator, and
stores the result in the accumulator.
OUTD
V1400
Copies the value in the accumulator to
location V1400.
RTOB
Converts the real number in the
accumulator to a binary value, and
stores the result in the accumulator.
OUT
V1402
Loads the binary number filtered value from
the accumulator into location V1402 to use in
your application or PID loop.
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
B
C
D
15–19
Chapter 15: F0-04THM 4-Channel Thermocouple Input
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
B
C
D
NOTE: Be careful not to do a multiple number conversion on a value. For example, if you are using the pointer
method in BCD format to get the analog value, it must be converted to binary (BIN) as shown below. If you
are using the pointer method in Binary format, the conversion to binary (BIN) instruction is not needed.
Using BCD Data Format
15–20
SP1
LDD
V2000
Loads the analog signal, which is in BCD format
and has been loaded from V-memory location
V2000, into the accumulator. Contact SP1 is
always on.
BIN
Converts a BCD value in the accumulator to
binary.
BTOR
Converts the binary value in the accumulator
to a real number.
SUBR
V1400
Subtracts the real number stored in location
V1400 from the real number in the accumulator,
and stores the result in the accumulator. V1400
is the designated workspace in this example.
MULR
R0.2
Multiplies the real number in the accumulator by
0.2 (the filter factor), and stores the result in the
accumulator. This is the filtered value. The filter
range is 0.1 to 0.9. Smaller filter factors
increases filtering. (1.0 eliminates filtering).
ADDR
V1400
Adds the real number stored in
location V1400 to the real number
filtered value in the accumulator, and
stores the result in the accumulator.
OUTD
V1400
Copies the value in the accumulator to
location V1400.
RTOB
Converts the real number in the
accumulator to a binary value, and
stores the result in the accumulator.
BCD
OUTD
V1402
Converts the binary value in the accumulator
to a BCD number. Note: The BCD instruction
is not needed for PID loop PV (loop PV is a
binary number).
Loads the BCD number filtered value from
the accumulator into location V1402 to use in
your application or PID loop.
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
Chapter 15: F0-04THM 4-Channel Thermocouple Input
Thermocouple Burnout Detection Bits
Special Relays Corresponding to Thermocouple Burnouts
The following Special Relay (SP) bits can be used in your program to monitor for thermocouple
burnout.
SP bit :
0 = Thermocouple OK
1 = Thermocouple burnout
DL05 and DL06 Option Slot
Module Channel
DL05
Slot
DL06
Slot 1
DL06
Slot 2
DL06
Slot 3
DL06
Slot 4
Channel 1
SP600
SP140
SP240
SP340
SP440
Channel 2
SP601
SP141
SP241
SP341
SP441
Channel 3
SP602
SP142
SP242
SP342
SP442
Channel 4
SP603
SP143
SP243
SP343
SP443
DL05/06 Option Modules User Manual; 7th Ed., 5/07
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
B
C
D
15–21
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising